murphy b 40 manual
DESCRIPTION
The Murphy B40 Series of Naval Communications Receivers were receivers for shipboard use (British Navy, submarine), coverage 640 kHz to 30600 kHz in five ranges, IF-selectivity 1kHz/3kHz/8kHz, BFO. Also fix-frequency xtal-option. Model suffix A, B, C or D, the B40A, B40B, B40C and B40D, are some in details different variants. Also referred as "lighthouse- or tower-receiver" or "boat anchor radio" (because receivers weigh 75kgTRANSCRIPT
THlS BOOK IS THE PROPERTY OF H.M. GOVERNMENT
Handbook for
A.P. 57140 SERIES
RECEIVER B40
A N Y SUGGESTIONS FOR AMENDMENTS OR ADDITIONS TO THlS BOOK SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO THE CAPTAIN SUPERINTENDENT. A.S R E..
THROUGH THE USUAL CHANNELS
R A D I O E Q U I P M E N T D E P A R T M E N T - A D M I R A L T Y MAY, 1956. (R.E. 384 /56)
CHANGES
When a change to t h i s handbook i s incorporated the brief
de ta i l s required below are t o be f i l l e d i n .
Con t i nued Over1 e a f
L 1
INITIALS
I
DATE OF INSERTION
CHANGE No.
AUTHORITY ( P Series No. )
i n this *
d & m $& ?X
A
I
i
Amendment
repr in t ,
6 7
r
3
i
Nos. 1-6 and Change Nos.
R N D A S P 5 3 f 6 7 R~t?AsP++a /d7
'.
1-5 are incorporated
3-PEC-dS 3 - P E ~ - 6 8
B a
R" 9 4
!3 -A i= PC -A k 0 m 8
a
2 + -2 k *rl U
P! 4 k
'I4 R
H
a a
PC - N m e 0 ace ,-N?O%- P-4
r ( V m m -4-n~ o em\oP:o\ P:*?mhNhmPI.o m m m m r n m m + c u v g r n m d c u 4 ~ + % rnnmz;f \ o \ O \ O v ) \o\o\o I %Sd%d%o% \O\D\O\O LnLnLnLn t n l nmo3o r r , ~ n m n ~ n m m l n o %
3GG-I " ?g?%v%V'-#2 w\O\D\O \O \Owmomo \ O \ O m o m o m o \O\O\Ow rr,w\Omo
0 ~ 0 ~ 0 \ 0 0 ~ 0 ~ m o m o m o m o m 0 CnCU C n N Cncu m C U mcu CnCU C R N ma C A N mcu ma Ln In n n l n In L n L n L n l n L n
*rl n d n n -I4 n n n *rl n n *rl n m n n n +> .I4 *rl T i 3 + a,, *d .d 3 3 +> o r ( -4 .,-I 3 + *rl Sr-4 *rl .C( *I4 .I4 b +> .I4 .,-I .d 3 b -4 - . C I . C ( . d .r., -.,,.I(.,, V .,, -.,+.,, .,, V .r( -.,,.,,.5 2 -.,,.,,.A . V .,, .,, .,, V m m v*rlu m a .-/ad- m m -*d - a a w,r'- a m -2- : i u .,, w 0 R - oc3 u o a - 0 a 0 a w
PI a, & $ PI @ PI 0 PC a, P-4 a + +> 4= 4= -t= rr)H m H \OH LnH P--H
*In g* + % * +>
% * +>
gm !3 3 S 4 . ri *rl w & u2
B m * m @ rn 5 m
ii iz E iz
=? s 8 s % Q 3 3 3 0 ? ? 2 P r
* d- r
ST c- S; PC c- P- Ln ln Ln Ln
-
Previous Change No. 5 - R.N.B.A.S. ~ .588/65 R.N.B.A.S. ~ . 5 3 / 6 7
B.R.1617 - HANDBOOK FOR A.P.57140 SERIES
RECEIVER B.40 - CHANGE NO. 6
(D.G.w. (N) - February, 1 967)
Removal and I n s e r t i o n Changes
P a r t 2, Chapter 8, Paragraph 18 (on reverse of Figure 5).
Remove and destroy l e a f comprising Figure 5 and paragraph 18 and i n s e r t new l e a f attached.
Manuscript Changes
P a r t 2, Chapter 6, Paragraph 3. I n first l i n e , a f t e r "trimming too l" i n s e r t f t ( ~ . ~ . 7 1 4 7 9 Trimming ~ o o l ) " .
P a r t 3, Figure 10. Locate "R114" and "R120" and amend values t o read "47 k" . P a r t 3, Components L i s t f o r 57140D I.F. U n i t (following Figure 16).
Amend A.P. number of R201 and R205 t o read "022-3039". - Record the inse r t ion of t h i s Change on the Change Record Leaf a t the
beginning of B.R.1617,
This Sheet is issued with A.L. No. 1 August, 1956 B.R. I617
Admiralty, S. lira 1.
UY, 1956
Be Re 161 7 "Handbook for A.P. 57140 Series Receiver B4-0" having been approved by My Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty is hereby promubatdm
B.R. 1617 and Addendum "Handbook for Receiver l34A), 1946'' i s hereby superseded and o q i e s should be disposed of in accordance with instructions in B.R.I.
By Comand o f Their Lordships.
To: Flag Officers and Commanding Officers of H.N. Ships and Vessels concerned.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August, 19%
HANDBOOK FOR A. P. 57140 SERIES, RECE- BljD -------_-_-_---_--------------------------- --------I---------------------- ------------
UST OF CONTENTS ------------_--- ---------------
SUMMARY OF TlATA
INTRODUrn ION
OPERATING INSTRUCTICNS
CXAETER 2 B R m TECHNICAL DESCRLPTIQN
CHmCER 3 DETTAILED CIRCUIT DESCIIIPTICN
CHAFTm 4 RECEIVER PATTElRN Dll%'EF(ENCES
CWm 5 DISMANTLING THE lBCETVER
CHAPTHi 6 AUWi-
czw3'ER 7 -CE TESTS
CIiAIZCER 8 REPAIR W A FOR MARK 4. PUGS AND SOCXETS
C-ER 9 REPAIR RAW, TUNING DRIVE MECHANIa
pm 3
IIUJSTRATIONS, CONIPQNENTS LISTS AND COIL RATA
~ 5 2 ~ 1 V r Q ~ u t t j r ~ caw, CAn L CDW
nraDDqFC:
Receiver B40 is the main unit in Receiver 3utfiZs CDW and CAQ f i t ted i n Ye:<. Ships ami R.N. Shore Wirel?as Stations respec t iveU. Five v e r s i o x c i the receiver are i n scrvice - Patterns 571$0 /k /5 /~ and D,
C.W. and A.H. Voice Pa t te rn 57?i+OD is s u i t a b l e far* the reception of F.S.Y..
C"'?I!~Y?V D f i Y G C
Five rary,?s, givir-ig c~nC!nuou co?rarage f r o i n 653 kc/s t o 30 Mc/s, Intermncd!st: frequency - 500 Isc/s.
~ a r r t T tcUut$>L - pESC?tP*!QM The receiver is dlq?i5eii lnto S 2 e e segarE;+,e units as fo1lo:is:-
R.F. 2 n t t [A l l p t t e r i x )
S t a e I R.F. & ~ 1 1 t i e r , incorporating anzi -cmssaadula t lon can tml and hamonic frequency teed f m tba 3.F.O. for calibration purposes,
Stage 2 R.F. A q l i f t e r , A.G.C. VolTxgs a?plied,
Stage 3 Mixer, eiaploying a separate oscfllator whicl'l can be crystal control led. Flne adjustment of asc i 113t0r 15 pravi ded in Pa t te rn 571 4013.
ldoce: Patterns 571 4 0 C / D has th2 f npur, circili t mod1 ti ed f o r Zomnon Aerial Working. - 1 .Fa Unit; (Pattern 57140/A)
Stage 4 IoFo Amplifier, A.5.C. v o l t ~ e apyli ?d.
Stage 5 1.F. Amgliffer, A,c.C. vol*%ge applied.
Patterns 571 krR/c/D
I ,F. Anpli f ier, w t t i l c r y s t a l Sand-pass f i l t e r ( I kc /s ) A o G o C e v 0 1 t ~ ~ f mpliXle
S t ~ e 6 1.F. ~miff ier, se:orlii detect~r, 1.F. Amplifier, second detector, noise l imi ter and r;oi se l:nI t e r and B .F .O. C.F.O. In D Pattern,3,F.OO is modified t o give
addi t tonal 911 &"and ~l lov r~ posit ions for F .S,K. ::r~P~lr on WwfdeR position,
Note: ~ h c 0 . ~ ~ 0 ~ is c r y s t a l controlled ro r calibrating. -
A three position band-width switch allows for 1.F. pass bands o t 8 kc/s (wide) and 3 kc/s (narrow) i n all patterns. The th i rd posi ti on o t t h i s swf tch incorporates an audio note t i l t e r (band-pass 20 c/s, c e n n trequency 1 0 c/sJ in Patterns 57140IA; the 1 kc/s crysta l band-pass t i l t e r is substi tuted in Patterns 5714C81~I~
A o F o and Pomr Unit
Stage 7 L.F. -1Jtier
Stage 8 Output.
Sensitivity:- Voice 4pV for a 20 d3 signel and noise to noise ratio.
C.W. 2 p t o r a 20 d3 s igna l and noise to noise ra t io .
Selectivity: - Wide Band - + 4 kc/s l o r 6 a. Narrow Band + 1.5 kc/s t o r 6 63. crysta l F i l t e r ? 0.5 kc/s tor 6 d3 - Patterns ~ ~ C B / C / D only.
Image Rejection:- 3 23 Mc/s:- be t t e r than 40 cB. 53 1.05 Mc/s:- be t t e r than 95 dB.
A.G.C. performance:- For 80 d3 change in input voltage, output chmge is less than 3.3 dB.
Noise Limiter:- Ettective between modula.ion depths of 1% and &$.
Mar. Power Output:- Loudspeaker - 2.5 Watts. Ship's control system - 35 rdtl. Telephone - 14 ntl.
Power Supply: - 1151230V W 6 0 CIS A.C. Power Consumption: - 80 watts.
F a c i l i t i e s are available for connecting both lovr impedance (80 ohms) arxi high impedance ae r i a l s t o P a t t e n s 57140/1VB and low ingedance ae r i a l s t o Patterns 57l&/D. The ae r i a l system normally ccmprises standard rrire or whip aerials.
Pattern 571401) con-ns l a t e r type valves replacing the obsolescent types f t t e d in the earlier patterns.
B.~o1617.
E.935 (Ship) E.945 (Shore).
B.649 (Ship) B.705 (Share .
This Bheet issued with A.L. No. 5, m y , 1959
I N T R O D U C T I O N
1. Receiver B40, covered in this Handbook, is available in several different f o m (~dmiralty Pattern No. 571 40 series), differing appreciably in
teahnical detail. The book a l s o cwers Receivers 62B Patterns 67757 and 67757~ which are basically the same as B4.0 but a m primarily for S.R& use.
2. The bulk of the book therefom, covers the mceivcr i n general terms, where possible* Whem th is is not p o s s ~ o l o , ~ v i d u a l descriptions of features
in the different types are given.
3. Related diagrams, drawings and illustrations a m placed adjacent to the t e x t to mi& they refer. Cross refemme to other portions of the book is made
by quoting the chapter and paragraph thus+
4-0 In the Chapters dealing with Ali-nt Procedures and Pexfonnance Testing, different techniqes have been laid down for use according t o t he ~ @ - e x i @
of the TestEquipment available. Xngeneral, only the simplest procedures are visualised as being undertaken i n seagoing ships. Nevertheless, these should suffice t o maintain the eqyipent at a vely high skindad of perfolmance. The subject is fU1y cwered i n the introduction to the Chapters devoted t o Alignment and Perf'onnance Measurement.
5 e The circuit diagronr, for the B40D receivers, have, in many cases, different circuit references t o those shown i n the equivalent diagrams f o r the other
patterns, especially w i t h regard to the RF. Unit. Therefore descriptions of t h e W D should be read only VJL~A reference to the circuit dingram concerned, for that pattern.
6. The five patterns af the I340 receivers are generally identified t;~rou@out the Handboolc as BW, BNA, BWB, Bt$OC! and BUD, but f o r a l l other purposes
it must be remembered t h e t every receiver in t he range is a B W and t h a t its tyFe is indicated by t h e suffix to its pattern nrrmber.
7. Receivers BW, B4U.A and B W B are considered to be completely interchangeable, end any one of these be replaced by a B m or W D . For comnon aerial
walking, B W or BND is necessary; only BWD provides facilit ies for f. s.k. reception.
T h ~ s sheet rssued wlth A.L. No. I August 1956
PART I
OPERATION AND TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
B.R. 1617 Par t I
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August, 1956 B.R. 1617 LIST OF CCNTENTS CHAPTER 1
C H A P T E R 1 ----------- ------ ----------------
O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S =========================--------=====----=
Para. - I n i t i a l Setting-up To tune in a rewired signal To receive signals from a s t a t i o n Function of other controls Extermal Connections
FIGURES
Receiver NO. A.P. Nos. 5 7 1 w ~ - photograph Receiver B40. A.P. Nos. 57140B C - photograph Receiver B40. A.P. Nos. 57140/D - photograph
Fig.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August, 19% B.R.1617 CHAPTER 1
C H A P T E R I =================
0 P E R A T I N . G I N S T R U C T I O N S ------------------------"--------===---------- .............................
Initial Set t ingdp - Figs. d , 2 and 3 - -I . (1) Ensure that the output line i s connected, i f not, switch in the
Dwqy Load, i.e. switch toggle towards the front of the receiver.
(2) Place the Shins Switch i n the ttONv position. Until it has m i m e d up, there w i l l be a tendency for the receiver t o d r i f t slight3y off h e .
(3) Limiter switch t o "OFF".
(4) Bandwidth switch t o "NARROV1l or "3 kc/stt.
(5) Crystal switch t o "OFFt1.
(6) Loudspeaker switch t o "OFFt'. Use 'phones.
(7) System switch to 'YtVNEtt.
( 8) Ant i-Cross -Mod. Control fully c l o c ~ s e .
(9) A.G.C. switch (where f i t t ed) t o "ONtt.
To tune-in a required s i g m l
2.(a) If the seation has been "logged" and the precise setting on the logging scale i s knm, set the Band switch to the appropriate waveband and adjust the tuning control to the required logging scale gosition, search to and fro across th is set t ing unt i l . the required stat ion i s heard. Tune very carefully t o the "dead space" of the signal, then se t the System Switch t o the "HIGHt' or "m' position, for the reception of C.W. signals, or t o the "R/T" position for the reception of "Voice" signals.
NOTE: The HIGH and LOT/ positions of the System Switch are provided t o clear - "Adjacent Channelw interference when receiving c.w. signals. The position selected should be the one gives greatest freedom from th i s type of interference.
See paragraph 3 ( g ) for the f u l l use of the System Switch,
(b) If no logging scale setting for the required stat ion is available, se t the Q7ave-band Sa;itch and Tuning control t o the approximte tuning position. Then proceed as f ollavs : - ( 4 ) Set the System Snritch t o "GAL. 'I.
(2 ) Tune to the zero beat of the calibration nark (black spot) nearest to the rewired frequency.
"FIAFTER 1
(3) Shift the tuning drum cursor, by means of the cursor ad justmelit, un t i l the arral- i n the centre lines up with the "dead spacett.
(4) Set the System Switch t o "TUNE", and ad just the tuning control t o the required frequency. Search t o and f ro over th is setting un t i l the stat ion i s heard. Tune very carefully to the "dead space" of the signal then set the System Switch to the "HIGHtt or "Id?" position for the reception of caw. si-ls, or to the R/T position for the reception of "Voice" signals.
(5) Record the logging scale reading.
(c) A s the operation of Receiver &OD for f. s.k. reception involves indications on f.s.k. terminal equipment, it i s not included in this handbook, Information i s given inA.S.R.E. Note 3/55 - Introduction of Radio Teletype (R.A. T. T. ) i n He Iii. Ships.
(d) Adjust gain controls as follows:-
(1) AF Gain to give a suitable level i n the Remote Reception positions.
(2) Gain Control to give adequate level to operator's 'phones.
To receive signals from a stat ion
3. The satisfactory reception of signals, whether Morse or Voice, vhether or not in the presence of interference, jamning or fading, requires an
understanding of the function of the various controls provided. A detailed explanation of the use of each corrtrol provided for th i s purpose, and its effect upon the incoming s i g m l is given belaw:-
C ~ y s t a l Switch
(a) This switches i n or out of circuit, a crystal whose f inction is t o maintain the receiver accurately a t a frequency determined by the crystal frequency. The crystal i t s e l f is housed i n the Crystal Compartment. A p i l o t l ight shm-s behind a s lot i n the door of t h i s compartment when the Crystal Switch is in the "Wtt position.
~ s c i l l a t o r Trimming Control ( ~ 4 0 ~ O ~ L Y )
(b) This i s a fine tuning control for the local oscillator, enabling smll adjustments t o be made on ei ther side of the normal setting. The scale has ten divisions mrked 5 - 0 - 5, viewed through a window i n the panel. This control is used fo r making fine tuning adjus-hnents, p m i c d a r u when receiving automtic telegraphy transmiss ions.
Antidross-Modulation Control
(c) This control i s normally i n the "fully c l o c ~ i s e " position, and is used when cross qodulation interference is encountered. This f ~ r n of interference is rare, and may be recognised by the rriinner i n which the interfering signal "ridestt on the wanted signal. It sedsss ;Then the anted signal ceases, e.g. between morse symbols, and cannot be removed by tuning re-ad justments. It can be minimised, and possibly eliminated, by rotating the Anti-Cross-ldodulation Control to t h e poiat \$here the interference i s least,
This Sheet issued with AoL. No, 1 August 1956 B,Ro1617 CHAPTER 1
Liriliter Switch ( ~ ~ ~ 2 0 3 ) and Limiter Control ( ~ ~ 2 2 0 ) L
(d) Under coriiit ions of severe interference, pulse or otherwise, the Limiter Switch (SVf203) should be e t c h e d "ONtt. The amount of l imitation imposed on the interference is effected by the Limiter Control ( ~ ~ 2 2 0 ) . When the control is fully clockwise, limiting action i s minimum. A s the control i s turned anti-clockwise, the amplitude of the interfering signals are reduced. The optimum position for t h i s control is the point where interference cannot be reduced aqy f t r ther without undue distortion of the speech or (as in the case of morse signals) reducing the wanted signal also.
A. Go C. Switch ( ~ ~ 2 0 6 ) &~B/c/D
( e ) This m-itch \rill normally be set t o "ON", so that the a.g.c. c i rcu i t is operative, Only when a very ~ e a k signal is being received should it be necessary t o mi tch off a.g. c. Then switched "ON", the a.g.c. system levels out variations of signal strength due t o fading, or variations of signal strength among ships aperating on the same frequency. I n the case of receivers W/A, a.g.c. is switched "O~Vtl or "OEFt' according t o the position of the System Switch (SV202).
Bandwidth Switch (EN201 )
(f) W/A
(i) This is a three position switch giving two positions of IF selectivi ty 8 kc/s and 3 kc/s. I n the third position, the bandwidth remains a t 3 kc/s, but an additianal Note F i l t e r with an effective audio bandwidth of approximitab 2C0 4 s a t 1 kc/s, i s brought in to c i rcui t i n the Al? Unit. In the W l D E position, the b. f. o. circui t i s inoperative.
( i i ) A similar switch to that already described f o r the previous two patterns, is used t o provide bandvridth positions of 8 kc/s, 3 kc/s and 1 kc/s. The third position is a 1 kJs Crystal F i l t e r c i rcui t which replaces the Note F i l t e r of the ear l i e r patterns. The be f. 0.
functions i n a l l three positions.
System Switch ( ~ 2 0 2 )
(g) This switch permits selection of the following positions:-
CAL - ( i ) This i s used when tuning-in a stat ion which has not previously been
logged. It permits the scale t o be set accurately t o the frequency i n we. The receiver is tuned to the dead-space of the calibration signal nearest t o the required signal frequency, and the curs- is 'rotated t o the black spot denoting the calibration point i n question.
R/T (voice)
(ii) This position is used when receiving Voice signals.
TUNE - (iii) \?hen tuning-in a station, t h i s position is used. The tuning control
should be adjusted t o the dead-space of the required station. Subsequently, the System Switch should be se t t o R/T. fo r "Voice" signals, or t o HIM or IXT;7 for marse signals.
HIGH or Ixrm
( iv) Vheii receiving mcrse, i f interference from a s ta t ion working on an adjacent channel is experienced, the switch should be se t e i ther t o HIGH or WW, according t o which position affords the greatest freedom from interference. This i s most effective on the 1 k d s position,
(v) The a.g.c. c i rcu i t is inoperative in th i s position. It should be used only when very strong interfering signals are experiemed. Under these circumstances, i f the a. g. c. c i rcui ts are i n use, they w i l l tend t o produce such large a. g. c. voltages, that reception is blocked.
It must be remenibered hmever, that i n the IvIANUAL position, the b.f.0. is a t 500 kc/s and w i l l produce "dead spacet' tuning conditions i f the wanted signal is tuned i n accurately. The receiver must therefore be detuned s l ight ly t o ensure an audible note f r o m the wanted signal.
F.S.K. Faci l i t ies only)
(vi) Two additional positions are provided on the System &itch f o r Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) reception. These are marked "FSK WIDE -HIGH-" and "FSK W I D E -LOW-" and are used fo r the reception of signals ~ i t h a frequency sh i f t of 200 - 1000 c/se The HIGH and LOW C.W. positions renrain the same (1000 c/s above and below the IF) and are also used for the FSK NARROW shift (0 - 200 J s ) , so that the System Switch i n this pattern has the following settings: -
System
FSK IJIDE IXlW FSK W I D E HIM FSK NARROW FSK NARRmd
C.W. HIGH
TUNE RT CAL -.
I SwitchPosition
I
I 2 3 4 5 6 7
Thf s Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 ~~R.1617 CHAPTER 1
AF Gain Control ( ~ ~ 2 2 4 )
(h) This control is normally set to give the required volume on the remote loudspeakers and 'phones connected t o the control system. The de@;ree of automatic control afforded by the a.g.c. system should ensure that variations i n strength of incoming signals, w i l l not often require a change i n the setting of the AJ? Gain Control.
Gain Control ( ~ ~ 3 0 5 / 3 0 9 )
( j) ( i ) \hen the a. g.c. system i s i n use, th is control affects 064 the loudness of the signal heard i n the built-in loudspeaker o r receiver telephones. It does not d f e c t the level i n the control sys tern.
( i i ) When the a. g. c. is inoperative, i. e. i n MANUAL or A. G* ' O F F t , the overall signal level, both local and remote, i s varied by th i s control,
40 The h c t ion of the other controls is as f ollm-s: -
(a) This i s the turret svitch vjhich selects the appropriate coils fo r each waveband, a t the same time illuminating the relevant d i a l scale.
Tuning A ss embly
(b) Tuning f ac i l i t i e s are situated in the centre of the receiver and consist of the tuning drum, its associated cursor adjustment and dial locking device, logging scale and flywheel tuning drive; the knob being a t the lmter centre of the instrument. Tuning i s by means of f o u r ganged capacitors, one i n each of the two RF amplifiers, the mixer, and local oscil lator circuits. The drive operates the tuning drum through a 20: 1 reduction gear bax, a j : l reduction i s made i n the transmission to the ganged capacitors through a chain drive. Receivers B@B/c/D employ a modified drive incorporating a f ir ther gear box between the ganged capacitors and the chain drive. A stopping device a t each end of the drive travel prevents damage t o the ganged capacitors.
Tuning D r u m
(c) The five scales - one for each band - are positioned on the drum a t a s l ight an l e t o the horizontal. A s the drum rotates, the cursor r ises or f a l l s f' depending on the direction of rotation) a l lming two revoluti.ons of the drum between the stops a t the ends. Calibration points on the scales are indicated by dots, and the alignment reference points are indicated by a + sign.
Cursor Shift Control
( d ) This is a knurled wheel behind the curved hinged cover a t the top of the central part of the front panel. It i s used t o enable the cursor t o be aligned with the calibration mrks on the tuning scales.
CHAPTER 1
Dial Lock
(e ) Situated a t the right hard side of the tuning knob, th i s lever controls a device for holding the tuning assembly i n a particular setting, Loading springs prevent excessive pressure being placed on the locking mechanism, A thumb set screw a t the side of the l eve~preven t s it dropping und e r sevefe vibrat ion.
Monitor Loudspeaker and Switch
( f ) This i s used fo r local loudspeaker reception. It is switched "On" o r "Off" by means of the Loudspeaker Snitch, and can be used i n c i rcui t n-hether or not the external l ines are connected. The audio autput is relat ively small, and care must be taken not t o overload it by using excessively high settings of the gain control,
Telephone Jacks JK301/2
(g) Headphones pattern 17621, impedance 600 ohms, should be inserted in to these jacks. Either two or three contact jack plugs m y be used.
Earthing Terminal
(h) This terminal is situated a t the bottom right-hand side (as seen by the operator) of the receiver, beluw the 'phone jacks.
h m n y Load Switch Sf204
(j) It i s essential t h a t th i s switch is i n the ON position, i.e. with the lever tm-ads the front of the receiver, when the 600 ohms output l ine is not i n use. The switch then comects a d q load res is tor of 620 ohms across th i s line. The switch is placed i n the Om position when a remote loudspeaker i s connected i n the line.
Scale Lamps Brilliance Control IN125 B~.o/A/B/c RV102 &OD
(k) Part of th i s control is i n series with the scale lamp selected by the Bandm-itch and adjusts tile brightness of the scale lamps.
NOTE: Controls .described i n ( J ) and (k) above, are a t the back of the IF - and RF Units.
External Connections
5 Power Supply
( a ) The paver supply is fed t o the receiver v i a a Ilk. 4 plug and socket on the front panel,
The remainder of the external connections are mde to the plugs and sockets on the brackets a t the rear of the Ill? and IF units,
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 ~~R.1617 CHAPTER 1
Aerial Input Plug PLIO'I
(b) This is a four pin ikrk 4 plug, situated a t the rear of the RF Unit. Pins B and C are used fo r the low impedance ae r i a l inputs. A high impedance ae r ia l may be connected t o pin D i n N+~/A/B receivers only; there i s no high impedance ae r ia l input provided i n B&OC/D receivers. Pin A is earthed.
RIS Socket SKI02 (SK~OI, BbOD)
(c) This is a coaxial type socket ( rear of the RF unit). Outputs from R I S Outfits can be applied t o the receiver, through th i s plug.
REC Socket - SK202
( d ) This is a coaxial type socket, situated a t the rear of the IF Unit. This IE' Output can be used for Outfit REC.
REB Socket - SK203 ( e ) This is a coaxial type socket, situated a t the rear of the IF Unit.
This socket i s the one nearest t o the RF Unit, and provides d.c. for use with Outfit REB.
(f) This is a Mark 4 six pole sealed type plug, providing three cutput channels as follows : - ( i ) Pins A and B deliver 2.5 watts into a 600 ohms line. This output
i s normally connected t o a remote loudsgsa ker.
( i i ) Pins C and D deliver 35 in to a 600 ohms l ine frorn a separate winding on the transformer.
( iii) Pins E and F give an output of 14 mW in to a 600 o h line. They are an extension of the headphone and moilitor loudspeaker circuits.
( iv ) Pins A and F are earthed.
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956
DUMMY LOAD SWITCH MONITOR L/S (SW204) E
CURSOR ADJUSTMENT
/
B.R. 1617 Chapter l
FIG. I
CRYSTAL I
SCALES
CRYSTAL (SW 1 02)
ANTI-CROSS MOD.
(RV 102)
BAND SWITCH - (SWIOI)
GAIN (RV 305/109)
- PHONES (JK 30112)
MA1 NS 'INPUT LOGGING TUNING DIAL LOCK EARTH (PL 301)
RECEIVER 8.40 PATTERN 57 1 4 0 / ~
T h ~ s sheet Issued with A.L. No I August 1956 I3.R 1617 Chapter I
FIG. 2
DUMMY LOAD SWITCH MONITOR LIMITER CURSOR (SW204) (SW203) ADJUSTMENT SCALES
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL (SW 1 02)
ANTI-CROSS MOD.
(RV 102)
BAND SWlTC ' (SWIOI)
GAIN (RV 3051309)
. PHONES (JK30112)
MAINS / \
(SW301.) MAINS INPUT LOGGING TUNING DIAL LOCK (PL 30 1 )
RECEIVER 8.40 PATTERN 5 7 1 4 0 ~ 1 ~
This sheet ~ssued with A.L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Chapter l
FIG. 3
DUMMY LOAD MONITOR LIMITER SW CURSOR SWITCH
SCALES CRYSTAL (SW203) ADJUSTMENT
RECEIVER B40 PATTERN 57 1 40 D
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B,R.1617 CHAPTER 2
C H A P T E R 2 -_-_---_--------- -----------------
B R I E F T E C H N I C A L D E S C R I P T I O N -----------------------I-I--------------------- ----- --- ....................................................
LIST OF CONTENTS Para. -
Introduction la? U n i t IF U n i t AP and Power Unit Receiver 62B
Block Diagram shaving inter uni t connections - BW/A/B/C Block Diagram showing in ter uni t connect ions - &OD
L IMITER
I A L-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -~ MAINS
INPUT
FIG. I BLOCK DIAGRAM SHOWING INTER UNIT CONNECTIONS
A.P 57 1 ~O/A/B/C
This sheet issued w ~ t h A'L. No. I Augu
r I - - - - - - - - - - -
- 1 i i t I
- ' 5 n
C 3 cL G + n
L u
Z a C , g 4-7
3 I I p+l.,---z. = I :
gr 0 I
I
I I
I I
r ~ - - ~ I ,------------: --------- J
I
I
I I I ,
;= k I - I - -
W,,, 0 7 ~ 3 LV) OD
J g5 I I I I I I I \ I I I
A
5 n
I
I I +-----
I
N S g 3 L ------ --. z z :
r7d > I a I u I
I I
I d "I 2 I I
yi 2 I
! * "? ci; V --.---.-
j - a - m - - - o ~q-
- $+--, I-.-. ---- N
I I 0 + ' G d Y v)
#€, : f + " I+ ' - - 32 5 el . : ' , ' S ~ - CL r N d ' !2$ > 30
& " t
S3NOWMVH 1VlSW2
1 1
L----'.! ,
This Sheet issued with AoLo No. 1 August, 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 2
C H A P T E R 2 --_-------------- ---------------9-
B R I E F T E C H N I C A L D E S C R I P T I O N ===============================------- --===.=========
( ~ e f e r t o Figs. 11, 12 and 13, C h a p t ~ 3)
Introduction
1 This section i s devoted to a brief description a t block diagram level of the arrangement and connections of the receiver, For a fill
detailed explanation of the c i rcu i tg , Chapter 3 (Detailed Circuit Desc r i~ t ion) should be read,
2, The mceiver B40 is a conventiomL commnications receiver for the reception of Voice, c.w, and f. s. k. signsls i f i the frequency range
650 kc/s t o 30 ~\fc/s, Five versions of the receiver are a t present i n service, and are identified under the pattern numbers 57140, 57140A, 57140B, 57140C and 57140D. These are customarily referred to, other than i n Naval Store transactions, as B40, BWA, WOB, B40C and BWD. The main differences between the five versions are given belaw, For f u l l details see Chapter 4.
BL@. Origina 1 version, - BbQA. Physical changes in the layout, mechanical changes t o f'acilitate -
maintenance, and the substitution of improved components i n certain cases,
W B . Re-designed tuning d r ive , the addition of a crystal f i l t e r i n the - IF circuits, note f i l t e r deleted, AeG. C. switch fi t ted, System switch mcd i f ied, mains transformer replaced, inrproved h. t. smoothing incorporated and a wave-band indicator fitted,
&0C. 150dif ications in the RF assembly to adapt the receiver for - Comnon Aerial Working.
W D . This receiver is fi t ted r i t h preferred valves, which has made - necessary some changes i n the component values of the associated circuits. The b. fa oe and 1, o. circuits are modified to adapt the receiver for f. s, k. reception, There are two extra b.f, om pitch positions, for wide-band f. s. k. operat ion, thus the SYSTW switch i n this pattern has seven positions. The 1, o. circuit is modified t o incorporate a fine tuning control (OSC TRuN), which is f i t ted t o the fkont panel, This trirmer gives a fine adjustment t o the local oscillatortuning, to compensate for transmitter frequency drift,
3, The instrument is of unit construction, consisting of:- RF Unit, IF Unit, AF and Power Unit. These three units, each with their cvm
controls, are inter-coimected and mounted on the framework vi-hich f i t s into the receiver case. The tuning drive mechanism, and front panel are also mounted separately on th i s framework,
CHAPTER 2
4. The frequency range is covered in five bands, a turret miitching arrangement selecting the required band. Switching t o a particular
band illumimtes the appropriate scale. A logging scale i s provided t o fac i l i t a te re-setting the receiver t o a particular frequency or station.
5. Faci l i t ies are provided for the follming functions : - (a) hhtching the receiver t o ei ther a high impedance or inpedance
aerial , ( ~ m impedance only, in Receivers &oc/D).
(b) Varying the selectivity by changing the banhidth.
(c) Reduction of interference by use of a noise limiter.
( d ) Reduct ion or elimination of cross-modulation interference.
( e ) Provision of f ac i l i t i e s for reception of: - (ij C.W. - by means of a beat frequency oscillator.
( i i ) F. S.K.
( i i i ) Voice (WT) selected by means of a SYSTEX SPZTCH.
This switch, in the CAL position, brings into operation a calibrator circuit which is used to check the set t ing accuracy of the scale.
(f) Automatic gain control, t o provide a reasonably constant level of audio frequency output, rihere the input signal or signals i s not of constant strength.
( g ) Crystal control of the local oscillator when exceptional frequency s tab i l i ty is required,
(h) Control of receiver gain.
6* The audio frequency output can be used locally a t the receiver f o r telephone or monitor loudspeaker reception, or can be fed to remote
positions for loudspeaker or telephone reception via 600 ohm lines.
7. The receiver m y be operated frm a 230 volt or I t 5 volt, 40 t o 60 cycle a.c. supply,
8. A brief description of the units comprising the receiver, and the function and operation of the controls, i s given belovv-.
RE-' UNIT
9. (a) The input circuits t o t h i s receiver are designed t o finction v i t h either high o r 1m impedance aerials, excepting &0C and W D , which have the low impedance input only. It contains the f i r s t three stages of the receiver; two RF stages and the mixer stage.
The f i r s t RF stage is a conventional RF amplifier, viith an Anti-Cross- Modulation control i n the g r i d circuit.
Thf s Sheet issued with A.L, No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 2
The second T(F stage is also a conventional Rl? amplifier, with a. g. c. amlied.
The frequency changer stage employs a mixer valve, with a separate local oscillator valve.
(b) The receiver covers a frequency range of 640 kc/s t o 30 idc/s, i n f ive bands as fol1mv's:-
10. (a) There a re three stages of amplification a t an intermediate frequency of 500 kc/s. The third stage incorporates the detecting, a. g.c. and noise l i m i t e r diodes. To receive c.m. signals and t o calibrate the receiver, the b. f. o. output i s also mixed x i t h the IF signal i n th i s stage, and the resultant audio signal passed t o the f i r s t audio amplifier i n the follaving unit. A. G. C. voltage may be applied to the f i r s t tx-o stages.
C
Band
1
2
3
4-
5
(b) Different degrees of IF selectivi ty are available. These and associated circuits are as follmis: -
(i) Tn--o positions of selectivi ty "Wide" Three positions of selectivi ty - 8 kc/s, "Naarrmt" - 3 kc/s ( the 8 kc/s, 3 kc/s and 1 kc/s. third position of the a-iitch The l a s t position i s a 1 kc/s concerned is a 200 c/s audio note crystal band-pass f i l t e r in f i l t e r i n the AF and Payer unit). the second Il? grid circuit .
Frequency Range
640 kc/s to 1.65 Iic/s
1.57 Mc/s t o 4.1 i11c/s
3.9 MC/S to 10 Mc/s
9.5 MC/S t o 18.5 hic/s
17.6 bic/s t o 30.5 Xc/s
( i i ) A.G. C. voltage automatically applied A.G.C. i s controlled by an for a l l conditions of working 0 4 0 f f switch, for a l l excepting BTANUAL. conditions of working*
t
(c) The operating conditions controlled by the SYSTmI sr,itch are as f 0llooris:-
Receivers ~40/.4
Receivers B~OB/C
Receiver
6 position SYSTEM switch
5 position SYSTEM mi tch
7 position SYSTBX switch.
CHAPTER 2
(i) Rcceiver BL+o/A/B/c - SYSTEM X I T C H -
(ii) Receiver W D - SYSTE3i SI'iITCH -
A s ifidicated above, the beat th i s unit. For calibration,
r
System
Manual
Low
High
Tune
frequency oscil lator the 500 kc/s crystal
I
-
Cond i t ion
b,f.o. a t IF
b.f.0. a t Il? - l kc/s
b.f.0. a t IF + 1 kc/s
b. f. o. a t IF (for i n i t i a l tuning)
~ / ~ ( ~ o i c e )
C a l :
-. Patterns 57140E/~ Patterns 57140/~
I
Switch Position
1)
2 1 b. f 0.
3 svitched on
4
5 1 6
7
b
is included in controlled position
Si. POS.
1
2
3
517, Pos.
-I
2
3
4
The a. g. c. can be switched On or Off a t any position of the sviitch j 4 -.1
is used t o give suitable ch&k points on the scales. The monitor loud-speaker and 600 o h main output socket are also mounted on th is
b.f.0. off
AmG*C.
On or Off
I)
I t
A.G.C. 4.
Off
On
On
On
System
FSKlii.de - Lmr
FSK Wide - High
FSK Narrm- - L m
FSK Narra.3- - High
Tune
R/T (voice)
Cal.
uni to
t t
Cond it ion
b.f.0. a t IF - 2.55 kc/s
be f. o. a t Il? + 2.55 kc/s
b.f.0. a t IF - 1 kc/s
b.f.o. a t IF + l kc/s
b.f.0. a t IF ( fo r i n i t i a l tuning)
bo foe. O f f
b. f. 0. crystal controlled a t IF
b. fm o. crys ta l controlled On ; On
a t IF i
tr
--- I
Thi a ahset issued wl th AIL* NO. 5, ~ u l y , . I 959
AFmPotmUNIT
11. (a) The audio amplifier consists of a pre-amplifier and Ule output stage. The o q l i n g between these two stages is normally resistance capacity, but in W/A, position thme of the BandPPidth switch replaces t h i s coupling with the note f i l ter , tuned to 1000 c/s.
(b) There are three audio outputs.
(i Monitor Loudspeaker and Headphones A l l these outputs are (ii External loudspeaker I nominally a t 600 ohms. (iii Ship's Control System
(c) The Power Unit consists of hot. supply circuits employing a double diode rectifier valve connected to the mains tmnsfozmer to give M l vmve recti- fication. In the BkOD, two replacement double diodes a m used with the anodes strapped, i n the s a m type of circuit. A stabilised h.t. supply is prwidea to the l o ca l oscillator. Supplies f o r thevalve heaters andp i lo t lamps are also derived frm the unit.
RECEIVER 6 2 ~ - h Pa 677'7
42. (a) The Receiver 6 2 ~ is similar to the 3 0 , but has facilities to make it suit- able for use w i t h Sound Reproduction Equipment. Bands I and 2 cover d i f f e r ontfrequencies to those of t h e B40 and the audio frequency circuits are modified to plwri.de a suitable output level with adequate AF response. The output transformer TR3Ol is different , the S.R. E. output being obtained frm Pins F and B of the output plug PL203. The circuit diagram (Fig. 65, Part 3) and asnociated components l ist is at the end df 'this handbook.
(b) The f reqyency bmds a m as follows: - B m d I 750 kc/s - 300 kc/s
Band 2 5 60 kc/s - 1.5 NC/S
Band 3 3.9 MC/S - 10 lilc/s
Band 4 9.5 NC/S - 18.5 LIC/S
Oznd 5 17.6 lfq/s - 30.6 ?JC/S
q3. This is the re-valved version of the 62B Receiver. Certain component changes hove been made vis-bvis the original pattern receivers t o adapt t he
c i r cu i t s t o changes in characteristics pertaining t o the new m e valves fitted. The c i r c d t d i a ~ l m and associated components list appear in Part J (Fig. 66).
This Sheet issued with A.L, 410. -1 &us& 1 9 3 B,~.1617 CHAPTER 3
C H A P T E R 3 ==------- -------- -------I-,-----,
D E T A I L E D C I R C U I T D E S C R I P T I O N ------------------------------------------------------- ------------,---------,-------------,---
UST OF CONTENTS
Para. - Circuit References Aerial Circuits F i r s t Rl? Amplifier Second RE' Amplifier Frequency Changer and Local Oscillator Three stage IF Amplifier A, Go C. Circuit Noise Limiter Beat Frequency Oscillator First Al? Amplifier Output Circuits Gain Circuits Rectifier and Stabilising Circuits Reception of Frequency Shift Keyed T~nsmissions (&OD) R F F i l t e r Unit, Des. 12
Fig.
Siliqlif i ed variable frequency oscil lator circuit Crystal controlled oscillator N oi se Limi ter Noise Limiter ] principles of operatton
B.F.O. c i rcui i simplified ~40[a/B/c B.F. 0. c i rcui t simplified BJ.@~ . Output Lines Gain Circuits F i l t e r Unit Des. 12. A.P. 56152 Circuit Diagram F i l t e r U n i t Des, 12. A.P.56152 Instal lat ion Diagram Receiver B4.0. A,P.~~IL+O/A Circuit D i a g m and Components List Receiver B40, A. P. 57140~ /~ Circuit Diagram and Components List Receiver B&O. A . P . 5 7 1 ~ Circuit Diagram and Components L i s t
his Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 ~ . ~ . 1 6 1 7 CHAPTER 3
D E T A I L E D C I R C U I T D E S C R I P T I O N -----_-_--_-_-_---------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------
Circuit References
1 . The circuit references quoted i n th is chapter, refer particularly t o the pattern or patterns of the receiver described, as the references
are not necessarily the same for the same component i n different pattern circuit diagrams; th is is especially the case with BWD. Circuit changes made necessary by the introduction of l a t e r type valves i n the B40D are given i n Chapter 4.7.
AERIAL CIRCUITS
2. &o/A/B Fig. 11
(a) A transnission l ine or low impedance aer ia l source, is connected t o the primary of the f i r s t KF transformer TRIO1 through Pins B and C of Plug PL101. This prinrary has a nominal impedance of 80 obs. These pins are not earthed, the aer ia l being connected via a co-axial transmission line ( ~ . ~ . l j 8 j l ) of 92 ohms characteristic impedance. A high impedance ae r i a l may be connected thruugh Pin D of the same plug, t h i s inplt feeding directly into the secondary side of TR101, which i s the g r i d c i rcui t of the f i r s t Rl? amplifier ( v I o ~ ) , tuned by the ganged variable capacitor C1 12, and the associated triinmers and padders Cloy, Cl 1 0 and C111. The RF transformer, trimmers and padders fo r particular ranges are contained i n the turret. On Ranges 1, 2 and 3, CllO and Clll are omitted. Pin A on PLlOl i s the earth connect ion.
B&OC/D Fig. 13
(b) These patterns are designed for HF receiver common aer ia l working (c. a.w. ), and for t h i s purpose, the lmi impedance input circuits in the turret are modified by the addition of capacitors on Ranges 1, 2 and 3. This i n effect converts the primary of TRIO1 into a x element t o form part of a f i l t e r netu~ork, when several receivers are t o be worked from a common aerial. For information concerning common aer ia l 1%-orking, refer to B.R. 1 615. There i s no provision for a high impedance aer ia 1.
( c ) I f reference is lnade t o Fig. 12 (&OB/C c i rcui t diagram); NOTES 1 and 2 indicate which components are f i t t ed to the different pattern receivers.
FIRST RF AI\PLDIrn
3. BGO/A/B/C Figs. 11/12
(a) Tile signal passes to the g r i d of the f i r s t RF valve VlOl ( t h i s is a high slope pentode, 10 mA per volt), through the coupling capacitor C102 f r m the tuned g r i d circuit. The anode c i rcui t of t h i s
consists of the paras i t ic stopper R105 and the priimry of the second ELF in tercoupl ing transformer TR102. \/hen the SYSTBvi switch Sf202 i s i n the "CAL" position, cal ibrat ion signals a r e fed into t h i s circui t , through the capacitor Cl31. I11 t h i s posi t ion h. t. is not applied t o V101, so tha t a e r i a l signals a r e not received; the remaining trro tuned RF c i r c u i t s give suff icient se l ec t iv i ty and amplification t o receive harmonics from the b. f. o., t o cover the en t i r e range of the receiver. Fulses from an RIS o u t f i t m y be fed i n t o the suppressor grid of VlOl through Socket SK102.
(b) The ANTI-CROSS-MOD control RV102 varies the grid bias on 8101. Vhen a large RF signal, other than the tuned signal is present a t the grid of V101, the se lec t iv i ty of the f i r s t RF stage my be inadequate t o prevent overloading of the valve. De-modulation takes place i n the f i r s t RF valve, and the interfer ing s ignal modulates the rianted one. By varying the bias on 8101, the \-forking point on the m t u a l charac ter i s t ic of the valve can be chosen so that de-modulation does not occur, or i s minimised.
B40D Fig. 13 - ( c ) The c i rcui t is s imi lar t o that of the other p t t e r n s . The replacement
valve type CV4014, has been incorporated in to the c i r cu i t rsithout any component values requiring modification. An additional r e s i s to r R130 is included t o l i m i t the bias voltage developed i n the cathode c i r c u i t of' V101, and a crystal r e c t i f i e r ( i ; ~ l ) i s connected betvieen the s l i d e r of the ANTI-CROSS-hiOD control (RVIOI), and the low potent ia l end of R130, t o ensure that the grid of V l O l is never driven posi t ive by large input voltages, resul t ing i n a flovi- of grid current. The ef fec t of t h i s g r i d current would be t o reduce the input resistance of the valve and heavily damp the associated tuned c i rcui t , thus reducing se lec t iv i ty and increasing cross-modula tion. The additional c i r cu i t i\lXl and RljO, prevents t h i s condition.
4. &O/A/B/C Figs. 11/12 -
(a) Valve V102 i s a variable rm pentcde viith a mtual conductance of 2 mA per volt. Its grid c i r c u i t is tuned, and comprises the secondary of transformer TR102, a sect ion of the ganged capacitor C116 and t h e e capacitors C1 93, C114 and C115. The coupling between the primary and secondary of transformer TR102 i s adjusted a t manufacture. The anode load consists of r e s i s to r s R l l j and R114 i n paral lel , these r e s i s to r s are of equal value and a re connected i n t h i s manner t o provide the required dissipat ion without increasing the s i ze of the components. The s ignal i s pa ra l l e l fed to the frequency changer grid c i r cu i t via capacitor C121 and tine primary winding of the transformer TR103.
(b) Stage gain i s controlled mnually ( R V ~ O ~ ) , o r by the a.g.c. voltage. I n W/A, position 1 of the SYSTIU svi tch is f o r rranual control, other positions of t h i s switch giving automatic control. I n Receivers B&OB/C the a. g. c. ON/OW sviitch SV206 determines the type of control.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1 617 CHAPTER 3
(c) For m m a l control, bias i s fed t o the cathode res i s to r R115 from the mnual GAIN control RV305, vhich i s i n the cathode return of V102 and the other ~ l v e s tha t a r e othenvise controlled by the a. g, c. voltage, The a, g. c, voltage is fed to the grid thraugh the res i s to r R1.12.
W D Fig. 13 - ( d ) Excepting minor changes rrade necessary by the change of valve, which
i n t h i s case i s type CV454, the e lec t r i ca l character is t ics of the c i r c u i t i n t h i s pat tern are the same as those i n the other patterns. The values of cer ta in components (see Chapter 4.7) have been modified so tha t the correct valve potentials, a. g. c. character is t ic and stags gain of the valve are maintained,
FREQUENCY (2ELANGE.R AND LOCAL OSCILIIATOR
5. &O/A/B/C Figs. 11/12
(a) Signals from the previous stage are fed via TR.103 t o the tuned grid c i rcu i t of the frequency changer, consisting of the secondary of the transformer, a section of the ganged capacitor (3.125, and the three c ~ p a c i t o r s (2122, GI23 and C124. The valve VlO3 i s a triode-heptode, only the heptode portion of which is in use. The local osc i l la tor s ignal i s fed into the i n ~ e c t o r grid ( ~ i n 4 ) . The anode c i r c u i t includes the tuned primary of the f i r s t (ZF transformer TR104; t h i s together with the tapped secondary is mounted i n the RF' Unit giving l m impedance coupling to the IF Unit. The c o i l L201, which is tuned, becomes the input c o i l i n the LF Unit.
(b) TM local osc i l la tor functions either:-
A s a normal variable osci l lator , tracking with the incoming radio frequency signal t o produce the intermediate frequency signal; or crystal controlled t o provide stable reception on f i x e d frequencies.
Detai ls are a s fol lms:-
TO MIXER MAIN H.T.
4 4 i) Variable Frequency Osci l lator Crystal S~itc5h Om
SIMPLIFIED VARIABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
FIG. I
This is a conventional Hartley c i rcui t ; wit'n both s ides of the sect ion of the ganged capacitor (3135 ( ~ 1 2 6 , &OD) insulated &om earth, The output from the frequency changer is taken from the anode thrcugh C130 (~184, Bl+CD). \;&en the CRYSTAL m-itch is s e t t o OFF, the crystal terminals are short-circuited t o minimise the effect of the c rys ta l on the l cca l oscillator.
CHAPTER 3
( i i ) Crystal Controlled Oscillator
C-rystal %-itch CN
T!hen svitched t o t h i s method of opera tion, the c i r c u i t becomes a Colpitts c rys ta l oscillator, coupled electronical ly t o the anode c i rcui t ; which i s tuned to the required harmonic of the crystal. A table showing hat- these frequencies are determined is given belmv'. The function of L101 (~106, WD) i s to provide a high impedance RE' path from the cathode t o earth.
CIRCUIT 6ECOME5 EMRCISED FO FEED HET. VOLTS TO MIXER WHEN TUNED TO
MIXER MAIN H.T.
FUNDAMENTAL OR HARMONIC OF CRYSTAL F REOUENCY
/
CRYSTAL CONTROLLED OSCl LLATOR
FIG. 2
Note. The four tufied c i r cu i t s i n the RF Unit have the associated components - with the exception of the ganged capacitors, located i n the t u r r e t sn-i tch comprtments f o r the individual wavebands.
Band Derivation of Crystal Freq.
kc/s
S ignal Fre quenc y (s) kc/s
Range of Crys t a 1
Frequencies
~ h f s Sheet Issued with AoL. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 3
B40D Fig. I3 - (c) (i) Frequency Changer Stage
This stage i s s w l a r to the other patterns. The new valve CV2128 mde certain minor changes i n component value necessary, to maintain the correct working levels of the valve,
( i i ) Local Oscillator Circuit
A modification has been mde i n the local oscillator c i rcui t t o f ac i l i t a t e f. s. k. reception, consisting of a small variable capacitor (3159, added across part of the co i l L101, t o give fine tuning. The capacitor is driven by a slow motion drive from a control on the front panel narked OSC TRIM (see Fig. 3, Chapter 1). A scale having ten d i v i s i ~ n s mrked 5 - 0 - 5 i s viewed through a urind w i n the panel. The range of the f ine tuning is approximately + 5 kc/s a t 20 k / s , and there i s a proportional decrease i n t h i s .I
range as the frequency is reduced. The function of t h i s control is explained in para. 16, which deals with requirements fo r f. s. k, reception, and the means whereby they are provided i n this pattern of the receiver. The local osci l lator valve is nmi type CV4014.
THREE STAGE IF AWLIFIER
/ Pigs. 11/12
(a) This amplifier f ollmts conventional l ines employing variable mu pentode valves V201, V202 and V203. The centre freqyncy is 500 kc/s. The MNDVIDTH switch S17201 changes the coupling between the primary and secondary windings of each of the transformers TR201, TR202 and also TRIO4 ( T R ~ 16 WD) i n the RF Unit. In position 1 (TIDE) the vj ind ings are over-coupled, giving bandwidth of approximatel 8 kds . I n ~ 4 0 / ~ receivers, positions 2 and J (NARROVJ & NOTE-FIIE~Q the coupling is loose, giving a bandvridth of approximately 3 kJs.
(b) I n Receivers B~OB/C the second position of the BANDITID!l!H switch is the same, but the third i. e. position s~ii tches a double crystal gating
. circui t into uperation instead of the audio note f i l ter . By reference t o the c i rcui t diagram Fig. 12, it w i l l be seen that t h i s c i rcu i t is
omted i n the g r i d circuit of valve V202. It consists of a 1 k s pass-band f i l t e r , switching i n on the third position of the inc 7 BAI\IDVIDTH svci tch.
(c) A. G.C. voltage can be applied t o valves V201 and V202, by means of the SYSTEnii switch i n Receivers B&O/A and the P-.G.C. ~ / 0 3 3 ? w i t c h i n B~OB/C/D (see Fig. 8). When snitched t o marual operation the a.g.c. l ine is earthed and the gain set t ing determined by the set t ing of the manual RF GAIN control RV305,
( d ) An output for the IF method of working Outfit REC is taken from the cathode resistors ~235/210 of the third IF valve V203, t o the co-axial socket SK202,
CHAPTER 3
B40D Fig. 13 - ( e ) The replacement valves i n the IF Unit are a l l Type CV131. The value
of the valve cathode resistors i n the f i r s t tvi-o stages has been reduced to ensure the correct biaeirg of the valves.
A. G. Ce CIRCUIT
7. (a ) A.G.C. rec t i f ica t ion i s carried out by half of the double diode valve
(~204a), fed from the primary side of t n e l a s t I!? transformer TR203. The cathode of th is valve is biased from the potential divider R212 and R213 t o give the requisite delay voltage. The load comprises two resistors R214 and R215 (~236/7 i n BwB/c/D); the fill a. g. c. voltage being applied t o the RF and IF stages concerned. The tapping from the load applies part of the available voltage to the grid of the f i r s t audio frequency amplifier V301.
B ~ O / A Fig. 11 - (b) For COW. operation, res is tor R217 and capacitor C219 are short-
circuited by the SYSTE3,I switch SE202b/c, positions 2, 3 and 4. This reduces the resistance and increases the capacity of the line, t o shorten the voltage build-up and retard the decay time. A s soon a s the COW. transmission commences a. g. c. voltage i s applied, and retained during the telegraphic spaces i n the carrier. I n switch position 5, R217 and C219 are i n c i rcui t t o make equal the a.g.c. voltage build-up and decay time, fo r effective voice or king, when the ca r r ie r is constant during transmiss ion.
B ~ O ~ C Fig. 12
(c ) The a. go c. time constant c i rcui ts are modified to give an 0.1 second charge and 1 second discharge for a l l systems of operation. R217 and C219 are deleted from these patterns.
B40D Fig. 13 - (d) The c i rcui t is not changed f'undamentally from the BUB/C version,
excepting that the values of resistors ~ 2 1 2 , R213 and R237 are changed t o a l t e r the delay voltage and the a.g.c. voltage supplied t o the f i r s t A 3 mplif ier .
This Sheet issued with A&. No. 1 August 1956
NOISE LIMITm
4 FIG. 3
(a) Under normal signal conditions, an alternating voltage a t 560 kc/s with AF modulations superimposed is developed across the secondary of TRZO3 such that, when the anode of the detecting diode (~204b) is positive with respect t o the cathode, the diode w i l l conduct. RF f i l t e r s remove the carr ier frequency, leaving only the rect if ied modulation. C m e n t w i l l flm- through the c i rcui t RV220, R221 and R222; the point 'XI becoming negative with respect t o point 'Yt .
(b) C230 w i l l charge through R225 and due t o the long time constant of . t h i s circuit, the point ' 2 ' w i l l take up a mean d. c. level w i t h respect
x t o earth ( ~ i g . 2). x - 1 4 ~ 1 -28 V 1 z
ANODE POSITIVE WlTH RESPECT TO CATHODE
NOTE. THE VOLTAGES OUOTED ARE EXAMPLES ONLY
FIG. 4
A.F. OUTPUT
ANODE NEGATIVE WlTH RESPECT TO CATHODE. THE DIODE CUTS OFF WHEN THE ANODE REACHES "21 -6.
(c) Since the anode of V2O5a is connected t o point 'Yt, whilst i t s cathode is connected via R225 and ~ 2 2 6 t o a point of relat ively negative potential on RV220, the diode w i l l conduct. I$ w i l l thus present a lm impedance t o the Al? mcdulation, which w i l l be coupled by C229 t o the A2 GAIN control.
CHAPTER 3
(d) hieam-hile the cathode of V205b i s connected virtually t o point 'Y' (due t o the low impedance presented by ~205a), whilst i t s anode is connected via R225 t o a point of re la tively lm- potential on RV220. The valve is theref ore, non-conducting.
(e) For the proper understanding of the noise limiting act ion of the circuit, i t should be realised that the potential a t point 'Y' varies with the modulation. Point '2' , however, remins a t a fa i r ly steady d. c. potential, due t o the long time constant of R225 and C230.
(f) A pulse of interference w i l l have the effect therefore, that instantaneously, the potential a t '2' ~ v i l l not change but the potentials along the chain RV220, R221 and R222 w i l l increase thei r negative value as shmn i n Pig. 4.
( ) Vhen the voltage a t 'Y' f a l l s below the voltage a t 'Z', V205a will cease t o conduct.
(h) Thus the voltage a t V205a cathode, passed to the audio c i rcui ts is normally not limited, but sharp peaks of interference vi l l be clipped rrPO
( J) I f , due t o the self-capacity of V205a, some of the interfering pulse passes through the valve a f te r it has become non-conducting, it is shunted t o earth via C23O and VZO5b, whose cathode i s now nemtive with respect t o i t s anode and is therefore conducting.
(k) It w i l l be seen that RV220 can vary the potential between 'Y' and 'Z', and consequently the depth of modulation that can be passed without clipping. I n th i s case it is a maximum of 8@% with the sl ider of RV220 a t the top, and IC$Q a t the bottom where the points 'X', 'Y' and 'Zt are a t the same potential.
BEkT FR3QUENCY OSCILLATOR
&)/-~/B/C. Fig. 5.
(a) The circuit functions as a Hartley oscil lator i n the COW. positions of the SYSTDd switch SW202, is inoperative i n the q / ~ position, and is crystal controlled i n the CAL position. I n receivers &o/A, the oscillator does not function i n the Y/IIZE position of the EMJDT$iMIH switch SV201, as i n t h i s position the screen supply t o the valve is broken. 15th the SYSTEN snitch i n the CAL position, the screen draws its h.t. supply from another source of higher potential, t o increase the screen current and make the circuit oscillate, so as t o provide the range of harmonics rewired. This also ~ a k e s the calibration fac i l i ty independent of the position of the BANDV4IlXH switch. In BWB/C the b.f.0. functions on a l l positions of the BANDTIIM'H switch.
This sheet issued w ~ t h A L. No. 2 October 1957 B.R. 1617 Chdpter 3
FIG. 5 PIN 7
PL 2 0 4
- C W POSITIONS
SW 2 0 2 POS. L SYSTEM FREO.
PATTS. PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 1 ~ . 5 7 1 4 0 8 1 ~ .
I L 2 0 4 MANUAL 500kc /s 2 I L 2 0 3 LOW 499kcls 3 2 SHORT CCT. HIGH 501 kc/s 4 3 L 2 0 4 TUNE 500kc / r
* SW2Ole PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 1 ~ . DIRECT CONNECTION PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 8 I ~ .
, R 2 3 2 , I O K
SW 2 0 2 POS. 5 PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 1 ~ . POZ 4 PATTS. 5714081~ .
( INOPERATIVE)
P IN 4 P I N 7 PL 2 0 4 PL 2 0 4
I I r r '1 C232 so2
- --- - lOOp
R 2 3 0 IOK
CAL SW 2 0 2 PO$. 6 PATTS. 57140/A.
POS. 5 PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 8 / ~ . (FREO. 5 0 0 kc/s.)
B.F.O. CIRCUIT SIMPLI'F.IED A.P 5 7 1 4 0 / ~ / ~ /
his Sheet issued with A&. No. 1 August 1956 ~ .~ .1617 CHAPTER 3
(b) The main tuned circuit consists of L202 and C236 and resorates 1 kc/s above the IF of 500 kc/s. The operating frequencies of the b.f'.o. are depicted in Fig. 5, the SYSTEM switch position varying according t o requirement. For those positions where the frequency of the tuned circuit equals the IF, a sma l l inductance L204 is added in series with the =in circuit. The larger inductance LZO3 reduces the resonant f'requency s t i l l further to 1 kc/s belm the IF' for the U3'? working position of the SYSTEM switch.
( c ) The anode circuit of the b. f. o. oscillator valve ~206, is inductively capled to the secondary wirding of the l a s t IF transformer TR203; th i s is the sole f'unction of the ancde of this valve, i n the oscillatory circuit the screen operates as the virtual anode. As there is only a small degree of coupling between the IF transformer w i d i n g s , t he b. f. o. injection has negligible effect on the a. g. c. voltage derived from the prwry~e
(d) Uith the SYSTElvf switch in the R/T position the b.f.0. valve cathode is connected t o chassis through R232 via SW202n. A s well as stopping the valve from oscillating th is prevents the potential of the cathode from rising too f a r above that of' the chassis, this could happen i f the cathode was l e f t unconnected, thereby causing arcing when the switch was moved t o another position, with resultant damage to the cathode of the valve.
(e) In the GAL position the SYSTEN switch removes the short circuit from crystal XI201 and the circuit i s crystal controlled. Although ;her these conditions the tuned cirouit has a natural frecpency of 501 kJs, the crystal causes it t o oscillate B t its o m freqyency of 500 kc/s. The additional screen voltage t o provide the strong oscillation required, is obtained thraugh SW2Wh to the bet. line, which canes thrmgh Pin 4 of PL2C4, as well as the narmal supply coming from Pin 7. The h.t. supply t o the f i r s t BF valve is open-circuited to prevent sigmls fkom the aerial corning into the receiver during calibration; this also pmvents the barmon&cs being radiated and breaking wireless silence. The calibration sigml, consisting of the fundamental 0.5 and its associated harmonics i s passed from the coupl ing coil LZO5, through ~ 2 0 ~ k - J and the second I3 transformer TR102, and so through the receiver. Harmonics are available up t o the 60th (30 MC/S), the fundamental being employed t o beat with the signal f'rom the IF stages a t the second detector.
CHAPTER 3
%OD Fig. 6 - 10. (a) The ci rcui t i s modified t o give two extra b.f.0. pitch positions for
FSK BIDE operation, to obtain an audio beat note of 2550 c i s above (HIGH) or b e - ( ) the intermediate frequency.
(b) This is achieved by an arrangement of pre-set variable capacitors, selected by the SYSTElvl sw-itch The f i r s t four positions of the SYSTEM switch give four different b. f. o. pitch frequencies (sh- i n Pig. 6), the fifth i s the TUNE position. A comparison beb-ieen the diayams Fig. 5 and Fig. 6 w i l l show that the fundamental operation of the circuit remains unchanged. The NA.IZRCR;'I f.s.k. positions give an audio beat frequency (1000 CIS) abwe and belm the IF. This was previously obtained by the pitch coils L203 and L2O4, which are deleted f r m this receiver. The NARROW FSK positions also provide a 1000 c/s note for the reception of C.K.
(c) The q / ~ and CAL circui ts i n th i s pattern are selected on positions 6 and 7 of the SYSTBA switch.
(d) Valve V206 i s the new type CV131. No component modifications resul t frm this change.
11. The calibrator cr~rs ta ls for the B+OB/C/D receivers are specislly processed, and though similar t o the type 'A' crystals fitted t o the
other patterns, are not interchangeable with than. For identification, crystals for &.~B/c/D are marked "Pattern 67864 Crystal 500 kc/stt.
FIRST AJ? AMPUJFIEIR Figs. 41/12/13
12. (a) The valve V3O1 i s a variable m pentode, with a.g.c. voltage tapped from the a.g.c. load neb~ork applied to its grid. The audio signal comes from the main AF M control RVZ24. W/A receivers have the anode c i rcui t of the valve arranged to function m i t h two alternative loads, mitched by the EANDfIDTH switch SIT201d in the IF Unit, through PL204 and SK3Ol. In the WIDE and NARRmI positions of th i s switch, the anode load is R302, i n the NClPE FIUPER position, i t becomes a tuned c i rcui t consisting of L3Ol and (3302. This circuit resonates a t 1000 c / s and only signals of about this frequency develop appreciable voltages across the load, t o be passed t o the output valve. The pass-band of this c i rcui t i s about 200 c/s.
(b) The abwe f ac i l i t y i s not included i n the BL&~c/D receivers, as the third position of the BANDWIIYPH switch brings into c i rcui t the crystal band-pass f i l t e r associated mith the IF circuits , instead of the note filter. This last mentioned component i s deleted from these receivers, so that the anode load of V3Ol consists only of the load res is tor RjO2.
(c) I n &OD the valve is replaced by the l a t e r type CV.454, Hinor changes have been rrade i n component values to maintain the electr ical characteristics of the stage.
his Sheet lssued with A.L. No. 1 ~ugu& 1956 I
B.R.1617 CWTW 3
OUTPUT CIRCUITS
Output Stage Pigs. 11/12/13
13. (a) The receiver has a single valve output stage, employing a power pentcde valve V3O2. T h i s delivers a mximm audio frequency power of 2.5 watts t o the output lines. The ful l output paver is nomally used t o feed an external loudspeaker. Oserating the DUMvvK LaAD switch SVJ204 t o the CN position, connects a 620 ohms res i s to r across th i s cutput and disconnects the loudspeaker line. The output transformer T U O I has a res is tor R313 connected across i ts prinary t o reduce peak voltage, th i s prevents flash-over, should the remote loudspeaker become inadvertently disconnected. In the valve is replaced by a new type CV.2136. This has resulted i n minor changes i n the cathcde circuit components.
Output Lines
* SW. 2 0 2 g PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 1 ~ . SW. 2 0 6 d PATTS. 5 7 1 4 0 8 1 ~ 1 ~
+ S W . 2 0 5 P A T T S ~ ~ I ~ ~ ~ ~ / C S W . 3 0 2 PATT. 571400
OUTPUT LINES FIG. 7
(b) (i) The three audio cutputs are fed from the secondaries of transf omer TR301, through socket and plug connectors fram the AF and Power Unit, to the output plug i n the IF Unit. The output plug ( ~ ~ 0 3 , &O/A/B/C, PL202, BMD) is a iiiark 4 sealed Qpe and provides a six-way outlet a t the rear of the IF Unit. To nake the above diagram as clear as possible, the intermediate unit coimecting plugs and sockets have been omitted.
( i i ) The t h e output channels canprise:-
4- A 2 . 3 loudspeaker line, incorporating a mi tch STi204 (DV@IY LCW)). When this - e t c h is placed i n the " k t e r n a l I* S. OFF" position, i.e. the switch toggle t o the front of the receiver, a compensating res is tor R234 is connected t o earth across the output.
-B- An output derived from a separate winding of the transformer, normally employed t o p r o ~ d e up t o 35 niW into a shipt s control system.
4- The subsidiary headphone and monitar loudspeaker l ine extension, riith a naminal pmer mting of 14 dl. RV309 gives f'urther audio gain control rhen the a, g. c. is operative. This control is part of the two gang GAIN control ~'05/309. The emt ion of RV309 is determined by the SYSTEM mitch (Si12023 i n &O/A rece imrs and by the a.g.c. m i t c h (~206d) in the later patterns.
( i i i ) A l l these outputs b v e a nominal ialpedanos of 600 o h , so that it is nacessarg fo r the external reprduoere t o be matched to t h i s impedance. The cutpat level for a l l linea is governed by the sett ing of the AF GAIN aontrol R'V2&.
GAIN CIRCUITS FIG. 8
14. (a) The receiver can be operated x i t h a. g. c. or d e p d i n g upon the sett ing of the control switches. "&mal" control .of @:gain i s provided a t a l l 'times, but RF gain i s manual* a u t o l ~ t i c a l ~ controlled. The means by which the a. g. c, is switched, d i f f e r s between the BW/A receivers and the l a t e r patterns. On f he former, a0g.c. is provided on positions 2 t o 6 of the SYSTEM switch and is disconnected in position 1, when, RF gain is manually controlled. In w ~ C / D receivers, a.g. c. is controlled s i m p l y bg the 0. m/m effftoh, m a 1 control being provided i n the GET position,
(b) Electrically, the circuit is the same in a l l patterns of the receiver, the swi tch name8 repmsenting the only difference. This is sham in Fig. 8 abwe, I n the case of 51/202, only positions I and 2 are shown, as the remainder of the positions on the SYSTEhd switch sections concerned, are connected t o position 2.
This Sheet issued with AWLo No. 1 August 1956 B .~.1617 CHAPTER 3
(c) In the switching position sha-V, RF gain i s controlled by the a. g. c. voltage. The headphones and monitor loudspeaker output l ine level is adjusted under these conditions by RVJO9, which is the a.f. section of the ganged GAIN control, switched by SW202g/206d. The other outputs are omitted from the diagram, as they are not controlled by RV309. The W/IF section of the GAIN control ( ~ ~ 3 0 5 ) is short-circuited by ~~1202e/206c and aut -tic control voltage fed t o the grids of the relevant valves.
( d ) men the HF gain i s manually controlled, RV309 i s disconnected by the opening of ~?202g/206d. m t c h sections fll202e/z06c open and EIV305 becomes the operative component vf the GAIN control, varying the cathode voltages of the RF and IF valves concerned, t o give the desired gain adjustment. The a.g.c. l ines to these valves and the f i r s t valve are short-circuited t o earth a t ~ ~ 2 0 2 a / 2 0 6 a and S?!202d/206b r e spec t ively.
R E T I F I E R AND STABIUSING CIRCUITS
45. &o/A/B/c Figs. I 4/12
(a) The double-diode valve V303, functions as a fill Rave rect i f ier . The smoothing circuit comprises two chokes, L3O2 in the positive h.t. line, and L303 (~304, &OB/C/D) in the negative h. t. return line, with srnoothi c a p a c i t b (2305, C307 ((2335, B~OB/C/D) and C308 ( ~ 3 1 4 , ~ ~ w C / ~ .
(b) V304 i s a neon s tabi l iser for the supply voltage t o the local oscillator valve 71104, The s tabi l iser priming electrode is supplied from the main h. t. l ine through Rj10. To provide effective de-capl ing, the s tabi l iser valve is earthed a t the R.3' Unit. Resistor R312 reduces the voltage t o the f i r s t RF valve, which i s a separate supply.
&OD Fig, I ) - (c) T h i s receiver incorporates an additional r ec t i f i e r valve, the two
anodes of each valve being strapped toget her and the whole arrangement used t o form a fill-wave rec t i f i e r circuit , with a valve a t each end of the mains transformer kt. wizding. The valves anployed are the preferred type CV.493 ('1~303 and ~304). I n this pattern the stabil is ing valve is V305, TTUC h is a replacement type CV. 1 83 2. A s there is no priming electrode in this new valve, It310 is not included i n this p a t t e n ilith the exception of the modifications aentioned above, the circuits are similar t o the other pattern receivers.
RECl3FTICN OF FREQUlNCY SHlFT KEYED TMVISSIONS (FSR) &OD o a y
16. (a) A s previously mentioned, this receiver is modified fo r the reception of fkequency sh i f t keyed signals, in tn-o particulars.
(1) The b.f.0. is changed to operate at two additional frequencies:- FSK ijIDE "HIGH1' and FSK l7UlE "L0~i". The previous positions for c. w. operation are also used for f. s. k. reception on NARROlii "HIGH1' and NARROW ltLat7".
(2) A fine tuning control has been supplied to give vernier adjustment of the local oscillator frequency.
(b) I n the frequency sh i f t system the I v i i (inactive) signal i s transmitted on one radio frequency and the SPACE (active) signal on a different radio frequency. The difference i n frequency (amount of shif t) , has been fixed a t 850 c/s as the standard for HI? frequencies a t the present time. Therefore for a nominal transmitting freqyency of 5 i~c/s, the idiARK s i p 1 is xadiated on 5 ivic/s + 425 c/s and the SPACB signal on 5 aids - 425 Js. im signals a r e a ln-ys radiated on the higher frequency,
(c) The audio frequency discriminator of the Frequency Shift Convertor C V ~ ~ A / U R C ~ - ~ A i n the VIDE codi t ion, works over the range of frequencies 2025 t o 3075 cis, i.e. the centre frequency is a t 2550 c/s and the excursion i s 2 525 c/s. I n the NARR0I;I s h i f t condition, the centre frequency of the discrimimtor i s 1000 c/s an3 the excursion i s apprmimately 2 100 c/s.
( d ) The Receiver &0C and ear l i e r models, have pre-set frequencies for the beat frequency oscil lator marked 'C.V. " ~ 1 7 " , TUNE and C.YL 'HIGHtt corresponding t o 499 k d s , 500 kc/s and 501 kc/s respectively, and unless additional b.f.o. frequencies are made available a t 502.55 kc/s and 497.45 kc/s, it i s only possible to obtain the correct audio frequency fo r the discriminator (2550 c/s) by mistuning the receiver so that the frequency passed t o the intermediate frecpency amplifier i s 498.45 kc/s or 501.55 kc/s. The IF amplifier is tuned t o 500 kds , so that under such conditions the receiver is not working a t i t s m x i m efficiency, fo r i f the IF bandwidth is not switched t o 1 kc/s, which i s a l l that is required for the transmission of the message, the fill gain of the Il? amplifier a- i l l not be realised. I f a wider bandwidth is used, the performance w i l l be impaired by the increase of noi se.
(e) i i i th a centre discriminator frequency of 2550 cis, the frequencies of the IGARK and SPACE signals are 2125 and 2975 c/s, and as the range of the discriminator is only 2025 and 3075 C/S, the margin for mistuning i s very srmll. Vithout the fine tuning control OSC. TRI?VI the movement .of the m i n ILF control is too ccarse for satisfactory operation on the higher frequencies, (9.5 - 30.5 idc/s). Details concerning the mdifications a re given under the relevant headings i n th i s chapter, and i n Chapter 4.
Ro Pa FIUCER UNIT DESIW 12
Additional protection a*ains t Radar transiniss ions, particularly Types 79, 279, 281, 960 and variants, i s provided by f i t t i ng the F i l t e r Unit Design 12, (A.?. 56152) i n series w i th the aer ia l lead t o the set, external t o the receiver.
- - Fl LTER UNIT DES. 12 A.P. 56152. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
FIG. 9
This Sheet 1 ssued with A.L, No. 1 August 1956
(b) This is a l a v pass RF F i l t e r and provides protection against transmissions on frequencies above 30 I"c/s,
(c) I7"hen the source of the interference is inqpera t ive and where miximum receiver sensi t ivi ty can be usefully employed, the f i l t e r can be taken out of circuit, a t the ae r i a l exchange, by mans of a " through c onnec t or" arrangement.
B.R,1617 CHAPTER 3
T O DECK INSULATOR
i.P. 1 3 8 0 6 CABLE I
I
4 A.P. 5 9 0 7 3 BRACKET A N D I TYPE 115 SOCKET I
AM REF. ~o. lOH1276 I
TO AERIAL EXCHANGE OR TO RECEIVER 0 4 0 ( W H E N N O AERIAL EXCHANGE I S FITTED)
FILTER UNIT DES. 12 A.P 56152. INSTALLATION D I A G R A M . FIG. 10
FIG. I I '
R.F. UNIT I" FG FRKTCHANCER SK 101
S K I 0 2 R I S
PLlOl
1 / V -
I C131 I - / I
PL103,
I I
l.2 p / R121 I I / 470 SKlo l I------ - / ~ 1 4 0 & ' - 3 (
I a003
I i I
. C I 3 0 l o o p
I SKlOl
I s c - 7 - c
SW 10Zd
NOTE :- REFER TO FIC.1 PT.3 FOR VALUES OF COMPONENTS IN TURRET COMIAWMENTS.
R
C
M I X
R
--
C
MISC
LOCAL OSCl LLATOR
101 103 104 105 110 113 114 I I b 117 120 107 1 0 6 108 109 111 112 115 I Z I 118
- - .. - -. - - - - - 122 123 124 119
101 103 I 0 5 107 108 113 118 114 115 117 116 119 120 I21 122 126 124 127 I 2 0 129 102 104 111 112 1 0 6 131 134 133 132 140 123 125 '09 "0 - - 135 136 139 I 3 7 1 3 0
PLlOl RV 102 V lOl V l o ? V103 V104 SKIQI . TR lO l SWlOl TR 102 TR 103 TRIO4 PLIO3 SWlO2a LPIOI-107 RV125 SKI02 LL02 SWlOZb XLlOl S W 1 0 2 ~ L l O l SWlOZd
B.R. 1617 Chap. 3
PL. 2 0 5 - 7 SK 3 0 2 7 -1-rn
. 235. 224. 225. 231. TR.203.V.206. RV.220. V.204b. RV.224. SW.202h. PL.204. SK.301. V.304. L .302 V.303. ES.301.TR.302. SW.301. PL.301.
lle. SW.20XV205. SK.203 RV. 305.L.301. V.301 L . 3 0 3 TR.301 SK.302. FIS.302.
PL. 2 0 5 - 4 SK 3 0 2 4 X ~e
YISC.
A.E & POWER UNIT
2.L 2 0 5 . SW.202n. SW. 202f. SW.202e.SW202d- SW.2Old. V. 3 0 2 RV.309 JK 301 ,302 . ES.303
RECEIVER 840 A.R 5 7 1 4 0 / ~ CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FIG.
This sheet issued wi th A.L. No. I Auqust 1956
I.F. UNIT
R
C
YlSC
PL. 201 .+
202.201. 204. 206.205. 208. 209.235. 212. 216.214.211. 2 18.203. 207. 210. 22Z 213. 231.215. 229.
234. 2 17. 233.228.230.232. 201. 202. 204. 2 0 6 . 207. 209. 211. 212. 217 216. 214.
223. 203. 205. 222. 221 220.208. 210. 213. . 232. 233. 234. 215. 238. 2 19. 232 218. 236. 235.
PL.201. SW.2010. L.201. V.201. TR.201. SW. 201b. V202. TR.202. SW.201~. V203. V2040. TR.203.\ SK.201. PL.203. TR.204. SW202a. SW.202b. SW.202c.SW.202 L 2 0 3 L 2 0 4 SK202.SW.201c.
TL. SW.205. SW.204. sW.~O~~.L.S.~OI .PL.~O~. sw.202j. sw.202k. SW.~&~; .XL.~~I :SW.~O~~. L . ~ o ~ . L 205. SW.~(
This Sheet issued with A,L, No, I August 1956 22
~ . ~ . 1 6 1 7 CHAPTER 3 COMPONENTS LIST B40/A
CW-TS UST RECEIVER B40 PATPERNS 57140/~ CAPACITORS
n Replacement component t o be 21 60009.
J
I
Ref.
C l O l C102 ClO3 GI04 Cl05
C106 Cl07 Cl08 Clog I
C l l O C l l 1 C l l l GI12 C l l j
C114 C l l 4 Cl14 C l l 4 C115
C l l 5 C116 C l l 7 GI18 (31.19
GI20 Cl21 (3122 C123 C423
Cl23 Cl23 C424 Cl24 GI25
C126 Cl27 C428 Cl29 C l 3 O
A.P. or J oint - Service Cat. No,
2131175 2123194 2115095 2115095 2124407
2924477 24244-77 2124477
x%3?.52437 2131178
2131194 2125666 2125664 M.60189
HAl?e52437
2131169 2331058 2131186 2931197 Z125666
2125664 AP.60189 2123194 Zl3111,T 2415095
2115095 2123194
X~.52437 2531169 2121058
2131184. 2'131194 2125664 2125666 AJ?. 60189
2115095 2115095 2125665 2115095 2131206
Value
12 PI? 100 pF 0. IF
Oml? 0.0 dl' / O e O O j / u F 0.00jpF
O0 Oo3% 2-20 B 15 PF
47 PF 600 pF 4.50 @' 12-322pF 2-20pF
6.8 pF I 0 pF 27 I@ 56 PF 600 pF
4.50 @' 12-322pF I00 @'
:: :&* Om 2@ 10 fl 2-20pF 6.8 @' 10 pF
22 pl? 47 fl 4.50 pr" 600 pF 42-322 @'
0.1pF 0. lp? 470 PE' 0. IF I00 pl?
Tol.
I@ 205 2q.G 2QL 2a/d
20,u 2@'/3 2q-0 1 q - a 1 w g
Y;
5Yb - + $9 l oc /o
mk ' 0 " /0
gb 5%
!@
2045 2q; 2 ~ 5
2a; 2@0 1% 4 q b 1 6
1 ~ : I cO"& J 54: 5%
2 6 2q i 523
2Q0 lo$
~ a t w
5 0 0 ~ 3 5ov 35ov 35m 35OV
35OV 35OV 35ov
~ O O V
~ O O V 350v 35ov
5 0 0 ~ 5 w v 5wv 5OOV 35Ov
35ov
35077 35ov 35Ov
35ov 35ov
5 0 0 ~ 5 0 0 ~
WoV 5oov 35ov 35Ov
35Ov 35ov 35OV 35OV 5mV
Remarks
Variable Band 4
Band 5 Band 4 Band 5 Gaqed Cap Sect. Variable
Band 2 J 3 d 3
4 &nd 5 Band 4.
Bad 5 Ganged Cap Sect.
Variable Band 2 Band 3
4 Band 5 Band 5 Band 4 Ganged Cap. Sect,
CHAPTER 3 W k C I T o R S (conttd. ) - -
Y
'Beplacement component t o be 21 60009
I
i
Be f,
c131 C132 (2433 cl33 el33
c133 (2.1 33 (334 c.134 (334
c.134 (334 el35 C136 C137
C138 el39 ~ 1 4 0 C2OI C20 2
C203 C204 0205 C206 C207
(3208 c209 C210 C211 C212
c213 C214 (3215
C216 C217 C21 b CZI9 C220
I I
A,P, or J o i n t -
Service Cat, No,
ZI3II65 s 5 ~ 7 2131166 2131 181 2131 181
2131188 2431 197 24 25476 Z.126350 21 26351
1 J64-24- 21 25k50 &I 89 2131 178 2131206
2123194 2423194 2 1 2&77 21 25665 2.1 15095
21 15095 2.1 15095 21 25665 2125665 z.115095
zl 15095 2115095 21 25665 21 25665 21 15095
2.1 1 5095 2.1 45095 2 1 25 665
z123194 z415504 21 23274
1 Z115504 1 21 15095 ##--A
Value
2.2 pF 2-20 pF 27 18 pF 18 pF
33 pF 56 PF 470 pF 1050 pF 2200 pF
500 fl 390 pF 12-322 p~ 45 pF I00 PI?
100 pF loo pF
Om O033r^" 470 pi' O.l/uF
O.l/uF 0 , 1 p 470 I$' 470 @' 0 . l P
0. 4 0 . l p 470 pF 470 pi? 0. lF
o.l/lF O.I'/"" 470 pF
I00 PI? 0.02 3' 200 & Om02/uF 0 . y
Remarks
Variable B a d 1 Band 2 Band 3
Band 4. b i l d 5 Band 4 Band 2 Band 3
Band 4 Bald 5 Ganged Cap Section
T 01.
0.5 ,pp 1 ($0
1 Cr,? I Go I ($2
5: 5): 30 5h lQJ
55 5: G
10:~ I@J
2a/6 20, J 20;3 5d 2 % ~
20, 2 @ ~ 5; ; 5>0 20;
20/3 2Go 5;s 5s 2@
2Q3 2Qo 5%
2@2 20,d 20;~ 20)s 2%.,
Rating
500v
500V 500v 5OOV 5 0 0 ~
500V 5 0 0 ~ 35ov 35ov 35ov
350V 35OV
500V 35Ov
350V 35ov 350V 35OV 35ov
35OV 35ov 35OV 35ov 35ov
35ov 350V 35ov 350V 350V
350V 35ov 35ov
35Ov 75ov 35ov 75ov 350v
23 This Sheet issued with A.L, NO, 1 August 1956 B .R,1617 CHAPTm 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS B ~ / A
W A C I T ORS ( Cont ' d )
RESISTORS
Ref. A.P, or
Jo in t - Service cat, No.
Ref.
RqOl RVI 02
C221 21 15095 2Qo 35OV C222 21 45148 2oj? 350V c223 z-l.15504 ~ ( $ 0 750V c224 C225
C226 C227 C228 ~ 2 2 9 . C230
c231 c232 c233 C234 c235
C236 c237 C23 8 C N d c302
c303 c3% C305 c306 ~ 3 0 7
c308 c309. C310 c31 1 ~3.12 c313
A o P e or Joint-
Sexvice Cat. No.
2223092 60525A
Value
or / a54664a R103 2223 080
h
Tole Rating
21 23274 2.115095
21 25665 z123194 2.1 23274 2115502 z4.15095
21 23456 21 15504 21.15504. 21 231 94 21 23456
Zq25665 2'1 '15505 2.1 15095 521 62 2115516
21 15506 2.1 15500 21 12521 21 12521 ZI 12521
ZI 12521 21 a 0 9 21244Q9 21 24409 z-la409 21 15502
Value
2 7 0 k 0 b IOOkokrms
Remarks
100k o h 220k ohms
2@0 350V
20): 1050 1
0. l/hlF
470 PF I00 @' 200 pF
Remarks
Variable
Tol.
I@; IO>O
Rating
$f
20p
!2/0 20>0 2@0
35OV
35Ov 350v 350V
100OV 35ov
350v 750V 75ov 350V 35ov
350V 5oO-v 350V
1000V 75OV
35OV I OOOV WOV 40m wov
WOV 750v 75m 750V 7 5 0 ~
1 OOOV
500 fl 0.02/NF 0.02p 100 PI? 500 pF
670 PF
205 20s 2@ 20;b 20>0
56
2w0 2051 20: 0 2Go ZOC/O
2qib
CHAPTER 3
Remarks
Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4
Bandl Band 2 Band 3 Band 4
Variable
RESISTORS
Value
100 ohms I0 ohms 100k ohms 8.2k ohms 100 ohms
Ie5k ohms lk ohm
1.8k ohms 3.9k o't-u;ls 68k ohms
IOOk ohms 470k ohms 47k 47k ~~ 220 ohms
56k ohms 4.7k o h 22 obms
560 ohms 47k O ~ S
470 ohms 1.2k ohms 390 ohms 180 ohms 47
180 ohms 47k ohms 20 ohms IOOk ohms IOOk ohms
560 ohms 4.7k o h look ohms IUOk ohms 560 ohms
4.7k ohms 68k ohms 150 ohms 4.7k o h 220k bhms
(conttd)
Tol.
lac0 9 & I 0)o I@ 1 O"/o
1 a/; 1 a/, I& 16 1 6
I@ 1 GO I@ I@; 4 CC/%
16 I O"/O qo@ I@ 1 @o
10% 1@ I@: 16 4 O ~ O
I + I* lo"/: I@ 4 @;
I 05; 4C$4 I WQ I@: 1 @
I@ 10"/0 1% 9O;o ?@
LIST OF CCWONEK'TS
Rat-
*W +J
4
9 @
$y 9 $7 *W
%f 4
&W *TI
% 4
3 *TJ
q? 4&?
$7 ~l? $W
&W *? 3Fw &IT
$Ti{
i y 2 .g 4.
&TI % 4 $
$iT $7
$17 $?
% 4
Ref.
R104 R105 R106 RI 07 R108
RI 09 RIO9 Ri 09 RIO9 R410
~ 1 1 - l R1 I2 Rl 13 R-l I& 11145
Rl36 R? 17 Rll8 3119 Rl20
Rl21 Rl22 Rl22 R122 R? 22
RI 23 R124 RVI 25 R201 R202
~ 2 0 3 11204 ~205 R206 R207
R208 R209 R210 R211 R212
AaPa Joint
Serv i ce Cat. No.
2221 110 2221 002 2223038 22221 23 2221110
2222026 22 22005 2222038 2222080 222301 8
2223038 22231 22 2222236 222221 6 2221 552
2223009 2222089 2221026 2221 206 2222215
2221 194 222201 7 2221 185 2221 143 2221 068
2221 143 2222215 APa 60480A 2223039 2223038
2221 206 2222093 2223039 2223038 2221 206
2222090 2223018 2221 131 2222090 2223081
This Sheet issued with A.L, No. 1 August 1956 B.~.1617 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS ~ 4 0 1 ~
mSISTORS ( ~ o n t ' d )
Ref, A.P, o r
J o i n t Service Cat, Noe
Value
15k o h 33Ok ohms 330k ohms
68k ohms 2.2. Megohms
4.. 7k &nS I Megohm
IOOk ohm 33k
b 7 k CIhms
I Megohm 2,2 Jdegohms 680k ohms 680k o h
15k
330k ohms 68k ohms IOk ohms
IOOk ohms IOk ohms
100 ohims 620 ohms 150 ohms 2.2 M e g o b 68k ohm
33Ok ohms 820 ohms 3k ohms
470k ohms 47k 0-
120 ohms 50 ohms
680k ohms 70 5k O ~ S
3e3k ohms
15k ohms
Tol. Rating
Note: The above l i s t relates t o replacement requirements; a l l fixed - composition r e s i s t o r s having a tolerance of l@oe The corresponding r e s i s t o r s i n the receivers may have e i t h e r 1 C$ or 2C$ tolerances.
C W E R 3 LIST OF COHPONEm
I
Description
Tmmfolmer 1st RFe Transfarmer 2nd ReFe i t
1,Fe Output " 1 st I e Fa n
2rd IeFa tt
3Id 1,Fm I t
itonit or Loudspeaker Transf amer Output Transf mmr Mains T m f o r m e r
Ref.
TRIO1 m102 TRI 03
Ob TR201
TR202 m o 3 TR204 Two1 TR302
Ref.
L301 L102 L2O1 L202 m 3
u06 L205 Vol L302 L303
r
Ref.
F301 ~ 3 0 2 F303
I +
Pattern No,
Replace TRIO1 bands 1-5 with 5905-AePW 184026/7/8/9/30.
65690 65689 65561B
Description
Choke, 1.5 Oscillator Coil Tuned Oeoillat or Coil 1.F. 1- Coil Tuned B. F.0. Coil Pitch B,FO 0, T ~ n e
Coil Pitch B.F.0, Lap Coil BoFoOo Choke 1H Note Fi l t e r Choke 18H Smoothing Choke ICIH (I
Pattern No.
65560 65564-
L
Joint Service Cat, No.
2590108 25901 I0 25901 10
Description
Monitor Laudspeaker 3 ohms
-
Ref
L620)
Description
Fuse 0.5 Amp Fuse2Amq! Fuse 2 Anp
k
Pattern No.
This Sheet issued with A.L, NO. 1 August 1956 ~.~.1617 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COblPONWlS B40/d
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Ref.
PL101 PLI 03 PU-01 PI~203 pL2&
PL205 PI4301 SKI01 SKI02 SK201
Sm62 SK203 SK301 Su02
"
A.P. o r Joint
Service Cat, No.
25 60070 a. 57771 AP. 601 57 2560080 AP. 60158
AP. 60157 Z560050 AP. 601 56 Ape 60451 Do 57772
60451 AP, 6&51 AP. W8J69 A p e 60156
Description
Lamp Pilot 6.5V O.3A
Ref.
~ 1 0 1 -107
Description
Plug 4 pin, Aerial (I&. 4) Plus 4 pin, I, Fa Ou@ut Plug 12 pin, 1.F. nit&? U n i t Plug 6 pin, Outputs (Nk. 4) Plug 8 pin, ~.~./~ower U n i t
plug I 2 pin, I.F./POW~V ~ d t Plug 2 pin, &ins ( ~ k . 4) socket 12 way, RF./I.F. Unit Socket Coaxial, R I. S. Socket 4 way 1.F. Input
Socket Coaxial ROEo C, Socket Coaxial Re E, B. Socket 8 ~ . ~ . / ~ o w e r Unit Socket 12 way ~.l?./Pmer Unit
J, S. Cat. No,
X951225 1
Description
Switch Lamps, Band Indication Wafer Cgstal, Cxystal switch Switch 3 Position, Bandwidth SKitch 6 Position, System SFFitch Single Pole, Limi te r
Switch Single Pole, Dunmy Load Switch Single Pole, iiionitor LS. Switch Double Pole, Liains
f
Pattern No.
. Ref.
XLIOI XI201 n o 1 a302
*
Pattern No.
As Re@. u500 fl6A 67a
~i730-1 ~ ~ 1 0 2 SW201 m202 ST203
m20b ST205
. S7301
1
Descrfpt im ---.-
C r y s t a l 2 Pin, Local Oscillator k y s t a l 500 Ws, C a l i b t e Jack 3 Pole, Phones Jack 3 Pole, Phones
65638
W9836A
60448 or 50068
I" RE S K I 0 2
R.I. S.
This sheet ~ssued w ~ t h A L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Chapter 3
FIG. 12
R.F. UNIT 2" R.F: FREO CHANCI3 SK IOI
I 2 c I
PLlOl
PL103, I
I I I
I I C 1 3 0 1-P
SKlOl 5 c
-7-c
0 SW lO2d
NOTES - LOCAL osc I LLATOR
I THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS ARE ONLY FITTED TO PATT 1714- - CI4I,C142, C143 AND SW M
2 THE HlCH IMPEDANCE AERIAL CONNECTION TO PL.IOI 0, INCLUDING CIOI, IS OMITTED IN P~TT57140C
3 Cl33A IS FITTED ONLY IN PATT 5714081C. 4 REFER TO FIC 2 PT.3 FOR V U C S OFLOWOMENTS
IN TlACer
R
C
M I X
R
, C
MISC
101 103 104 105 110 113 114 116 117 120 107 1 0 6 I 0 8 109 111 112 115 I21 118
122 123 124 119
101 103 105 107 108 113 118 114 115 117 116 119 120 121 122 126 124 127 128 129 , I I$ % 111 112 1 0 6 131 134 I33 I33a I32 I1E 140 123 125
IS5 136 137 1 3 0 PLIOI RV 102 V l O l V 102 V103 V104 SKlQl SW M TRIO1 SW 101 TR 102 TRIOS TRIO4 PLIO3 SW102a LP 101-107 RV125 SK 102 L102 SW102b XLlOl SWl02c L l O l SWIO2d
POWER RECTIFIER
2 IN PARALLEL
A.F. & POWER UNIT
I FOR A.P. 57140C ONLY 1
FIG
RECEIVER 840. A.P .WI~OB/C. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
I.F. UNlT
PL 2 0 1 . I
ZN.O I .F. SRDI. F. A.C.C.
P0WE.R UNlT I B.F.O.
J - P L 2 0 5
x PL 2 0 3
EXT. L.S OUTPUT -- - LINES SW 2 0 4
b 0 0 n @ ~
L I N E eC
26 This Sheet issued with A,L, No, 1 August 1956 B.Fi.1617 CHAPTER 3
LIST OF COMPONENTS B ~ / C
COMPaENTS LIST RECHVER E&O PATTERNS 57140B/~ CAPACITORS
n Replacement component t o be 2160009.
- -- -- - -- -- -
I
Tol ,
lO>o 2000 2m0 ~ $ 0
20;a
20;; 20; 0
20L/~ IQo I U ~
5jj 5~ 3 6
104'.
1% I C&O 16;3 5P 5%
5%
2Q0 2@ 20)~
2%. 2@; I 0,o 1 O>Q IQo
10, u
lo? 5h 570
2O;o 20)~ 5;; 2aU I 05;
Value
P-P-P-
12 pF I00 @' O . I ~ D
O e 1 t p 0.0
0.003 ::o"o;g 2 -20 15 fl
47 pF 600 p~ 450 SF 12-322 @?
2-20 pF
6.8 pF 10 @' 27 @' 56 pF 600 PF
450 p 12-322 fl
-loo @' 0 . 0 1 p O e l ~
o e 1 p 100 pF 2-20 pF 6.8 pF 10 PF
22 PJ? 47 I$? 450 @' 600 fl j2-322 pl?
O e y F 0.1pF 470 PF 0 . y I00 pF
r
Re 9,
C l 04 C102 c103 Clo4. CI 05
Cl06 clo7 C108 Cl09 Cl I0
CIIO c111 Clll Cl12
CIA3
c114 CIA4 CI 14 Cll4 ~1.15
c115 Cl16
CI 1 7 C118 C l r9
C120 c121 C122 c123 CI 23
Cl 8 (2123 C-1% GI24 C125
CI26 CI 27 C128 CI 29 Cl30
AoPe Joint
Service Cat. No,
2131175 2423194 21.15095 2115095 z124407
21 2&77 2 1 24477 21 2&77
3 AP. 524.37 2131178
2.1314 94 21 25666 21 25664 AP, 601 89
w a0 52437
2.1311 69 2131058 2131186 2131.197 21 25666
23.25664 AP. 601 89
z123194 2 1244-07 21 15095
21 15095 2123194
3~ Ma52437 Z.131.169 2.131058
2131184 2131194 Z 1 25664 2125666 AP, 60189
21 15095 21 15095 21 25665 2.1'1 5095 2131206
1
Rating
500V 35ov 3 5 0 ~ 35OV 35OV
35OV 35m 35OV
%ov 500V 350V 350V
500v ~ O O V 500V 500V 35ov
3 5 ~
35ov 35Ov 35OV
35ov 350V
5 0 0 ~ 5mv
5oOV 500V 35Ov 35OV
35m 35OV 35Ov 35ov
. %ov
Remarks
Not i n AP.571WC
Variable Band 4.
Band 5 Band4 Band 5 Ganged Capacitm Section
Variable
Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 4.
a n d 5 Ganged Capac it cr
Section
Variable Band 2 Band 3
Band 4 5
Band 5 Band 4 Ganged Capacitor Section
CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS
CAPACITORS (Conttt3.)
Ref,
C I ~ I C132 (2.1 33 (3133 C133
(333 C133 c433A c133A C133A
C 133A C133A c134 el34 c134
'334 (334 c135 Cq 36 c437
Cl38 c139 C14O c1 41 CI 41
C342 cj42 c.143 c143 C201
C2O2 C203 c204 C205 c206
c207 G208 C209 c210 C211
s
- T 01,
A.Pe o r Joint Service Cat. No,
2131 165 s AP. 52437
2131186 Z131 I81 ~132244
2432276 zl25608
2132268
2 I 25704 2132279 21 25476 2.1 26350 2126351
YJW4 21 25450 601 89 2131 178 2131206
2123194 2123194 2 1 24677 2132277 2132073
31322aO 2132274 2132280 . 2132274 21 25665
2.1 15506 21 15095 21.15095 21 25665 21 25665
2115095 24 15095 24 15095 z l 25665 2125665
Replacement
O 8 5 P
I Qd I ~ o IGO
% !% -
t@
5% 5; 5>h 50
lG
50 9:
14; IGa
20"/~ 20;6 ZC@ I @a 10510
I @; 1 6 1 (& 1 % ~ 50
2%: 2% 2qa
3 d 5 i a
2C$o 2@ 2C$o 5g 30
2160009.
*
Value
2.2 9 2-20 pF 27 @' 18 PI? 12 PF
22 pF 33 P Not f i t ted Not fitted 6.8 @'
I0 pF 27 fl 470 @' 1050 @ 2200 pF
500 pF 390 I$' 12-322 pF 15 PF ~~ fl 400 PE' .lo0 pE' 0.003 /1F 22 pF 15 PJ?
27 PF 18 pF 27 PJ? 18 pF 470 pF
O.~/UI? I
0. lpF O . ~ / U F 470 PF 470 P
0. lp 0. Oel/uF 470 F;F 470 @'
component t o be
500V ~ O O V 5oov 500V 5wV
L
35ov 5 0 0 ~
SOOV
5oov 35ov 35ov 350V 35m
35ov 35ov
5WV 35ov
35ov 35ov 35OV 5oov
- Variable Band 1 Band 2 a n d 3
Band 4 B a d 5 Band I Band 2 Band 3
Band 4 Baxd 5 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3
Band 4. Bad 5 Gang. Cap, Sect.
500V
5 0 0 ~ Band 3 500V Bands 1/2 5 0 0 ~ 350v
35OV 35ov 3 5 0 ~ 35OV 350V
35ov 35OV 35ov 35OV 350V i
B a n d 3 )
-
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPOMXI'S B ~ / C
27 CAPACITORS ( Cont ' d. )
Ref.
C212 (2213 cz14 C215 C216
(3217 C218 C220 C221 C222
C223 C224 c225 C226 C227
C228 c229 C230 c23 I c23 2
(3233 c234 c235 C236 c237
C2j8 C240 C241 c242 . c243
C303 c304 C305 C306 c309
C310 c31 I C312 c313 (3314
r
AePe or Joint
Ssmice Cat, No.
Z l m 9 5 21 15095 2.1 15095 2125665 21 23494
21 15504 zj23274 2.1 45095 21 15095 2115148
21 15504 2123274 21 15095 2125665 z123194
21 23274 2145502 2115095 2123456 2145504
2.2 15504 2123194 2123456 2 1 25665 2115505
z.115095
2125.2 99
2423494
Z1.15506 21 15500 21 I 2521 2112521 2 124409
21 24409 z-l w 9 2 -I 24409 2115502 21 4 2934
Value
0. -l p 0 . 1 p
O o T b7 pF 100 pF
200 0 . 1 p a. '/"F 0 . 5 F
200 0. I f 8 470 @' 100 pF
200 pF
500 0 . 0 2 p
500 pF 4-70 fl 0 . 0 5 F
0 . 1 p 5-8 PF 75 PF 3-33 $' 100 pF
0.01 p
Rating
35m 35m 35ov 350V 35ov
750V 350V 35ov 35ov 350V
75ov 35m 35m 35ov 35OV
35ov lOOOV 350V 35OV 75ov
75m 35OV 35OV 35ov 500V
35m
35ov
35ov I OOOV 40ov liDov 75ov
75m 750V 750v
I OOOV 400V
Remarks
Variable
Variable a o c only
C W T E R 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS
RIOI RVI 02 RlO3 R104 R105
R106 R107 R106 RIOY RlO9
R? 09 RIO9 Rl10 Rl I I R112
~ 1 1 3 R114 R115 R116 ~ 1 1 7
iil I 8 Rl lg Rl20 R4 21 R122
R122 R122 R422 RI 23 R124
r
Ref.
A.P. o r J o i n t
Service Cat. No.
2223092 UP. 51464.A 2223080 2221 110 2221 C02
2223038 22221 23 2221 110 2222026 2222005
2222038 2222080 222301 8 2223038 2223 122
222221 6 222221 6 2221 152 2223009 2222089
2221 026 2221 206 2222 21 5 2221 194 22220': 7
2221 185 Z221143 2221 068 2221 143 222221 5
C315 21 12934 20,a 4OOV C316 2.1 1551 6 IOjoic, 75OV (3317 2 1 15574 10,s 35OV C3I8 21 15500 20//;1 1 OOOV C3.19 21 15632 20,o 35OV 11 L 4 !
k.Ye No, o r J o i n t
Service C a t , No,
Value
270k ohms IOOk ohms 220k ohms loo o h
I0 ohms
IOOk ohms 8,2k ohms 100 ohms 1.5k o h m l k ohm
1.8k ohms 3.9k ohms
68k ohms look ohms 470k ohms
Lb7k ohms 47k ohms
220 ohms 56k ohms 4w7k ohms
22 ohms 560 ohms 47k olms
470 ohms I, 2k ohms
390 ohms 180 o h 47 chn-ls
180 ohms 47k ohms
Value
Rating Remarks
-
Variable
Band 1 Band 2
Band 3 Band 4
Remarks Tol .
Band 1
Band 2 Band 3 Band 4
h t j ~ q g
28 This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956
B.R.1617 LIST OF COMPONENTS CHAPTER 3 B ~ O B I C
RESISTORS ( ~ o n t ' d. )
Ref.
I
RVI 25 R201 R202 ~ 2 0 3 ~ 2 0 4
R205 ~ 2 0 6 R207 ~ 2 0 8 ~ 2 0 9
~ 2 1 OM R211 R212 R213 R218
R219 RV220 R221 R222 ~ 2 2 3
RV224 ~ 2 2 5 ~ 2 2 6 R227 R228
~ 2 2 9 . ~ 2 3 0
R231 ~ 2 3 2 R233
R234 R235 R236 R237 R301
~ 3 0 2 R3 03 R304 RV305 R306
v
Value
20 ohms look ohms look ohms 560 ohms 4*7k Chm3
look ohms look ohms 560 ohms 4 ~ k dlmf3
68k ohms
150 ohms 4.D 0-
220k ohms l5k ohms
4.7k ohms
I Megohm look ohms 33k ohms 4.7k ohms
1 Megohm
2.5 Megohms 680k ohms 680k ohms 1% ohmB
3 3 a 0kJma
68k ohms I ok ohms
100k ohms I O ~ ohma
100 ohms
620 ohms 15Ok ohms 680k ohms 680k ohms 2.2 Megohms
68k ohms 330k ohms 820 ohms
3k ohms 470k ohms
r
A.Pt o r J o i n t
Service Cat. No.
Amp, 60480A 2223039 2223038 2221206 2222090
2223039 2223038 2221 206 2222090 2223018
Z2211jl 2222090 222308 1 2222152 2222090
2223164 2262183 2222195 2222090 2223164.
2262948 2223143 2223143 2222153 P223 102
2223018 z22213;r 2223038 2222132 2221 11 1
Za3173 2223059 2223143 2223443 2223207
2223017 2223101 2221 227 Z273001 22231 22
Tol.
I@ 1 6 1 6 1 6 1%
1 6 I@ 1 6 16 1%
f(q6 1% I@ 1 6 1%
1 6 1% 1 6 1 6
I@ f @
I@ l@ l@
1 6 1 6 1016 109s
% 1% I@ 1% 1%
A @ 1% l@ 1 6
I
Rating
i
Remarks
22% 9 av & 3
@ 3 9
'% B H 3 9
i? %
* 1w .
9 % 3f
9 3
&v * * 1
4.9 9 9 3 3
@ 3 9 9
Var i ab l e
Var i ab l e
Var iab le
Var iab le
L
I
CHAPTER 3 LIST OF- COMPONENTS
9
Ref.
R3 07 R308 RV309 R310 R ~ I I
~ 3 4 2 R313 R314
Ref,
TRIOI t o m i 0 3
m104 TR201 t o TR2O3
TR204 TR301 T R J O ~
FUSES -
A,P, o r J o i n t
Service Cat, No,
2222215 2221 1 23 2273001 222314 Z a 0 8 5
2222069 22444 14 2222090
A
*
Ref,
L101 L102 L201 L202 ~2 03 L204 L205 1,206 L302 L304
P a t t e r n No.
TRI 01 bands 1-5 5905-A .P. 184026/ 7/8/9/30
65690 65689 67763A
. 4
Descript ion
Tranaf ormers R. F.
Transformers I.F.
Transformer A.F. Transformer A.F. - Output Transformer Power - Mains
Pattern No,
65560 67762
Ref,
F3OI ~ 3 0 2 F303
Value
47k O I ~ S 120 ohms 50 ohms
680k ohms 7.5k ohms
3.3k ohms ,
15k ohms 4.7k ohms
I
Descr ip t ion I
Choke 1.5 a, O s c i l l a t o r Coil tuned, O s c i l l a t o r Co i l IF, IF Input Coil tuned, B.F. 0. Co i l P i toh , B.F.O. "Tune" Coi l P i t c h , B.P.0, "Low" Coil , C a l i b m t i o n coupling Co i l tuned, Crys ta l F i l t e r Choke 18H, Smoothing Choke 20H, Smoothing
i
Rating
3 3v a
4.-
* 6~
3 ,
To1 ,
1 6 1 6
16 %
146 1 6 16
J o i n t Service cat. NO,
25901 08 25901 I0 25901 10
Remarks
Variable
*
Descr ip t ion
Fuse 0.5 Amp Fuse 2 Amp Fuse 2 Amp
4
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
LOUDSPEAKERS
B.Re1617 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF CQlPUJENTS &03/C
PUGS AND SOCKETS
3escription
Loudspeaker 3 ohms, i.ionitor .
Ref.
IS201 t
Pattern No,
A,P. 66922 '
Ref.
PLIOI PL1 Of PL201 PL203 =fa PI205 PI4301 SKI 01 SKI 02 SK201
SK202 S m 3 SIC301
SIC302
t
A.P. or Joint Semtice
Cat, KO,
2560070 Ha57771 AP. 60157 2560080 AP. 60158
AP, 60157 2560050 AP. 40156 AP. 60451 A p e 57-7-72
AP, 604-51 AP* 60451 AP. W8369
AP. 60156
1
Description
IBIQ $Pilot 6.5V Oa3A
Ref .
IPIOI -1 07 /
Description
Plug 4 Pin, A e r i a l (I!&, 4) Plug 4 Pin, 1.3'. Output Plug 12 Pin, I.F. ~ n i t / ~ . F . Unit Plug 6 Pin, Outputs (Mk. 4) Plug 8 Pin, ~ . ~ . / ~ o w e r Unit
Plug 12 Pin, ~ . ~ . / ~ u w e r Unit Plug, 2 Pin, I i a i n s Socket 12 Way, R.F. 1.3'. U n i t P Socket Coaxial, R.I.S, Socket 4 Way, I.F. Input
Socket Single, REC Socket Single, REB Socket 8 Pin, I.F./A.F. and Power U n i t
Socket 12 Pin, I.F./A.F. a d Power U n i t
I
J. S. Cat, No.
X95122fj
Description
r
Witch Lamps, Band Indication Vafer ~ r g s t a l , Crystal switch W t c h 3 Position, Bandwidth Switch 5 Position, System Switch Single Pole, Limiter
A
- Ref
*
SnlOl ~ ~ 1 0 2 SFJ201 Sl7202 W2OJ
AaPe Joint Service
Cat. No.
65 638
5930-99-972-88261
CHAPTER 3 LIST OF CONPONM'S
Ref.
~ ~ 2 0 4 Sn205 Sm206 m?301
A.P. w Joint Service
Cat, No.
52805 5930-99-972-8825
60448 or 50068
Description
Crystal 500 Ws, Calibmte W s t a l 2 Pin, Local Oscillator Crystal, Crystal F i l t e r Jack 3 Pole, Phones Jack 3 Pole, Phones
Ref.
XL201 X L I O I XU02 J 'uol JUO2
Description
Switch S a l e Pole, DMPny Load m t c h Single Pole, hionitor LS. Switch 2 Position, A.G.C. Ehitch Double Pols, b i n s
Pattern No,
67866
6?& 67a
This sheet issued with A.L. No. 2 October 1 9 9
FIG. 13
IF R.F.
~n 12s p4 1 6 ~ ~ ~ 6 6 177 182 123 124 125 129 130 160 184
141 142 143 159 IFrn I05 WD4 1 2 2 - T T l m Io3 162 !61 179 181 178 183 112 123 I24
K)5 106 0 7 113 115 1 1 1 120 126 125 I27 128 104 a0 - !!6 0 8 I22 12! I29
R K ) I SWIO2 LflOl LP? RVDI MRI VlOl SKOI V D 2 XU01 TRIil VlOO TR116 SKI03 ' S C ~ l ~ l ~ 1 0 3 ; T R ~ O ~ RVIOZ LlOl S W F b SW103c SKI02 La6 SWK38r. VIOS -- - PL102
R. E UNIT 2 m R.FI
#- .. R
FQEQ. CHANGER
NOTE;- CIRCUIT SHOWS BAND SWITCH SET TO BAND I. CIRCUITS FOR OTHER BANDS ARE SHOWN IN FIG. 8 Part 3 COMPONENTS ASSOCIATED ?$!, WITH TURRET SECTION BANDS 2 -5 ARE OMITTED FROM THIS
I N FIG. 8 Part 3
C
FIG. 13
A.F. & POWER UNIT A.C.C. DETECTOR LIMITER P C M R RECTIFIER
TO PL204
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
I.F. UNIT PL 201 IST L E ~ N D I.F. 1.F. A.C.C. DETE
*I2
i EXT L.S.
8 SW 2 0 4
D
600 AX
LINE
B. F. 0. v21
CVI
30 This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 ~ u g u s t 1956 ~ . ~ . 1 6 1 7 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONEWS ~ 4 0 ~
C O ~ l J ? O ~ ~ S LIST RECEIW B4O A. P. 571 40D -- CAl?ACITORS
L
Ref.
7
Remarks A.P. or Joint Service Cat, No.
C301 21 45095 20)~ 35m Stud m u u n t i n g C102 z415095 205 35ov I f 1)
Cl03 ao4.
I C105 Cl06 Cl07 Cl08 (3109 CIIO
cl j l c112 c-113 Cl14 CI I 5
Cl16 C317 GI18 Clly GI20
C121 C122 C123 C-I ut. C125
Cl 26 CI27' C.128 CI 29 C130
C131 c132 cl33 (3134 cl35
C136 C337 C138 cl39 C140
Value
21 24407 z123194 2132280
2132280 ZI6OOO9 2132277 2.1 32280 2132280
2.1 60009 2132073 21 3 2274 2132274 Zl60009
ZI6OOO9 ~131184 2125666 2 1 60009 2132291
21 23941 AP. 60189 21 24477 21 24477 21 24-77
AP. 601 89 2131 I65 21 244-07 2123194 21 60009
21 60009 2131 169 ZI 60009 2131058 ZI6OOO9
Z13.1184. Z125666 2160009 2132291 21 23941
Tol. Rating
100 27 pF
27 pF 4-18 I$?
22 @ 27 PJ? 27 I$'
4-18 @ 15 @' 18 ?$' 18 fl
4-1 8 PI?
4-18 pF 22 PP
600 pJ? 4-18 @' 56 @'
330 pF 12=322 @ O.O03/uF 0. 0 0 3 F Oe 003/1$
12-322 p~ 2e2 PI?
O o o 1 g 1 oo 4-18 pF
4-18 @' 6.8 4-1 8 pF 10 fl 4-1 8 pF
22 pF 600 PI? 6-18 pF 56 pF
330 pF
2% 20$ 1 6
1% 16 I@ I@
I aja I@ 1 o"/i I Gi I($
la",^ 10c,o 55
1 !$
6 w' 2 da 20/0 2qo 2@
+ @ 5e5 pF 2C$2 20;0 16 -I I@O I$ I ($ 1 Oi9
1 022 5s
I@ 5% ??3
35ov 35ov 5oov
500V
500v 500V 500V
5ooV 500V 500V
5WV 35OV
3Ov
75ov
350V 35m 35OV
5wV 35m 350V
5ooV
5oov
5OOV 35OV
5 0 0 ~ 750V
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Ganged Cap, Section
Ganged Cap, Section
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS CkPXCITORS ( Cont ' d. )
Ref. AmFo o r
Jo in t S e r v i c e Cat. No.
Value
AJ?. 601 89
Rating
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable Variable (OSC. TRR~~) W & RC31-I4 Ganged Capacitor Section
Stud mounting
Stud mounting I t I t
Variable Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Stud mounting Ganged Capacitor Section
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
CAPACITORS ( Cont ' d. )
B.R.1617 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS BMD
Remarks
C181 C182 C183 Cl 84 C185
C186 C187 C.188 C189
c201 C20 2 C20f c206 ~ 2 0 5 r
C206 C207 C208 C209 c210
C211 C212 c213 C214 ~ 2 1 5
C216 C217 C218. ~ 2 1 9 C220
C221 C222 C223 c224 czz5
C226 C227 C228 ~ 2 2 9 C230
2131206 21 25665 z 1.25095 2133 206 21 24477
2123926 24 23926 Z1 23926 2131169
21 25665 2315506 21 45095 2-l 1 5095 Z125665
2.1 25665 2145095 z115095 24 15095 21 25665
2 1 25 665 21 1 5095 2.1 15095 z915095 2125665
2123194 Z115504 z.123274
z115095
2.1 15095 2115148 ZlI5504 21 23274 z115095
Z 125665 2123194 2 423274 2115502 2.1 45095
I00 p3' 470 fl 0. I F 100 pF
0.003p
I20 pl? 120 st 120 pF 6.8 pp
470 pF 0 . y 0. l'/" 0. I F 470 @
470 @ 0 . y
;I ij$ 470 PF
470 I$' 0. l'/"F 0.1 UI?
0. p 47 fl
100 pF
200 o'026f 0. l/uF
0. I F
::'Zg 200 o . 1 ~
470 I$' loo 39' 200 pF
Om Oo5$ 0.1,
10;o 2%; 20;; IOC/5 2Go
zL a~ GO
?c$-i
3; 20)" 2%: 2q0 5$
$- 2& mi'; 2C$a 5s
5>! 20"/0 2@0 2G0 55
2Ga 2CF,i 2q0
2@
2q0 2Q0 2U/o
2aY ZOC,J
2Q0 20j6 2050 2 ~ ;
35OV 35m 350V 350V 35OV
75m 75OV 75OV 500V
350V 35O-V 350V 35ov 350V
350V 350V 35ov 35m 35OV
35OV 350V 350V 35ov 35OV
350v 75OV 35ov
350V
350V 35ov 75OV 35oV 350v
35Ov 35OV 350V
I OOOV 350V
Studmounting
Stud mounting I? ft
Stud mounting I I t 1
t 1 t t
Stud mounting It I!
II 11
No Capacitor Studmounting
Stud mounting
stuamourrtin@;
Stud mounting
CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS
CAPACITORS ( Cont d. )
I I Ref.
C23 1 C232 C233 c234 C235
35ov 1 OOOV 4om 4oov 75m
A e P e o r Joint Service Cat. No,
21 23456 2'1'15504
45504 21 23194 21 23456
75ov 75ov 75m
1 OOOV 400v
Remarks
Lemco 1510
Stud mounting Variable V a r i a b l e - Oxley DifP D.V.C. 1-5/8
Lemco 1510 Variable I? and R cg0-01 Variable V a r i a b l e Tf a n d R c3 l / l l A
V a n able
TCC Type 82
1 ) I 1 11
TCC Type CP.45N
This Sheet issued with A o L o NO. 1 August 1956
RXSISTQIS, CARBON INSULATED FIXED G W E 2
Unless otherwise stated
~ .~ .1617 C W E R 3 LIST OF COMPONENi'S 8400
Ref.
RIOI R402 R103 R104 R105
R106 R107 Rq 08 RlO9 Rl10
R111 R4 12 R113 R114. R115
R196 R?17 Rq 48 R119 Rl20
R121 R122 Rq 23 RI 24 R125
R7 26 R127 R128 R129 R I ~ O
R201 R202 R203 ~ 2 0 4 R205
R20 6 R20 7 ~ 2 0 8 R209 R210
b e i n g T 01. A.P. or Joint
S ervice Cat. No.
Remarks Value
2223092 2223080 2221110 22221 23 2221 002
2223038 2221140 2222026 2222005 2222038
2222080 2223018 2223038 222221 6 2223 1 22
222201 7 2221 185 2221 143 222 1068 222221 6
2221 089 2221 143 2223030 2222101 2221 185
2222235 2221026 2222235 2221 194. 2221 152
220303 9 2223038 2221 1 94 2222090 Z203039
2223038 2221 19& 2222090 222301 8 2221 131
270k ohms 220k ohms 100 ohms 8.2k ohms
I 0 ohms
+look ohms 100 ohms 9.5k o h
l k o h 1.8k o h
3.9k ohms 68k o h
IOOk ohms 47k ~~
b70k ohas
1.2k ohms 390 ohms 180 ohms 47 ohms 47k ohms
68 ohms 180 o t m 82k ohms 5.6k o b s 390 o b
47k ohms 22 ohms 47k o h s
470 ~~ 220 ohms
IOOk o b IOOk ohms 470 ohms 4.7k O~UILS I OOk ohms
IOOk ohms 470 4.7k ohms
68k ohms 0 ohms
1
L'
&? $17 $T/ 3 $TJ
@? 1 - 2 i Y f $V &TJ
$V
1 9 TV: $i
$17 $TJ
$17 -l-i 2" i
$i
*W +IT
$77 $!i 8 &W
1 - 2zTl &W
$7
3~ *{ 2
+I? 9
q f 4
&' $7
$7 q? "37
r
CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS
RESISTORS (Cont'd. ) - -
Ref. Aep , Joint Service Cat. I'Jo,
Value
4e7k ohms 270k ohms 12k ohms
4.7k ohms 1 Tviegoh
33k ohms &.7k ohms
1 Megohrn 680k ohms 6eOk o h s
15k ohms 3jOk ohms 68k ohms 1Ok ohms look alms
10k ohms 100 ohms 620 ohms 150k ohms 270k ohms
I, 2ivi ohms 47k ohms 150 ohms 270 ohms
2, 21v1 ohms 82k ohms 220k ohms 220 ohms 470k ohms
&7k ohms 470 d2m.S 7.5k 0-
3.3k o h m 15k ohms
2,2 k ohms 470 ohm
This Sheet issued w i t h A.L. No. 1 Awust 1956
VARIABI% RESISTORS
~ . ~ . 1 6 1 7 CHAPTER 3 LIST OF COMPOIW'E ~40D
4
Ref,
.HViOl IZVlO2 RV220 m226 RY305] m309
Ref.
TRIO~/I 15
TRI 16 TR201
~ ~ 2 0 3 TR 01 TR302
AeP. ar Joint
Service Cat. No.
51- AP. 6048Qll ~g62-183 2262948
Z27jD31
c.
Ref.
. LIOI $01 L105 L106 L201 U02 KO5 LS2 L304
AIP, or J o i n t
Service Cat. NO*
TRIO1 had. 1-5 5905-A.P. t84026/
7/e/s/30
V a l u e
IOOk ohm8 20 ohms 100k o h 2,- ohm Jk ohms
50 0-
Descrip ti=
R.F. Transformers, Tuned Bands 1-5
I.F. Transformer
I*& formers
Audio Output Transformer Mains Transformer
1 I
AePe or Joint
Se&e Cat. NO.
AP. 65560 AP. 67762
Monitor LA, Transformer -
T ole
m,o loc/o
2% W/O
Dseoription
Coils, Tuned - Local Oscillator B a n d s l - 5
Choke 1.5 dl - Local Oeoillatm Coil, tuned ( I.F. ) Coil, t u ~ l ~ d B.F. 0. Coil B.F. Oe Choke 9 8d5H - Smoothing Choke 20H - Smoothing
-
Rating
2.97 0.3W 0, I'GJ
Remarks
- Ant i-Cross-Mod. Iamps -Brilliance- Limiter A.F. GAIN
Ganged ReF* GAW A e F.
CHAPTEFt 3 LIST OF COM?OKNB
LOUDSPEAKER
Description
500 mA Cartridge f i s e
Ref.
F ~ O I
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
F302{ , 25901 10 2A t t tt , 3'303 I
AoPo Joint
Service Cat, No.
2590108
Ref,
U20l
Ref.
SKI 0 1 SKI02 SKI03 SK201 SK202
A.P, or Joint
Service Cat. No.
C
L : - , .
Pattern No,
66922
2560070 A p e 57771 AP. 60157 2560080 M . 60158
!
Description
Lcud speaker 3 ohms (lionit or)
Description
4 Pin Yark 4 - Aerial Input 4 Pin - Interconnecting (R. F./I.F. units) 12 Pin - Inter-connecting (RF./I.F. units) 6 Pin - hiark 4 - Audio Output 8 Pin - Interconnecting (I. F./A.F. - Pmer
un i t ) 12 Pin - Intemonnecting (I.F./A.F. - Pomr
units) 2 Pin Mark 4. - k i n s Ingut
Coaxial - R.I.S. Crystal - Local Oscillator 12 Pin - Inter-connecting 4 Pin - Inter-connecting Coaxial - R.E.C.
Coaxial - RE. B. Crystal B. F. 0. 8 Pin - Inter-connecting (I.F./& I?. and Pmer
units) 12 Pin - Inter-connecting (I.F./A. F. and Pmer
units)
Ref. J.S. Cat. No. Description L
I LPIOI-107 I . X951225 1 Pilot Iamps 6.5V 0.3.A M.E. S. I
This Sheet issued w i t h AeLo NO. 1 August 1956 34
SWITCEBS
B.R.1617 CWTm 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS BbOD
MIS czuNE0-Q
Description
Micro Switch Burgess VJN Switch I a q s Crys ta l Switch Switch 3 Position - Bandwidth Switch 7 Position - System - Switch 2 Position - Limiter - Switch 2 Position - Dumy Load - Switch 2 Position - A, G. C. - . Switch 2 Position - bins
Switch 2 Pos i t i on - Monitor L.S.
Ref,
Sf71 01 SIT102 sw 1 03 SIT201 SVJ202
SIT203 SVT204.
m206 S V ~ ~ O I
~ ~ 3 0 2 C
A.P. or Joint
Service Cat, No,
5930-99-972-8826 AP9836A
5930-99-972-8825 AP. 60448 or) AP, 50068
52805
L
Ref,
blR1 XL3O.I XI201 XL202 ~~301/2
r
A.P. or Joint
Service Cat. No.
eve 448
AP. 67864
AP. 676A
Description
Crystal - Rectifier - Crystal - Local Oscillator - Crystal 500 kc/s - B. F. 0. (calibrate) - Crystal 500 k d s - Crystal Fi l ter - Jack 3 pole
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 4
C H A P T E R 4 ----------------- ---------------- R E C E I V E R P A T T E R N D I F F E R E N C E S ------------------------===============----==========-
Introductian Ap.571w Ax'. 57WB
5 7 1 w AX'. 5714-0D
Receiver Bl@ AP. 571 ~oC/D. Turret Mcd ificat ions
Para. -
Fig.
4
This sheet issued with A.L. No. 2 October 1957 B.R. 1617 CHAFTER 4
C H A P T E R 4 -----I--------_-- ---- -------------
R E C E I V E R P A T T E R N D I F F E R E N C E S ------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------
Introduction
1 , The principal differences between the five patterns of the receiver are detailed below, A s a general d e , sasequent patterns retain all
improvement mdifications and special f a c i l i t i e s incorporated in the ea r l i e r types of the receiver, Thus B40B retains all the modifications of B40A, w h i l s t incogorating additional modifications.
2, It should be remembered that the identi ty of a component i n the circuit drawings of one pattern of receiver, i s not necessarily the same in the
c i rcui t drawings of other pabterns of the B40 receiver.
3 e This pattern di f fers fmm A. P. 57140 as follows: - (a) The position of the noise l imiter valve on the IF Unit i s changed, t o
provide additional space fo r the f i t t i n g of an improved design of monitor loudspeaker,
(b) A tensioning device is f i t t e d to the driving chain of the tuning mechanism to minimise backlash,
(c ) The LIMITER and AF GAIN potentiometers ( ~ ~ 2 2 0 and ~17224) are brought out to control knobs, instead of the screwdriver adjustment,
(d) The mains transformer TRJ02 is an o i l f i l l e d type instead of the original open type. Three webs are cut away i n the chassis t o give clearance,
NOT& In accordance with Modification No. 5 (B, Re 1 91 7), t h i s transf 0 mer should - now be replaced by A.P. 65561%
(e) A protection bar i s f i t t e d i n front of the Il? transformar trimmers t o prevent damage when the unit i s withdrawn from the case,
(f) A portion of the left-hand side plate i s cut away to f ac i l i t a t e removal of the crystal,
( ) The screen of the RF Unit is bent t o prevent vibration.
(h) The size of the dowel holes is increased to bring the IF chassis forward.
(j) The manual GAIN control R V X ~ / ~ O ~ i s f i t t ed with a ganged potentiometer of improved design,
(k) Certain reconditioned receive rs w i l l have temperature compensated capacitors f i t t e d i n the local osci l lator , RF and b.f.0. c i rcu i t s as i n the case of the B&B/C/D.
4. This pattern differs from A. Po 57140A as f 0110~s: - (a) A redesigned tuning drive is fitted.
(b) A 500 kc/s crystal f i l t e r is f i t t e d i n the IF chain, between the f i r s t two stages, The mounting of the f i l t e r is effected by removing the secondary of the IF coi l L201, to the position formerly occupied by the monitor loudspeaker transformer TR204, t h i s last-mentioned component is mwed t o the AF and Power U n i t . The position formerly occupied by the transformer secondary L201 is taken by the IF t r a n s f o m r TR201, and the crystal f i l t e r (~206, XL202 etc.) positioned i n the place vacated by TR201.
(c) The SYSTEM switch EN202 has f ive instead of s i x positions. The manual posit ion is no longer required, as a separate a.g.c. switch W206 is f i t t e d to provide f a c i l i t i e s fo r both manual and automatic gain control, i n a l l positions of the SYSTEM switch. The a. g, c. switch is f i t t e d i n the position formerly occupied by the monitor loudspeaker switch SW205, t h i s in turn being mved to the AF' and Power U n i t above the mains switch.
(d) The a.g.c. time constants are modified. The two load iwsistors ~214/5, both of 330k ohms, are changed to ~236/7, both of 680k ohms; C219, R217 and switches SW202b/c are remved and R216, (68k ohms) is changed to R235 (1 50k ohms). These changes give time constants of 0.1 second charge and one second discharge f o r a l l systems of operation.
(e) The BANDWIDTH switch SW201 is f i t t e d with an additional section and has been re-wired t o bring i n the crystal f i l t e r on 1 kc/s in the th i rd position of the switch,
( f ) Certain leads i n the IF Unit have been screened, t o reduce hum pick-up.
(g) Increased smoothing is provided by replacing the 10H choke L303, by a 20H choke L304, and ~307/8 ( 4 ~ capacitors), to ~314/5 ( 8 ~ capacitors).
(h) To reduce hm, the following changes are incorporated: - Capacitors C316/7 (0.. 02 respectively), a m connected across L304, the screen o through R314 (4.7k ohms), and the heaters of ~301/2 are earthed only in the IF U n i t .
(j) The Note F i l t e r , ~302/L301 is renoved, together with the associated BANDVJIDTH switching. The arade load res is tor of V301 (~302) is connected direct ly to the hat . l ine,
(k) A replacement mains transformer A.P. 67763.A ( T R ~ o ~ ) , with a 'C ' core, is f i t ted. '
(1) A device is f i t t e d to give a direct indication of the frequency band to which the receiver is switch&.
(m) The t r iming tools formerly supplied with the receiver were changed f o r the following reasons: - ( i ) It was found that the existing tools were not suitable fo r lining
up the crystal f i l t e r , due to the excessive metal.
( i i ) I n view of this, the tools were modified and simplified so that one tool, capable of trimming both the crystal f i l t e r and the ordinary LF tr-ers, replaced tw6 trimming tools previously supplied.
37 This Sheet issued with A,L. No, 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 4
50 The only differences between th i s pattern and A.P. 57140B are those due t o the adaptation of the receiver fo r common ae r i a l workirg. They
are as fo1lms:-
Aerial Circuit Modifications Fig. 12 Chapter 3.
(a) The aer ia l input i s taken from Pins B and C of the ae r ia l plug PL101. Pin A is earthed close t o the plug and Pin D, previously connected t o the secondary side of the input transformer TRIOl, via a small capacitor C101, t o give a high iqedance input, is no longer used. Separate co-axial leads are taken from Pins B and C of PL401 t o contacts 1 and 2 of' the ae r ia l turre t contact assembly. These contacts a re also connected to the terminals of the micro-sviitch STLi (SLr101 i n BUD), which is operated by small conical cams fixed t o the rear of the turret. The cams are placed so that when the turre t contacts engage on any frequency range, the micro-s~iitch contacts are open, and the ae r ia l input circuits are included i n ser ies i n the transmission lines, -- lihilst the turre t is being switched from one range t o another, the micro-switch is released an6 the contacts close, placing a shmt-circuit across the ae r i a l input. Vhen moving the turre t from the operative position, the cams are arranged so that whichever m y it moves, the micro-m-itch short-circuits the receiver input, before the t i p s of the pin contacts on the turre t have been released by the fixed blade contacts. A connection between Pins A and B i s t h s mintained whilst svwitching from range t o range.
l$odifications t o the Aerial Coil Campartnents of the Turret
(b) Cimuit and layout diagrams of the three turre t compartments concerned (Vaveba~s I, 2 and 3) are shmn in Figs. 1 and 2, Part 3, the additional components relat ive t o the modifications a r e indicated by dotted lines. The input transformer primary c i rcui ts have been re- designed so that the cod i t ions of common ae r i a l working (as specified i n B.R 1615 Ch. 2) a re maintained. The inductance of each primary winding is small enough to al lm- the x f i l t e r (formed by th i s winding and the additional capacitors fo r the conrmon ae r i a l working system) t o have i ts cut-of f frequency maintained above 30 iiic/s, when working in to a 92 ohms load, thus avoiding attenuation of incoming signals over the frequency range of the receiver. The coupling between primary and secondary of TRIO1 i s such as t o ensure the patching conditions required, i.e. a standing wave ra t io bet ter than 0.4. I n actual practice t h i s means reducing the coupling, thus increasing the select ivi ty of the ae r i a l circuit. This has the effect of increashg the noise factor on Ranges 1, 2 and 3. The increese i n noise factor varies bh -een 1 and 1.5 dB with a 92 ohms source. On Ranges 4 and 5, the primary inductance is so small that s tray c i rcui t capacity is sufficient t o make the K
f i l t e r .
Xodif ied Earthing Arrangements Fig. 4
( c ) ( i ) These modifications achieve a reduction i n coupling betvceen the oscil lator a d ae r ia l c i rcui ts i n the RF turret. I n the original patterns of the recekver, each c o i l compartment was insulated from the turret section t o vhich it was secured, I n the common aer ia l working receivers the ae r ia l co i l compartment i s earthed t o the
CHAPTER 4
( i i )
tu r re t by the securing scret;-s and a riel;; ear th t e m i m 1 provided on the coqartment, by replacing the paxolin spacer v i t h a metal one, Additional earthing of the tu r re t i s provided by an earthing spi4er comected t o a ring, vchicl? is i n turn connected t o the turret. A l ink i s f i t t ed belxeen the osc i l la tor and mixer sections of the turret , t o min ta in tile re la t ive potentials and reduce circulating currents.
A s a resul t of t h i s additional earthing, the osci l lator radiation has been reduced so that the interference experienced i n the c0a.w. system is approximtely a t the same level as that exyerienced with a single a e r i a l when tbe receiver ae r ia l s a re separated by about 15 feet. i l i th these single a e r i a l systems, ae r i a l separations of a s l i t t l e as four fee t are not uncommon and t h i s form of interference has not proved excessive, IXth the c.a.vi. system there is the added advantage, that i t is always possible t o ST-i-itch t o the al ternat ive aerial.
6. A s previously stated i n the introduction t o the handbook, circuit references have been extensively changed i n t h i s pat tern of the
receiver. The mechanical and e lec t r ica l differences between A.P. 57160i) and 57140C, can best be considered by dividing them in to three groups as folla-rs: -
(a) Introduction of preferred type valves.
(b) Introduction of f a c i l i t i e s f o r the reception of Frequency Shif t Keying.
(c ) IJiscellaneous changes.
7. Dealing with the above goups i n order: - (a ) Changes due t o the na5- valves
(i) Valves
Valve
V l 04 V102 Vl03 VlO4
~201/2/3
V206 ~3 0.1 V302 V303 v304
V304
aperation -----
Fi r s t RF Second RF iiix er Oscillator I s t , 2nd and 3rd IeFo
B.T.0. AF A q l i f ier Output Rectif ier Stabi l i ser
Rectif ier
B&O/~/B/C CN No.
~3 27 m303 W302 m327 m303
m303 m303 m304
CV346 or CV~790 CV287
.*
S tab i l i se r
s I
B40D CV No.
(3&014 m454 CV2128 GW14 ~ ~ 1 3 . 1
CVl3l m454 CV2136 m493 -
c-v4-93 i V305 I . CV1832
This sheet issued wi th A.L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 16 17 Chapter 4
FIG. I (A) AERIAL TURRET SECTION
CONTACT?
EARTH
MICROSWITCH S . W.M.
CAM FOR OPERATING MICROS WITCH
EARTHING SPIDER
(8) OSCILLATOR AND R F. TURRET SECTIONS
EARTHING LINK
RECEIVER 840 A.P.57140 CID TURRET MODIFICATIONS
38 This Sheet issued with A.L. NO, 1 August 19% B.R.1617 CHAPTER 4
In the table given belov;, the valves underlined are those f i t t ed so far, by the mmfacturer. Eventually, the .valves shmin i n the "Reliabletf column w i l l be used exclusively,
l~ieamhile when a "Preferred" valve fa i ls , it should be replaced by its " R e l i a b l e " equivalent, i f th is i s available.
I Underlined valves f i t t ed by manufacturer.
Ref ,
( i i ) Changes - Resistars
Reliable Preferred
&oc
1 R115 R?16 RIA7 RIA9 R203
Ref.
BbOD
220 ohms 56kohrns 4.7k ohms 560 ohms 560 ohrns
R207 R212 12213 R236 R237
2314 4.7k ohms
Ref',
6 0 ohms 220k ohms 15k ohms
680k o h s 680k ohms
I2302 R303 R304 R308 R310
68 ohms 82k ohms
5.6k ohms 390 ohms 470 cAx-ns
470 ohms 27Ok ohms 12k ohms
270k ohms 1, 2% ohrns
Value
68kohms 3j0k ohms 820 ohms 120 ohns 680k ohms
V102 Cathode VlOj Screen V103 Ande VlO3 Cathode V201 Cathode
Joint-Ser, Cat, NO. T-
V202 Cathode A.G.C. Delay A.G.C. Delay AT, A.G.C. AF, A.G.C.
I
Value Joint-Ser. Remarks Cat, No,
222301 7 2223-1 01 2221227 2221 123 Z2231& Dclctcd, CV1832 has no primary ignition electrode
R314 2222048 ~ 3 0 2 Screen 2222090 1 I 2221195 1 V302 Cathode
R302 R303 R304
82kohms I Z22.3029 V301Ancde 220k ohms Z2230CO V3Ol Screen 220 ohms 2221152 I V301 Cathcdc
R308 470 ohms 1 2221195 1V302 Catnode
CHAPTER 4
( i i i ) These component changes are a l l cmsequent upon the use of the new type valves and are necessary to ensure correct valve potentials, stage gain, and receiver characteristics.
(b) Changes due to the introduction of the FSK f ac i l i t y
( i ~ TWO mcdifications have been nade for t h i s puqose:-
( I ) The beat frequency oscillator has been made t o function a t two additional frequencies; these are marked "FSK lriIDE -HIGH-" a n d "FSK IIIDE -LOVI-" on the SYSTELi Snitch (Fig. 3 Ch. 1 ). The mrking "FSK NARROI7" has been added t o the existing "C.?i. -HIGH- and -LOIl:-" on the snitch; hatever, the o-jeration of th i s f ac i l i t y remins as before.
(2) A small mriable capacitor, mrked "OSC TRIIii" on the front paael, has been added to the local oscillator c i rcui t t o give f ine tuning. .
( i i ) Changes brought abcut by ( I ) above: - C236 (470 pF), i n the B40C is replaced by C236 (425 @') and C250 (39 $). C250 is a tempelatwe compensatiix capacitor, hence greater s tab i l i ty of the b. f. o. i s mintairled fo r f. s. k. reception, The b. f. o. pitch coi ls i n the &OC (I203 a i ~ d ~ 2 0 4 ) are no longer f i t t ed ; pitch control i s effected i n the W D , by aajustment of the trirxners C239, C243, C247 ( a l l 4 - 18 p ~ j and C245 (1 - 10 p ~ ) . The latter i s shunted by C246 (3.3 @') t o provide the correct trimnix range. The appropriate b. f. o. pitch is selected by the SYSTEM swi-tch E1202. (2248 (4.7 pi?) i s employed a s a c i rcui t balancing capacitor i n the ''IIIDB HIGH" position t o ensure that L202 is adjusted s o a s t o f a l l within i t s frequency tolerance.
( i) To prevent. excessive variation i n image rejection fikures, the capacitor c1unge.s listed belmi have been carried out.
I - -- - I
Ref. Value Joint4er . Ref, Value Jomt-Ser. Location Cat. No. Cat. 1\To.
Clll 450 pr' 21 25664 C166 120 pF C121 330 PF 27 23941
Turret (3.15 45Opr' 2.1 25664 C187 I20 pi7
c140 330 I?
C124 450 pF 21 25664 C188 120 pF Cl76 330 fl
----I
T h i s Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R 16 7 CHAPTER 4
( i i ) The 450 PI? capacitors i n the &OC vi-ere 55~ tolerance and %-ere responsible f o r excessive var ia t ion i n iringe re jec t ion Figpres. I n order t o maintain 2;J tolerance, two "preferred" type capacitors have been connected in parallel as ~ n d scated i n the table, i n l i eu of the one capacitor previously used.
( i i i ) I n order t o achieve correct trimning i n the mixer c i rcu i t of Band 4, C114 (27 p), i n the &.OC, has been changed t o C 1 3 6 (22 p ~ ) , i n the ~403,
( i v ) I n the ANTI-CROSS-IvIODlJLA,TION control c i r cu i t of the BL@D, a crys ta l r e c t i f i e r I f i l (~448)~ and a res i s to r R130, have been added to prevent posi t ive excursions of grid pote i~t ial .
(v) A n additional r e s i s t o r R240 (270 ohms), together with the miitch coiitacts S\i20lk, ensure that the bias t o V201 and 7202 is ad Justed t o maintain constant gain i n the IF amplifier when t h e b a n d ~ i d t h i s c i ~ a i ~ e d .
(vi) Band 3 Aerial - Circuit (~11103)
Capacitor Cl89 (6.8 p ~ ) added i n p a r a l l e l with C115.
3m.d 4 Aerial C i r c u i t ( T R ~ 04) - Capacitor C l l 7 increased i n value frorii 15, pF t o 22 PI',
Band 5 Aerial Circuit ( ~ ~ 1 0 5 )
Capacitor Cq 20 ii~creased i n value from 47 pF t o 56 pF'.
Band 5 -- Osci_llator Circuit ( ~ 1 0 5 )
Capacitor C156 increased i n value from 27 @ t o 33 pl?.
Note ? These changes are t o f a c i l i t a t e iir7 alignriient ard are included i n receivers with s e r i a l numbers above &OO.
Note 2 In BL+OC; - C?? 5 is C109 Band 3 CAI7 i s C l o y Band 4. C120 i s CIIO Band 5 C 1 5 6 i s C133a Band 5
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956
PART 2
ALIGNMENT, TESTING, ADJUSTING
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
B.R. 1617 Par t 2
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 5
C H A P T E R 5 ----------------- -----------------
D I S l Y I A N T L I N G T H E R E C E I V E R ===============================================
To remove the Receiver from its case
To remove the IF Unit
To rernwe the AF and Pmer Unit
RE' Unit
Switch Wafers
Para. - I
2
3
4
5
1 r his Sheet issued with k.L, NO, 1 August 1956
D I S I k i A N T L I N G T H E R E C E I V E R -------_--------------------------------------- -------_---------------------------------------
To remove the Receiver from i t s case Figs. 1, 2 and 3 , Part 1, Chap. 4
1. Undo the ttvo retaining nuts covering the front f e e t a t the bottom of the front panel, Undo the two milled headed screws a t the top comers
of the front panel. Tiithdraw the connectors a t the rear of the receiver. Pul l the receiver upti-ards aiid forwards with the handles, it wi l l then run out on two rol lers situated a-i; the bottoa rear of the framework. It should be noted that the receiver vceighs nearly 100 lb.
T o remove the IF Unit Figs. 11, 13 and 15, Part 3
2. Rernove the BAIUDT~IDTH, SYSTEM, A F GAIN an3 L~vIIIIER knobs. Vithdraw the four inter-connecting plugs and sockets i. e. PL201 and PL103 ( ~ ~ 1 0 2 ,
&OD) t o the RF Unit, plugs P L Z O ~ / ~ ( ~ ~ 2 0 3 / 4 , ~ 4 0 ~ ) t o the AF and Pmer Unit. Unscrew the two Large retaining screm a t the back of the IF Unit. Clear the dm-el pins a t the rear of the unit, it w i l l then be possible to l i f t it clear.
To remove the AP and Power Unit Figs. la, 21 and 23, Part 3
3. Remove the GAIN knob a t the bottom right of the front panel. 17ithdm.w the b-o large screws a t the back of the unit. \iitMraw plugs ~~204 /5 ,
( ~ ~ 2 0 3 / 4 ~ 4 . 0 ~ ) . Pul l back the unit and l i f t ar-cay I ' rom the panel,
RF Unit
4. A l l components can be reached on th i s unit without dismntling it from the receiver framework, If it should become necessary f o r the tuning
mechanism to be removed, detai ls are given i n Chapter 9. The screws holding the mechanism i n position are situated 011 the underside of the framev-lark.
S ~ i % c h ICaf ers
5. Sihen replacing switch wafers on switches containing more than one of these items make sure that the locating notches are a l l p o i n t i x i n the
right direction,
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 6
General Instructio_nrr
Introduction Precautions T r h i n g Tools Component Identification Test Equipment Special Items
LIST OF CONTENTS
The Alignment procedure i n brief
IF Alignment S O D b. f. o. Alignment Crystal F i l t e r Alignment R F Aligrment
Test Equipment required Special Items The d r i l l i n outline The d r i l l i n deta i l
B.F.O. A l i m e n t in l34OD receivers
Intrcduction Test Zquipment requbed The d r i l l & outline The d r i l l i n deta i l
Crystal E'ilter Alignment
Test Equipment required Special Items The drill in a t l i n e The d r i l l i n deta i l
Alternative liethcd of Crystal F i l t e r Alifflvaent
Introduction Test Equipment required The d r i l l i n outline The drill i n deta i l
Para.
Para.
RF Alignment
Test Equipment re quired The d r i l l i n outline The d r i l l i n de ta i l Overall method of Alignment
LIST OF FIGURES
Connection Diagrams - D? Alignment - Test Equipment Connections - B.F.O. Alignment ( ~ 4 . 0 ~ ) Test Equipment Connect ions - Crystal F i l t e r Alignment Response - Crystal F i l t e r Test Equipment Connect ions - Crystal F i l t e r Aligment -
al ternat ive method Connection t o Receiver from CoRo 0. Crystal T i l t e r Alignment -
al ternat ive method Response Cunres - Crystal F i l t e r Alignment, al ternat ive method - RF Coil Assembly - RF Alignment - Test Equipment Connections - RF Alignment
This Sheet issued wf t h A.L. No, 1 August 1956
C H A P T E R -__--_____-_-_--- 6 --I-------------
GENERAL TNSTRUCTICNS
Introduction
1. Alignment ell probably be necessary a f t e r replacement of mjor components i n the RF and IF circuits, or if the receiver f a i l s to
reach the limits prescribed in perfomnce measurements. Hmever, before alignment is attempted, a l l other possible causes of pow sensit ivi ty should be investigated. Alignment shcu$d be undertaken only by order of the Officer responsible for the mintenance of the ecpipment,
Precaut ions
em Vhen lininglup, the f'ollming precautions must be observed : - (a) The receiver and t e s t instruments must be connected individually to
a common eartli.
(b) A 1 1 connectiag leads must be a s short as possible.
(c) Screened l e a d s mst be used t o carry currents a t R F &.IF the screening bein2 comiect ed t o the comon earth,
( d ) The receiver and tes t equipment must be allowed t o warm through fo r a t least 15 minutes bei'ore alignment is commenced, but a longer warming- up period for the receiver i s s m c t i r ~ ~ e s advisable,
Trimming Tools Ap7j+'r9 T R ~ - ~ M I N E T O O L C 6
3. The appropriate triming t o o l for the alignment procedure i n hand should be selected froq the Kit of Trim-dng Tools a l l a ~ e d f o r S.1ii.R.
use. These trimming tools were a t one tiiae f i t t e a i n the receiver, but are nav supplied as a k i t ,
component Identification
-- - 4. 'idhere no ambiguity can arise, switches and controls have been ref erred
to by name, but not identified by component numbers, i n order t o make the instructions more readable,
T e s t Equipment
5. The principal items required are:-
(a) Test Oscillator
T h i s shmld cover the frequency band of the receiver. The i ~ e p i ~
Test Oscillator CT212 is particularly suitable, but G73 i s also satisfactory, Its function is t o provide a signal a t a constant frequency and constant level for the duration of the alignment procedure.
The & l o d u b t i o n frequency omplcyed is 2000 c /s for a212, or 400 c i s f o r Q73.
(b) Output Neter
The new Decibel 'lietar Portable No. 3 w i l l provide t h i s fhcility. Liean- while, the output meter of the CC82 Noise Generator can be used, or a h.r, Ammeter connected t o read a.c. volts.
The f'unction of the instrument is t o shmc hhow the receiver cutput varies, due t o adjustments during a l i m e n t .
(c) Variable frequency AJ? Oscillator
T h i s is required t o provide an accurate t e s t oscillator setting when aligning the b.f. o. i n the B40D receiver. Ships f i t t ed with th i s receiver w i l l require dockyard or depot ship's assistance in th i s phase of alignment i f they do not possess th is t e s t instrument. The Audio Oscillator G205 is the most suitable instrument a t present in service,
(d) Oscilloscope Type 13A
This i s needed for the same reason as given under (c) above. It is also used in conjunction with a frequency swept oscil lator i n a method of aligning the crystal f i l t e r , which gives more accurate results than the method which employs a signal generator and a rnicro-anrmeter.
( e ) Ivlicro-ammeter
This indicates changes in second detector current due t o adjustments made during crystal f i l t e r alignment. It is used t o plot the crystal f i l t e r response curve when the t e s t oscil lator frequency is varied over the region around 500 kc/s.
Special Items
6 . In order t o save time when a receiver i s i n hard f o r alignment, certain special leads, connectors, etc., should be demnded ard made up i n
good time beforehand,
The follaviing special i t em, not already provided elsewhere, will be required : -
No. Function Item
To stop the b.f.0. A O.01F capacitor, such as 2115552, 1 valve oscillating. with a A,Pe IT5845 crocodile c l ip joined
Connected between to each end. g r i d and chassis,
To permit an 2 Output ivieter t o be
connected t o the
& This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 4 No~mber 1958 ~~R.1617 aAPTER 6
THE A W : G ~ ~ PROCE'IMJRES IN BRIEF
IF Alignment
Item
A.P. 60046 plug, f i t t ed i n socket SIC 203, should be removed. Connect t o it a three ' foot length of Uniradio 70 cable (a. 13870) o r similar. Prepare the other end of the cable fo r coimection t o a her. Avometer No. 8
A n 0.01 /1F capacitor, such a s 2115552 connected i n series with a 68 ohm resistar . A croccdile c l i p A.E. I75845 is conr~ected t o each f ree end.
Item N 0.
3
4
I 7. (a ) The object of aligning the IF stages i s to ensure:-
-
Function
To enable second detector current t o 'be read on a her. Avometer No. 8 A.P. 12945
To reduce 33' gain and so avoid overloading the receiver, rr~hen carryine; out R3? alignment.
(i) That each stage is tuned precisely t o 5CO kc/s (the intermediate frequency) so that the m x i m voltage and the correct bandwidth are obtained a t the output of the final IF amplifier.
( i i ) That the b. f. o, is adjusted to the IF amplifier centre frequency of 500 kc/s and i n the case of B ~ o / . B / c , to give a 1 kc/s beat note above or below th i s frequency. B40D is deal t with separately i n para. 8.
(b) It should not be necessary t o re-align the IF stages a f t e r changing valves i n the IF U n i t . In receivers B~o/A/B/c, the b. f. o. c o i l U02 may require readjustment i f the b. f. o. valve is changed. TO do this, the d r i l l (given i n . 14) up t o step 8(a) or (b) should IX f ollmed, omitting step (byT:. e.) do NOT a l t e r the t r i m m w of the l a s t IF transfarmer.
( c ) The adjustment of the dust-core trimmers should be carried out with the trimming tool provided i n the E.1,I.R. trimming tool kit. The effect of an ad justrnent, as indicated in the output meter, should be noted when the trinming tool has been withdra~vn frm the trimmer.
(d) A s the varicus ci rcui ts are brought in to tune, the output from the t e s t osci l lator should be altered as necessary t o maintain the mximun viattmeter reading a t a level of about 300
&OD B.F.O. Alignment
8. ( a ) The folla-ring b. f. o. frequencies need t o be se t up with an accuracy of + 50 c/s i n the VIDE position, or $ 20 c/s in the N A X I ( ~ B position of The SYSTEId switch. Receivers used for facsimile recording (WAX) + 30 c/s i n the WIDE position. -.
(b) This order of accuracy cannot be achieved by the norm1 "beat" method. An oscilloscope is theref ore employed. The necessary frequency is fed in to the oscilloscope from an audio frequency oscillator, and the audio output frequency of the receiver is adjusted by means of the b. f. o. trinnning capacitors so as to "match" the audio oscil lator frequency, thus producing an eilL-pe in tlz c.r. t.
System Switch Position
FSK WIDE HIGH
FAX
PSK VIDE LOh-6
FAX
PSK NARROW HIGH
FSK NARFtOW LOVi
TUNE
(c) A n RF signal i s fed in a t the g r i d of the 3rd R? valve. A s the signal generator cannot be tuned to the receiver GAL signal with sufficient accuracy by the "zero beat" methcd, the signal generator is tuned t o 499.5 kc/s (500 c / s below the receiver IF centre frewency), and "matched" i n the oscilloscope for accuracy ~ 5 t h a 500 c/s signal from the audio oscillator. This has t o be taken in to account when adjusting the audio oscillator, whose output frequencies are given i n the table belm: -
Frequency
2550 C/S
1900 c/s
2550 c/s
1 900 c/s
I000 c i s
1000 c/s
-
Crystal Filter Alignment
Remarks
above 500 kc/s-
above 500 kc/s
below 500 dc/s
below 500 kc/s
above 500 kc/s
below 500 kc/s
on 500 kc/s 1
t
9. ( a ) The object of aligning the crystal f i l t e r is to ensure that it possesses the correct response curve and band~idth, with i t s centre f repency at 500 lcc/s.
&OD System SvfitchPosition
(b) If the f i l t e r i s very badly out of adjustment, it is recommended that realignment should not normlly be undertaken in seagoing ships, but that assistance be sought from the dockyard or depot ship, u n l e s s the crystal filter facility i s considered t o be of very great ir~~ilediate hp r t ance . .4 graat deal of time, patience and care is necessary ?if the correct response curve is t o be achieved,
Sig. Gen, Frequency
WIDE HIGH
UXl
NlLEtRaV HIGH
NARROI? Wl,'
TUNE 7
B.F. 0. Adjusted fa-:-
499.5 kc/s
499.5 "
499.5 " 499.5 " 499.5 'I
Resultant AF Output
7
AF Oscillator Frequency
500 kc/s + 2550 4 s
500 kc/s - 2550 cis
500 k c / s + 1000F/s
500 kc/s - 1000 4s 500 kc/s
3050 c/s,
2050 C/S
q500 c/s
500 c/s
500 C/S
3050 c/s
2050 c i s
1500 4 s
500. CIS 500 C/S
-4
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
Ill? Alignment
B.R.1617 CHAPTER 6
10. I n general, th is ensures: - (a) Ivhximwn voltage output from the RF section, q t i m u m selectivity, and
the correct bandviidth, over the frequency band covered by the receiver, by bringing a l l three tuned circuits into alignment. This is done by " t r i n ing" for m x h receiver output a t "trimming points" near the top and bottom of each waveband.
(b) Correct indication of frequency ( including calibration points) on the tuning dial, by ad justnent of the local osci l lator trinrmi1-g components. It is a lso necessary to ensure that the local oscillator is operating a t 500 kc/s ABOVE the frequency of tine incoming signal. - This is checked by set t ing both t e s t osci l lator aid receiver to a given frequency, then increasing the t e s t osci l lator frequency by 1 ~ii;c/;:.
The t e s t osci l lator signal is nm- 500 kc/s above the receiver l o c d oscil lator frequency, and thus 13roduces an IF signal vi-hich should be heard, although a t greatly reduced strength.
Test Equipment Required
1 I.
s Thesc items are required f o r CT212 Test Oscillator, ard are obtained from the A.P.60875/~ Box of Flexible connections fo r CT82 Noise Generzt or.
1
Test Eqpipment Description
Test Oscillator or Signal Generator covering 500 kc/s modulated 3@ a t 400 o r 40CO c i s
OuQut ifIet er
~ o r i e c t o r ' - - m - L
Adaptor I
Type
(3212 G73
CT218 Lhrconi
Decibel ivieter Portable No. 3 Output Meter of Noise Gene r a t or CT82. TE-'340
I
1,
~ d r n i r a l t y Pattern
ZD. 00784. V2508
1 OS/I 6780 5 4 7 0 ~ ~
ZD.00022
671 66
54708
6026.1
60865
Special Items
12. The follm-ing special i t e m w i l l be required: - Items No. 1 and 2, s h m i n para. 6 under "General Instructionsrf.
13. The d r i l l in Outline Steps
(1 ) Remove the receiver from its case, remove the side 1 -3 panel from the RF Stages, connect up the t e s t equipment, and snitch on. Allow t o warm through for 1 hour.
(2) Line up last IE' stage approxmtely.
(3) Adjust the b.f.0. roughly by the Test Oscillatim
(4) Alignment of b.f.0. ( ~ 4 0 / ~ )
Reference t o a l i m e n t of b. f. o. (&OD)
Line up accurately the l a s t IF stage
(6) Line-up the rehining IF stages
(7) Final rr touchzlpM
( 8 ) Complete instructions, with t e s t equipment list, and connect ions fo r alignment of &OD b. f. o.
--
Paras.
q5-19
T h ~ s sheet 1s5ued w ~ t h A L. No. I August 1956
B.F.O. COIL
F7
I F ALIGNMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
lST T R 104 I.F. TRANSFORMER
t . (ON FAR SIDE O F RECEIVER)
FOURTH I.F. TRANSFORMER m
THIRD 1.F TRANSFORMER TR 2 0 2
SECOND I.F. TRANSFORMER TR 2 0 1
B.R. 1617 Chaptcr 6
FIG. I
lST 1.F: TUNED CIRCUIT L 201
0. F. 0 . 3RD~.~. ,NO[ c BACK O F VALVE VALVE
I I RECEIVER V 2 0 6 V 2 0 3
ff
FRONT O F RECEiVER
NOTE:- I . PIN b MAY BE IDENTIFIED BY THE GREEN COVERED B.F.O. PITCH COILS WIRE CONNECTED TO IT.
2. I N THE CASE OF B 4 0 D , THE G R I D PIN IS PIN I. (SEE FIC.2 CHAPTER 6 )
* IN BIO/A, THE ITEM MARKED IS NOT FITTED. L 2 0 4 TR 201 IS FITTED I N THE POSITION SHOWN OCCUPIED
BY @ A N D L 2 0 1 I N THE PLACE SHOWN OCCUPIED BY T R 2 0 1 .
RECEIVER B40IAlBIC
F.S.K. WIDE LOW
TUNE
F.S.K. NARROW. LOW
F.S.K. NARROW ' HIGH
IST I.F. TRANSFORMER (ON FAR Sl,DE OF RECEIVER)
PIN I (3
B.F.O. COIL I.F. T'FORMER 3m I. F. T-*FORMER 2ND'1~. T'FORHER.
PIN I MAY BE IDENTIFIED BY THE GREEN COVERED WIRE CONNECTED TO IT.
3
FIG. 2 RECEIVER 0 4 0 0
L 202 T R 203 T R 2 0 2 X L 2 0 2 T R 201 - -
lST 1.F TUNED CIRCUIT
V 2 0 6 V 2 0 3 V 2 0 2 V 201 B.F. 0. VALVE 3 R o ~ . ~ . ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Z~OI.F.VALVE I~~J.F.VALVE
FRONT OF RKENER C W E C T I O N TO CONTROL GRID OF MIXER VALVE(VIO~)
+REMAINDER OF TURRET COlL ASSEMBLY
FIG. 3
.01 CAPACITOR
CROCODILE CLIPS FITTED
CONNECTOR
A.R 60465 -01 CAPACITOR ADAPTOR
TEST EQUIPMENT C O N N E C T I O N DIAGRAM FIG. 4
This Sheet i s sued wi th A.L. NO. 1 i l u g ~ s t 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 6
The D r i l l i n Detail
14.
STEP - I Remove the receiver from i ts case, and take off the side panel
covering part of the RF Unit. Connect t e s t equipment as shain, and allow equipment to u-;arm through for a t least 1 hour. NoBo The SYSTEDi switch should be t o C.Tf., so that the b.fmo. - vUl warm through.
( 1 ) Posit ion receiver controls as follmis : - ( 2) QTTI-CRL?SSG.;CG control fully GMCKiISE.
(3 ) CRYSTAL s~f i t ch t o "ON". There should be no crystal i n positian. This renders the local oscillator inoperative without al 'ceri i i the load on tlie h. t. line,
(5) OUTi-7JT switch ( a t back of receiver) toggle towards back of receiver.
(7) A.F. GAIN control fi l ly clochise. OSC. TRTivI t o zero, 1. em midway betmeen l i m i t s (B&OD only).
(8) GAm control f i l l y clocb-ise.
( 9 ) EUND switch t o BAND I , tuning d i a l to about 0.67 Lic/s.
I Band-width I Narrow I 3 kc/s I
Adjust the t e s t equipment as follol-cs : - Test osci l lator
( A ) Output about 0.1 volt, rizoduldtioli depth 3(& modulation -loco c/s.
(2) Output frequency 500 kc/s.
(3) Output connected via the 0.01 to the grid of the 3rd IF valve. (identify by P
(4) 0.01f8 capci tor . Connect between the - i d of the b. f. o. valve and hassis. (see Pig. 1). (B@/A o n l y r
(5) Output meter. Set t o 600 ohms input impedance and t o read 500 mYI.
STEP - ACTIGN
4 Adjust the trimming controls (screwed rods a t the top and bottom of the f i n 1 IF transformer (TR.ZOJ for maxim reading i n the output meter. Adjust the output of the Test Oscillator as necessary for a convenient output meter reading.
5 Switch off the t e s t oscillator modulation. Unclip the 0.01 capacitor betvreen the grid of the b.f.0. valve and chassis gO/A).
6 SYSTEM snitch t o CAL. Adjust the t e s t oscillator tuning for zero output meter reading a t zero beat, This ensures that the tes t oscillator is accurately tuned t o 500 kc/s.
7 SYSTBi s d t c h &O/A t o IvIANUAL (B~OB/C - t o TUNE). Adjust the t r h i n g control of b.f.o. coi l L202 for zero beat, indicated by zero reading i n the output meter.
8(a) B+O/A Receivers only
NOTE To prevent the a.g.c. system being bruught into aperation i n 8(a) ( I ) and (2) belmi, t he t e s t oscil lator output rust not exceed 100 mV.
(1) SYSTEM switch t o HIGH and the BANDt'?IM!H switch toNOTE FILTER. Adjust the b.f.0. co i l L.202 for maxinnun meput meter reading.
(2) SYSTEJiI snitch t o LO17J. Adjust the upper b.f.0. pitch co i l L203 fo r maxirrnzn output.
(3 ) SYSTEivi sxitch t o W W A L and the BANDXrlDTH s ~ i t c h t o NARRGVJ. Ad just the la-ier b. f. o. pitch coi l L. 204 for zero beat, i. e. for zero output meter reading.
(4) SYSTEM SWITCH to GAL. and check that the t e s t oscillator is s t i l l on frequency, i. e. zero cutput meter reading. I f not, readjust the t e s t oscillator, and repeat the d r i l l from 7 onviards.
8(b) - &OB/C Receivers only
NOTE - Due to the absence of the 1 kc/s f i l t e r (which i s f i t ted only i n &Q/A receivers) it is not possible t o use the selectivi ty of the f i l t e r as a means of obtaining a 1 kc/s note. It is therefore necessary t o modulate the 500 kc/s input a t 1000 cycles, and compare the pitch of the b.f.0. note iiith the pitch of the 1 kc/s modulation.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 4 November 1958 B.R. 16 17 CHAPTER 6
STEP -
( 4 ) SYSTElvI sviitch to HIGH. Test oscillator modulation t o 1000 CIS. N.B. If a CT212 t es t oscillator is not available, it w i l l be necessary t o inject iOOO 4s. from an AF oscillator such as G.205, a t the res is tor R223. (see detai ls given in Part 3 2ig. 13). The output level of the AJ? oscillator should be adJusted t o give a comfortably audible note i n the monitor loudspeaker. If a t e s t oscillator other than CT212 i s used, the RF output should be unmcdulated, and tuned t o 500 kc/s, checked against the BJO calibratcr.
( 2 ) Adjust L202 by means of the t r immer a t the top of the b.f. o. coi l can, un t i l the b.f.0. note obtained with the SYSTBI switch t o HIGH and t e s t oscil lator unmodulated corresponds 1-tith the b. f. o. note obtained ~ i i t h SYSTlZ&L s ~ d t c h to R/T and the t e s t oscillator modulated a t 1000 c/s.
(3) SYSTEU snitch t o m. Ad just the upper b. f. o. pitch coil UO5 un t i l there is no c-hange of note L-ihen the SYSTEL'I s~-itc:h i s se t t o HIGH.
(4) SYSTEM switch t o T W . &itch off modulation (or disconnect the AF oscillator). Adjust the l m e r pitch co i l L204 for zero reading i n the output mter.
N.B. The tuning is very f la t . - (5) SYSTEM switch to CAL. Check that the t e s t oscillator is
still onfrequency (zero beatwithCAL. signal). If not, .
correct the t e s t oscil lator frequency and repeat steps 8(b) ( l) t o ( 5 ) .
B40D receivers only
A s the d r i l l for the b. f. o. alignment of the &OD is long and coqlicated, it i s givea separately a f t e r th i s d r i l l (6.15 t o 19).
W/A SYSTl3Lhl switch t o MANUAL C l i p the 0.01 between the g i d of the b. f. o. valve and c b s sviitch t o R/T. Switch CN the t e s t oscil lator modulation.
AdJust the top aad bottom IF Trimmars of t h e fourth 33 transformer (TR. 203) for m x i m output meter reading. (see Fig,, 2 for component positions.)
Connect the t e s t oscillator output t o the grid of the 2nd IF valve. Adjust the top and bottom IF t r imners of the third IF transformer (TR. 202) for maxirmun output ineter reading.
Connect the tes t oscillator output to the grid of the j s t IF valve. Adjust the top sad bottom trimj-11ers of the second Il? transformer (TR. 201 ) for mxinaun ourtpt ineter reading.
Connect the t e s t oscillator to the grid of the mixer valve, i.e. t o the stationary tumet co i l contact as shmn in Zig. 3. Tune the f i r s t IF transformer ( ~ ~ 1 0 ~ 1 1 6 ) and the 1 s t IF tuned c i rcui t (L201) f o r mximum output meter reading.
SYSTDI switch t o C A L , snitch off t e s t osci l lator modulation, unclip capacitor f\mm b.f. o. gr id . Check that the t e s t oscillator i s s t i l l on frequency. If not, readjust the t e s t osci l lator and repeat the d r i l l Prom 12 m'ards.
SYSTEfl switch t o IvWUAL, svv-itch on t e s t osci l lator modulation, re-connect capacitm t o b. f. o. grid. Re-check adjustment of TRIO&, or TRII6 (&.OD), L201, TR201, TR202 and TR203 i n that order fo r mximurn output meter reading.
Disconnect t e s t oscillator and cutput meter. Unclip capacitor from grid of b.f.0. valve,
(step 8 ( c ) i n the IF' Aligment, Para. 14)
introduction
Unless ships are provided with an A 2 variable frequency oscillator, it w i l l not be possible Tor sea-going personnel t o al ign the b. f. 00
.its of the B&OD receiver, I f these c i rcui ts are ii1 need of alignment, assistance shwclld be sought i n the norrnal mnner frorn the depot ship or the doc3sJrard. For BWD Receivers used i n conjunction w i t h WA;C Recorders the nlterliztive I';c=qu~iiciss q u o t d ill t l ~ J;.ill zust be uscd. Such zdceivcins a7t= clearly labelled to indicate they are used f o r PAX.
16. For dockyards and those ships having access t o an AF oscillator; '
the procedure i s as follows: -
PL 2 0 2 PINS A 6 B
I - - - - I CROCODILE CLIPS TEST
OSCILLATOR C T 212
J r A.P. 60861 AP. 60865 ' ~ ~ P A C I T O R CONNECTOR ADAPTOR
B.F. 0. AL ICNM ENT (8 4 0 0) TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FIG. 5
This Sheet issued with A ,L. No. 4 November .I958 B,R.1617 CHAPTER 6
T es t Equipment re -red
1 7.
NOTE See a lso Fig. 2 fo r positions and i d e n t i t i e s of coqonents. - The D r i l l in Outline
18.
' Admiralty Test Equipment description W P e Pattern
Carry out the drill for 33 alignment wp to and including step (6).
Test Oscillator or Signal Generat o r covering 500 kc/s
Audio Frequency Oscillator covering 0-5000 cycles
Oscilloscope
OutL2ut l~ieter
STEP - 1
Connect the t e s t eqipment to the receiver,
Set up the FSK X D B HIGH position (or FAX).
Set up the FSIC ZIDE LOTI position ( o r FAX).
Set up the FSK NARROtiT HIGH position.
Set up the PSK NARROW posit ion.
CT212 CT218
ih rc oni
G205
Oscilloscope '
Type 13A
Decibel Meter Portable No. 3
93'340
S e t up the TUNE trii?mer.
Re -check the signal generator setting.
-78t I OS/ 1 6780 547w
v252
10~/83l
r
ZD00022
54708
Re-check a l l FSK settings an6 TUNE settin&.
/
T h e D r i l l i n Betail
1 9. STEP - ACT ION
Follow the procedure for IF aligmeilt up to and including Step 6.
ACTION STEP - 2 Make the follm-ing additional receiver and t e s t equipment
connect ions and ad jusiment s ( ~ i ~ . 5) : - ( I ) Audio oscillator. Ad just t o 500 c/s per second.
Output to XI and E of oscilloscope.
One side of output t o
A1 t o output meter
XI t o audio oscillator
GAL, markers - OFF
T r i g . sync, - E2.
Velocity range - Xxl
Y p la te selector - AlA2
Produce a "square" picture by suitable adjustment of oscilloscope A1 gain and audio oscillator gain.
(3) Receiver
A.G.C. t o ON
Loudspeaker snitch t o ON.
SYSTEli switch t o CAL.
(4) Si;nal generator
Adjust to a frequency several kc/s - below 500 kc/s. Connect c a p a c i t o r t o t h e g r i d o f t h e r n i x e r ~ l ~ e . Alignment" fo r connection identity.)
Increase the signal generator frequency s l m l y t o 499.5 kc/s. A n ellipse w i l l appear on the oscilloscope c. r. t.
Adjust the audio oscillator t o 3050 cycles (2,400 c / s fo r WAX).
Receiver SYSTEZZI swrtch t o FSK WIDE HIGH,
Adjust the b.f. o. co i l tuning slug ( ~ 2 0 2 ) un t i l an ellijjse is observed in the oscillosccpe c. r. t.
NOTE The frequency rewired i s 502.55 kc/s, not 496.45 kc/s - (501.9 kc/s not 497.1 kc/s f o r MUFAX). A check that the higher of the two frequencies i s tuned can be made by screwing the tuning slug out of the coil slightly; th i s increases the audio output f re cpency.
7 Audio oscil lator t o 2050 c/s (WPX - 34-00 c/s).
SYSTZLI switch t o FSK IJZDE IOW.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No 4 November 1958 B.R. 1617 CHAPTER 6
STEP - ACTION
8 Ad just the PSK ; lDE La-/ t r i i ~ s ~ e r ((3247) for an el l ipse i n the c. r. t. ( ~ 2 4 7 can be identified &on Fig. 2. ) Should two diprerent s e t t i w s of (324.7 produce ail ellipse, se t t o the tuning position vhere the trimming capacitor i s most ful ly meshed, i. e. grea t es t capacitance.
Audio oscillator to 1500 cycles.
SYSTal switch t o FSK IJARRG.' HIGH.
Adjust the FSK NABRGIT HIGH triminer ( ~ 2 4 3 ) for an ellipse i n the c.r. t. Should two different settings of C243 produce an ellipse, set the triiAuner t o the position of' leas t capacitance.
Audio oscillator t o 500 d s .
SYSTml switch t o FSK IVAWLOVI
Ad just the FSK iKRR0W mJ trii-mer (C245) for an el l ipse i n the c.r.t. I f there are tvro settings which produce an ellipse, use the setting where the trimmer has greatest capacitance.
SYSTEM switch'to TUNE.
A d j u s t TUNE trirmer (~239.) for an e l l ipse i n the c. r. t. If there are two settings which produce an ellipse, use the set t ing where the trinmwr has least capacitance.
Check frequency setting as follows:-
SYSTBd snitch t o CAL
Audio oscillator to 500 c i s
Signal generator t o 499.5 kc/s
An ellipse shculd be seen on the c. r. t. I f necessary vary the signal generator tuning sl ightly un t i l the el l ipse appears, but do NOT - tune t o 500.5 kc/s, a t I-ihich another ellipse v f i l l
appear,
Check that ap el l ipse appears i n the ca re t . vihen the follm-ing adjustments are see.
To complete the IF alignment return t o Step 9 i n parayaph 14.
RECEIVER SYSW SVITCH
FSK WIDE HIGH
PAX
FSK I lDE LOW
PAX
FSK NARHD~J HIGH t t " LOW
TUNE I
( &-OB/C/D only)
- AF OSCILLATOR OUTHJT
3050 c / s ; 50 c/s
24.00 " " 30 lr
2050 tt 'I 50
1400 tt v 30 w
,500 20
500 It It
500 " " 11 t i
NOTE This procedure does not apply t o the receivers &O/A which a re not f i t t e d with a crys ta l f i l t e r .
Test Equipment required
20,
r These items are required f o r CT212 Test Oscillator, and are obtained from the A.P. 60875 Box of Flexible Connections for CT82 Noise Generator.
r
Instrument
Signal Generator o r Test Osci l lator covering 500 kc/s
Meter reading 250 micro-amps P u l l scale deflection
Connector 3€
Adapt or 4.
I
T i t l e
CT212 CT218
~lia r~ oni. G73
H.R. Avorneter 8s or 8 S X
Microamme t e r
(L)
..
Admiralty Pat tern
moo784 1 OS/I 6780 54706~ W. 2508
12945
541 48
60861
60865
This Sheet issued with A,L. NO. 1 August 1956 B,R.1617 CHAPTER 6
Special Items
21, The following special items are rewired:-
Items 1 and 3 s h m i n para. 6 under "Geneml Instructions".
NOTE The IF stages must be accurately aligned before tile crystal f i l t e r is aligned.
The d r i l l i n Outline - 22.
Remwe receiver from case, Connect up t e s t e quipine nt . St-{itch one
Set crystal filter frequency exactly i n centre of IF passband i.ee t o 500 kc/s.
Obtain adjustments, and mrk the t e s t oscillator incremental tuning control a t two points, one I kc/s above and one 1 kc/s belm;, *the centre frequency of 500 kc/s.
Obtain smooth crystal f i l t e r response curve, synmetrical and with sharp cut-off.
Final "touch-up".
NOTE:- REFER TO FlGS.1-4 FOR FURTHER CONNECTION DETAILS.
FIG. 6(a) TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION. DIAGRAM
CRYSTAL FILTER ALIGNMENT
OUTPUT
H R AVOMETER No.8
CROCODILE CLIPS
TEST '
A P 60861 OSCl LLATOR CONNECTOR TO GRID
SWITCH TOP LEFT
B 4 0
RECEIVER
840
L L I I
AUDIO FREQ. OUTPUT PLUG. 2011 2
CT 212 OF M'XER VALVE
CAPACITOR
FIG. 6(b)
/
0 ---o A P 60865 ADAPTOR
The D r i l l in Detail
23 STEP - ACTION
Bith the receiver cut of i t s case and the side panel removed, st?iitc21 on the receiver and t e s t oscillator and allox 15 minutes t o warm through.
Receiver controls as f ol la-s: - CRYSTAL switch t o a, vtith crystal removed.
Tune t o 0.67 1*1c/s.
Output sv6tch at the back of the receiver, toggle tmards front of receiver.
A, G.C. sv;itch t o OFF,
A.F. GAW control filly c loch i se (RV. 224)
GAIN control ful ly c~ockwise (KV. j05/309)
iionator L.S. myi tch t o "aN't
Adjust the t e s t equipment as follai-s:-
(1) Test o s c i l l a t o r
h t p u t not exceeding 50 microvolts,
Output frequency 500 kc/s
Output connected via A. P. 60861 connect or, A. I?. 60865 adapt or, and a 0.01 @? capacitor t o the grid of the mixer valve, ii;. e. t o the stationary turret co i l contact a s shm-n i n Fig. (3) under IF alignment.
(2) Avometer. Connect t o the made-up lead, (6.6 Item 3 j r i t h the plug inserted i n SKZO3 and the other end joined t o the Avometer, central conductor of the coaxial cable to ilegative of Avometer.
N,B. This enables second detactor current t o be read on the - Avometer.
Set the Avometer to read d. c. rnicroamps, 2 5 0 p raWe.
Thls Sheet issued with hoLo No. 1 August 1956
Test oscillator - note reading on incremental scale. Tune t o 500 kc/s and adjust for zero beat as heard i n receiver telephones.
SYSTEM ssviitch to R/T. Adjust C242 a t the top o-f the crystal f i l t e r can ( shmn in Fig. 1 under LF alignment) for maxinnun reading i n the Avometer. The oscillator output s h ~ u l d be adjusted to give an Avomet e r reading of approxirxately 60 micro-amps.
SYSTEM s ~ i i t c l ~ to CAL. Check that t e s t oscil lator is s t i l l on 500 kc/s (zero beat note, using +elephoiies fo r greater accuracy. )
SYSTEM svitch to B/T. Test oscil lator from c . ~ . output t o 1000 c/s modulation output. Listen t o the 1000 c/s note.
SYSTELi SluiITCK t o TUNE. Test oscillator t o caw. By raeans of the incrernen-hl tuning control on the t e s t oscillator, slmily increase the freqyency of the t e s t oscillator. A low pitched note, due to the action of the b. f. o., u i l l be heard.
Increase the tes t oscillator frequency s t i l l further un t i l the b. f. o. beat note is equal i n pitch t o tile 1 k d s mcdula tion. idark the incremental tuning control to indicate the setting a t wnich t h i s occurs.
Rotate the kcremental tuning. control back t o i t s 500 kc/s position, then slot'v'ly decrease the t e s t oscillator frequency uiitil the b. 9. o. beat note and the modulation note are equal in pitch. Mark the incremental tuning control t o indicate the setting a t I-ihich this occurs.
T h e incrernental tuning control \ - t i l l nm- be marked a t two points, one 1 kc/s above and the other 1 kc/s belmi the 500 kc/s position.
Tsst oscil lator to C.W. output, incremental scale t o zero. Receiver SYSTBvI switch to CAL. Check that t e s t oscil lator i s s t i l l a t 500 kc/s. I f not, repeat the d r i l l f r o i ~ step 6 on~~ards.
SYSTD!I sriitch t o R/T. Set the incremental tuning control t o the rmrk 1 kc/s above 500 kc/s. Carefully increase the t e s t oscil lator output so that 40 rilicroamps is indicated i n the Avometer. Ad just C240 ( s i d e of crystal f i l t e r can) for minimum reading i n the Avme t er.
Slo~ily sweep the incremental tuning control betmen the t ~ o narks, above and belm the centre frequency, a t the same time noting the manner i n vihich the reading i n the Avometer indicates the response curve of the crystal filter. The current reading i n the Avometer shculd f olloa- the curve shm-n overleaf.
- I kcla 1 ZERO + I kc11
INCIMEMAL TUNING
RESPONSE - CRYSTAL FILTER FIG. 7
STEP - ACT ICIN
13 iiiake very s m a l l adjustments t o C240, i f necessary, to obtain sharp cut-off with symmetrical response,
44 SYSTBYI switch to GAL., mlce a f ina l check that the t e s t oscillator i s a t 500 kc/s.
AUERNATIVE ME3THOD OF CRYSTAL FIUE8 ALIGN.EPJT
Introduction
24. It has been found that a more positive result i n crystal f i l t e r alignment can be achieved by the use of a ganging oscillator and a
cathode ray oscilloscope.
25. Since th is t es t equipment i s not universally available, the rxethcd of alignment already described i s considered to be the standard method.
For the benefit of dockyards and ships which my possess the necessary ecpipment, hckiever, the alternative r;tc t hod, using a ganging oscillator, is described helm.
26. Crystal f i l t e r alignrcent should not be undertaken unless the IF stages are correctly aligned,
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 6
T es t Equipme n t Required
i lAINING If the sEeep r a t e of the ganging osc i l la tor i s higher than approximately I 0 cycles, the c rys ta l f i l t e r resgonse curve picture w i l l be distorted due t o "r i~&ing" in the hizh-Q crystal fi lJcer circuit.
+
Test Equipment aescript ion
Ganging Oscillator covering 500 kc/s, sweep speed dmcn t o 5 c i s i f possible
Cathode Ray Oscilloscape, v j i t h amplifier l inear d m t o 5 c/s i f possible
Conversely, i f the sweep r a t e is mucn laver than 10 cycles, the crystal f i l t e r response curve picture may be distorted due t o non-linearity of the c.r. t. amplifier.
These points lmst be remembered during alignment
Type
Cossor Nodel 343
q3.A Cossor
The d r i l l i n Outline
Adroiralty 1 Pat tern
54707
1 0~/83 1 T3336A
28. Comect up, se t up and ST-iitch on t e s t equipment and receiver,
i
Tune ganging osci l la tor u n t i l a response curve is seen on the c, r. o.
AdJust the t r h i n g controls u n t i l the required shape of response curve is obtained.
STEPS
The c~nnec t ion t o the raixer grid can be identified by reference t o Fig. 3 under IF Alignment. The connections sham are used I-iith the Cossor Ganging Oscillator and Oscilloscope I jA.
NOTE:- CONNECTIONS USED WITH COSSOR GANGING OSCILLATOR & 13A OSCILLOSCOPE.
FIG. 8 TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
CRYSTAL FILTER ALIGNMENT (ALTERNATIVE METHOD)
RIGHT HAND SIDE OF RECEIVER (I.F. SIDE)
GREEN 'BLACK LEAD LEAD %
EARTH TO Al TERMINAL ON C R O
CONNECTION TO RECEIVER FROM C RO
FIG. 9
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 19.56 B.R. 16 17 CHAPTER 6
T h e D r i l l i n Detail
29. STEP ACTION
I Remove the receiver from i t s case. Remove the RF U n i t side- panel.
2 Position the controls on the receiver a s fo1lms:-
(1) CRYSTAL switch to "CN", with crystal reliloved.
(3) SYSTEIiI mitch t o R/T. '
(4) >7AVEEWJD switch to BAND 1, tuning d i a l t o about 0.67 Lic/s.
(5) Output switch a t back of receiver, tmards front of receiver.
(6) A.G. C. suiitch t o OFF.
(7) L~~YIPTER switch t o OE'F.
(8) A.F. GAIN control fully c l o c ~ i s e (RV. 224).
(9) GAIN control filly clockwise ( ~ ~ . 3 0 5 / 3 0 9 ) *
(10) Monitor L.S. =-itch t o "OJ?F".
3 Frequency swept oscil lator controls as f ollars: - ( ~ o s s o r G a n g i n g Oscillator for example)
( 1 ) I\Iodula tion control t o frequency rncdula tion.
(2) Adjust frequency to 500 kc/s approximately.
(3) Bandvridth switch to 20 kc/s.
Cathode ray oscilloscope controls as follows : - ( ~ c e I j A Oscilloscope for example - important controls only are mentioned. )
(1 ) T r i g . sym. - external.
( 2 ) Velocity range - -10 CIS.
(3) Fine velocity - as l a p i as convenient (not more than 10 sTTeeps per sec. )
(4) Probe selector to OFF.
( 5 ) Y plate selector to AIA2.
(6) CAL. markers to OFF.
ACTION STEP - 5
6
Sviitch on egpipment and allow to r.iarm through.
Rotate the ganging oscillator tuning d i a l un t i l the response curve i s seen i n the oscilloscope. If the IF stages have been accurately aligned, the peak of the curve w i l l be a t 500 kc/s. As it has been aligned against i ts mi1 crystal, the IF calibraticn w i l l probably be more accurate than the calibration of the frequency scale on the ganging oscillator, The l a t t e r should therefore be d isregard ed ,
The shape of the response curve should be as sham in (a) Pig. 10.
I;F.RESPONSE CURVES FIG. 10
NOTE I f the ganging oscil lator has a bandffidth control, the - width of the curve can be adjusted.
On switching the receiver IUNm~IDTH control to KIDE ( or 8 kc/s), the curve should resemble (b) above.
I f the curves are distorted, then the IF stages need ad justnent, and the complete IF alignment should be carried out,
Receiver BW%nI%CH switch t o 1 kc/s. I f possible reduce the Ganging oscil lator BANIWIDTH to 10 kds.
The response curve obtained w i l l depend upon the crystal f i l t e r s e t t i ~ s . One of the fallo~iing curves should be seen,
Thls Sheet ismed with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R. 1617 CHAPTER 6
STEP
1
(b)
FIG. I I
Adjustment of the "topff t r h e r will normally produce a picture similar t o Fig. I l ( b ) or (c), and further adjustment should be made t o obtain equal pealcs of maximum possible height,
Adjustment of the sidetf t r h e r has the effect of l i f t i , ~ the central ho l lm i n sketch Fig. 11 (b), or of reducin;: the h-o side peaks i n Fig. 11 (c).
Adjustment should continue un t i l a curve similar t o Fig. 12(d) belm is achieved.
FIG. 12
STEP - On switching receiver BANDl7IM'Ii sn-itch between 1 kc/s and 3 kc/s, the two curves Fig. 12 ( d l and (e) should appear i n turn. It viill be observea that the bandwidth of the 1 kc/s curve i s a,proxirnately half the bandwidth of the 3 kc/s curve a t half maximum amplitude, i.e, 6 dB dorm from max:'Llrtn.
NOTE The IF Unit of the receiver rmst be correctly aligned before 1ZF - alignment i s cmenced.
Test Equipment required
NOTES 4 . This connector i s supplied i n the "Box of Flexible - Connectors for A. P. 671 66 Noise Generators", and is required for CT212 and CT218,
Test Equipment Description
Test Oscillator or Signal Generator covering 600 kc/s t o 30 ~ c / s
Meter reading approx. 250 microamps
Connector - See f?ote I C
2. If the signal generator or tes t oscillator w i l l not cover the higher frequency end of the frequency band, the second harmonic should be used.
3. The high resistance Avorneter (Model 8) i s used as a tuning indicator, reading second detector current. Alternatively, the CT82 Output Meter, or Decibel iieter Portable No. 3, m y be used as an indicator, reading AP output pmer. The former method i s preferred.
Type
CT212 CT218
Marconi G73
H. R. Avometer 85 or rn
Microammet e r
4. Special items No. 3 and No. 4 w i l l be rewired. (see para. 6 under General Instructions. )
. Admiralty
Pattern No.
m0784 I OS/I 6780 5 4 7 0 ~ 7iT2508
1294-5
54148 I
i .) 64960
This Sheet issued with A,L, No, 1 August 1956
The D r i l l in Outline -
Rernove receiver &om case, Connect up t e s t equipment, h i t c h on.
Turn the tuning control t o i t s lam--frequency l i m i t , and s e t the cursor t o l ine up w i t h the end of the scale. Adjust the loca l osc i l la tor trimmers so that; the tuning scale freqyency agrees with the t e s t oscilla'cor frequency a t the two alignment points marked +.
Bring the RF c i rcu i t s i n t o alignment on a l l frequency bands.
Check tha t the cal ibrat ion zerot is accurately aligned t o the cal ibrat ion mrk on the scale.
STEPS - 1-4
=C 132 a C I 0 9
B 4 0 D C143 B 4 0 D C 107
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT MIXER GRID CIRCUIT zND R.F. GRID lST R.F. GRID CIRCUIT C IRCUrt
DETAILS OF R.E COIL ASSEMBLY
FIG. 13
AERIAL INPUT SOCKET
FOR POSITION OF SK203, SEE FIG.6b SK UNDER 'CRYSTAL FILTER ALIGNMENT'
I I H.R. AVOMETE R
A.P. 64960 TO CONNECT TO MK 4 SOCKE
FIG. 14do)
I.F. ATTENUATOR
H I 1 I fl CROCODILE
I 6 8 n CROCODILE
CLlP FITTED -01 CLIP FITTED CAPACITOR RESISTOR
The D r i l l i n Detail
32. STEP -
FIG. 14(bl TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
RF ALIGNMENT
Remove receiver frorn i ts case and remove the side panel. s f i t c h on receiver and tes t oscillator and allovi equipment t o viarm through f o r 30 mi~mtes.
Receiver controls as Zollovi~s : - (1) AN'PI-CIIOSS LOD. Control fully clock-rise.
(3) A.P. GAIN control fully clockvu'ise (RV. 224).
(4) GAIN control f i l l y cloch-ise ( ~ ~ ~ 3 0 5 / 3 0 9 )
(5) L.S. switch to ON.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
STEP I
B,R, 1617 CHAPTER 6
ACTION
(6) Ui.iITER switch t o OFF.
(7) Output switch (a t back of receiver) tmard front of receiver, (unless an output meter is connected across pins A and 3 of 6-pin output plug j .
(9 ) TjJAV3BAND snitch t o BAM) 1.
?
CONTROL
BALmIImK Sk:ITCM[
SYSTEbI SLrITCH
A, Go Co STKiTCH
NOTE The explanation ill be given i n terms of th i s Band. - (10) TUIVING control fu l ly anti-c1och;ise. Set the cursor frame
so that the pointers l ine up v~it l i the l o ~ ~ f r e q q e n c y end of the scales. h he cursor must remain i n t h i s posi t ion throughwt the alignment.) Tune t o 1.52 lic/s. i.e. the a l igment position indicated by a + 011 Band 1.
WO/A
NARROV
ii,iANJA L
Reduce the sens i t iv i ty of the receiver IF amplifier by connecting the IF atternator, i.e. the 0.01 capacitor and 68 ohm res i s to r i n ser ies (1tem 4 para. 63 G ~ i e e n the grid of the 2nd IF amplifier ( ~ 2 0 2 ) and earth. (see Fig. 1 under "IF Aligment" f o r valve pin numbers and 2ig. 14(b) de ta i l s of attenuator. j This reduces IF voltage by abmt 40 dB.
I
B~OB/C/D
3 kc/s
TUNE
Test oscillator. Ad just to : -
.li OFF
Tune t o 1.52 i,ic/s.
Output - approx. 100 i i l i c~vo l t s . If stages are badly misaligned, a la rger ou twt wil l be necessary.
Coxi~ect mtput to receiver a e r i a l socket.
Ad2ust the local osc i l la tor trimin;; capacitor ( ~ 1 3 2 , WD-CIL;~) fo r zero beat ilote i n the telephones. (see Fig. 43 fo r trifix-ner identifica tionj. Increasing the output level of the 'iest osc i l la tor as necessary, check tha t a beat note can be hesrd in the receiver loudsneaker vi'nen the t e s t osc i l la tor tuning is varied around a s e t t i & 1 ik/s GRUTER than i ts origiaal setting, i.e. f o r BAND 1, 2.52 lic/s. Check tha t a beat note cannot be lieard when -;he t e s t osc i l la tor i s varied around a se t t ing 1 ak/s LOT:m t'mn its original setting.
STEP - ACTION
Tune the receiver and the t e s t oscillator to 0.67 i&/s. AGJust the local oscil lator inductance t r i n ~ l i ~ r fo r zero beat i n monitor L.S. or telephones,
Reg~eat steps (41, (5) and ( 6 j un t i l further trimming i s unnecessary.
(a) - W/A - Stop the b.f.0. oscillating by connecting a 0.01 capacitor betvieen the grid of the b. f. 0, valve and earth. g r i d of the b. f. o. valve can be ideat ified from Big, 1 under "IF Alignmentff . )
(b) B&oE/c/D - SYSTBil mi-itch to 9 / ~ .
Adjust AVOT@TER t o read doc, microamps a t a convenient level when plugged i n t o SK.203, ( o r cutput meter t o 6 pin plug) as i n Fig. 14(a).
If using an output meter as a tuning indicator, mi tch on t e s t oscillator modulation, a t 400 or 1000 cycles (30;; depth i f variable). The t e s t oscillator should rerrain on COW. i f using a secoad detector current indicator, I n both cases h i e t o 1.52 i:ic/s.
Ad just the R.3' c ircuit capacity trimners C122, C113 and CIOY ( i n that order) &OD; C166, C130, ~ 1 0 7 ) for rnaxirnun reading i n the Avometer or a t p u t meter i f being used).
Set the t e s t oscillator to 0.67 I~C/S and tune the receiver accurately t o it, Adjust the RF c i rcui ts inductance t r h e r s i n TR103, TRIO2 and TRIO1 ( ~ ~ 1 1 1 , Pi106 and TRIO1 i n ~ 4 . 0 ~ ) ( i n that order) for maxinaun reading i n the Avometer or output meter.
Repeat steps (11) and (12) un t i l no further appreciable improvement i n outmt can be obtained, the f ina l adjustments being r ~ a d e a.t 1.52 i:ic/s.
Repeat th i s procedure on the remaining frequency bands of the receiver, trirrning a t the high f'requency end of the band with the capacitor tririzmers and a t the lox frecpency end of the bandkith the inductance trilmrs, a t the trirmning points indicated by a +. The follming table indicates the t r h i n g frequencies.
'I HIGH FREQUENCY
1.52 hic/s
3.8 idc/s
9.2 Nc/s L
I I 7.4 i\ic/ s
23 i@c/s I
BAND
1
2
3
WI ? i B Z Q m C Y
0.67 &/s
1.66 &c/s
4.1 1 I,C/S
4 I 9.8 ir4Js
I 5 ! 18 MC/S
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
ACTIGN
B.R.1617 CHAPTER 6
Disconnect the tes t osciliator, the Avometer, and the IF attenuator from the receiver BW/A, remove the b. 2 . om g r i d - shorting capacitor.
SYSTBG s ~ d t c h to CAL, Check that the calibration "spots" on the tuning d ia l coincide 1-tith the zero beat position of the calibrating signal. Providing the zero beat applicable to the calibration spots nearest the tracking points l i e within the limits given belox, calibration i s satisfactory. I f not, the k o local oscillator trimming controls for the waveband i n question should be readjusted to l i e I-iithin the l i m i t s . This v v - i l l also entai l re-alignment of the waveband i n question.
Overall Method of A l i g n r n e t
r i ; J A m I
5
4 r
3
2
I 1
3 3. It bas been assumed that RF alignment is sufficiently accurate, before comraencing realignment, to permit a signal to be fed through
the receiver from the aer ia l terminal, This w i l l normalu be the case i n ships,
Should th is not be so, the following overall method should be follavred, using the principles already given,
LO\: ElEQKEHcY END
17.9 - 18.1 i/ic/s
9.95 - 10.05 Xe/s
3.98 --4.02 1,lc/s
1.99 - 2.01 IVIC/S
0.995 - 1.005 i.ic/s
(I) Connect t es t oscil lator t o g r i d of mixer (see Fig. 13) roughly al ign the h-o t r i r m ~ i e r s i n the mixer grid circuit for mximum second detector or cutput meter indication,
IiiGH FREQKENCY END
28.65 - 29.15 i;c/s
17.4 - 17.6 bic/s
I 8.95 - 9.05 MC/S
A
3.98 - 4.02 &/s
1.49 -1.51 I\~C/S
(2) Connect t es t oscillator t o grid of 2nd RF amplifier valve. R m g w align the tvio trimmers i n the second RF amplifier grid circuit.
(3) Connect t es t oscil lator t o aerial. Roughly al ign the two trirlxners in the 1s t RF arq l i f i e r grid circuit,
Carry out complete RF aligrnnent as given i n Steps (I) to (~6).
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R. 1617 CHAPTER 7
P E R F O R l ' , i A N C E T E S T S ---_----------------------------- ---------------------------------
CONTENTS LIST
Arrangement and layout of information Precautions t o be used i n connecting up t e s t equipment Test Equipment t o be used Connector Detai ls
SWV-IARY OF THE TESTS AND THEIR OBJECT
PART A
Noise Factor Test using Noise Generator CT82 Overall Sens i t iv i ty Test using Noise Generator CT82 Deductions t o be drav-in frora CTS2 readings Valve electrode potentials
Signal + noise/noise r a t i o and overall s ens i t iv i ty Overall audio frequency response Output levels Image re jec t ion A. G. C. performance Anti-Cros s -i<iodula t ion Crystal controlled operation Noise l imi ter act ion AF gain IF response IF gain IF stage gain Rrl gain
PART A
PmORiliANCE TESTS PRDiARIU FOR TEE USE OF SHIPS
NOISE FACTOR ;,msm.~zNT
Test equipment required The Drill
SENSITIVITY iLEASUmmT USING CT82 NOISE GENERATOR
The D r z l l Acceptance level of perf ormnce
ESTOMTION OF 31iBPOKi.lANCE:
Para.
Diagnosis of the cause of poor noise factor Diagnosis of the cause of poor sens i t iv i ty
VALVE ELFICTRODE POTENTIALS B~o/A/B/c
Test equipment t o be used Valve electrcde potent ials
LOCAL OSCILLATOR OUTEUT - VALVE ELECTRODE POTENTLAIS B40D
PART B
P E R F O ~ C E TESTS J;IORE SUITABLE FOR USE IN DEPOT SHIPS AND
SIGNAL + NOISE/NOISE RATIO AND CJvICRAU SENSITIVITY
Test equipment required Test rewirement The D r i l l
O V m U A U D I O - ~ ~ i i Q U ~ C Y RESPONSE
T e st e quipinent re qui red Test r e quirement The D r l l l
T e s t equipment required Test requirement The D r i l l
DTAGE RE3ECT ION - Test equipment required Test requirement The D r i l l
Test equipment required Test requirement The D r i l l
Test equipnent required Test requiremizt The D y i l l
This sheet issued wf th A.L. No. 1 August 1956
Para.
CRYSTAL COMTROr;r;E73 OPERATI~T
Test equipment required Test r e quirefi~ent The D r i l l
NOISE I;ESiIITER ACTION
Test equipment required Test requirement The D r i l l
Test equigment required Test requirement The Drill
Ii? RZSPONSE Lethod using S i ~ n a l Generator, A.3' Osci l la tor and Output Ueter
Test equipment required Test requirement The D r i l l
IF RESPONSE ilethod using Frequency Srept O s c i l l a t o r and -- Oscilloscope
Test equipment Tequired The Drill
T es t e g u i ~ e i l t re quired Test requirement The D r i l l
PART 2. IF STAGE GAIN - Test requirement The D r i l l
Test equipriient required Test requirement The D r i l l
Circuit. kt-ceimator, Des. 38, A.P. 63693
TELT X.-:-:UIR.ZiJT DUGRATiS --
Noise Pact o r and Sensi t ivi ty Iieasurement s
Si;;ml + Noise/l~oise Ratio and Overall Selzs i t i v i t y
Overall Au6io Frequency iiesponse
O u t ~ u t Levels
I ~ a g e Reject ion
A, G. C. l e r fo r~~ance
Anti-Cross-Iiodulat ion
Crystal Controlled Operation
Noise Lir~i-cer Action
AF G-ain
IF Response t-iith Siglaal Generator
IF Response t-iith Frequency Sl-tept Oscillator
Fig.
i
Response Curves
TEST EG.'UiII-?.i&l\~T DiAGRAi,S - - - --
i3' Gain (overall)
F S t a ~ e Gain
RE' Gain
This Sheet issued with A.L. N O . 1 August 1956
C H A P T E R 7 ----------------- --------I--------
Arrangement and layout of the infomation
4 . The performnce of a receiver needs to be checked:-
(a) A s an a i d t o diagnosis d u r i n g faul t location.
(b) To determine p~hethsr the receiver is s t i l l working within satisfactory limits.
(c) By the Dockyard, following extensive repair, so a s t o ensure that the receiver meets the fill Test Specification.
2. The t e s t s i n (a) and (b) above, entai l the use of simple t e s t equipment m-hich is found i n most ships. They have been grouped together i n
Part A, which is therefore p r i m r i l y f o r the use of ships. Part B contains the t e s t s applicable t o ( c ) above. These t e s t s ell seldan be carried out in ships, which w i l l i n aqy case not alnays possess the necessary t e s t equipment or faci l i t ies . The information i n Part B is theref ore principally fo r the benefit of dockpards and depot ships, but other ships may xmke use of the infornation xhen necessary.
The t e s t s are designed t o ensure that the. overall performance of the receiver is satisfactmy, and that the special f a c i l i t i e s afforded by the receiver are functioning correctly. In addition to the overall tes t s , there are individual t e s t s for the RF, IF and AF sections. Individual stage gains m y also be checked. These section checks are necessary when the overall sensi t ivi ty i s below the specified figure.
The tes ts have been arranged so that overall tes t s are carried out first. ~ h n c t i o m l tes ts of special c i rcui t s are given next. The l a s t g a p , which my be loosely termed fault-finding checks, should be necessary on* i f the w e r a l l test,s are unsatisfactory,
Precautions t o be observed in connecting-up t e s t equipment
3. Receiver and t e s t equipment must be connected t o a common earth.
4. A l l collnecting leads mst be as short as possible. Screened leads, iFi-ith the screen connected t o a c m o n earth must be used f o r a l l connectors
carrying current at radio frequencies.
5. The receiver and associated t e s t equipment must be stitched on and allmied t o warm up for a t leas t one hour, before a t e s t i s carried cu t , i n the
case of BWD, the receiver should be snitched on a t least 6 hours before the b.f. 0. test . (see Handbook f o r RATT ~ . ~ . 2 1 3 3 ) . The SYSTEM switch should not be left i n t h e R/T p o s i t i o n , o t h e r w i s e t h e b.f.0. v a l v e will not warm up with the r e s t of' the receiver.
6. I11 setting-up the t e s t rig, only those controls whose s e t t i q is important a re mentioned. The reminder m y be ignored,
corre
%en feeding in 2F a t the 1 m impedance a e r i a l input or" the receiver, t he s ignal generator mst be co,mecteci by means of a screened lead of the
c t iratching impedance, and (in t he case of A.P. 54704 Sig. Gen. ) a sui table attenuator. Sgecific d e t a i l s w i l l be kiven i n the instructions fo r each perf orimnce measurement concerned. Tihere signal generator output voltages t o the receiver a re quoted, they re fe r t o tLle figures actual ly s e t up on the signa 1 generat or a t t enua t or.
T e s t Equipment to be used
8. S igizal Generator CT218 xi11 replace A.P. 54704/~ Sigilal Generator f o r use ~ ~ 5 t h B U receivers. I n the ii~eantime, the U t t e r should be used.
The instructions have been framed t o cover tlze use of e i the r of these instruments, although any signal genera t o r of sui table accuracy which provides the required f a c i l i t i e s , may be employed. The necessity fo r correct matching of the s ignal generator output, the connecting lead, and the receiver input mst be remembered. If t h i s is not carried out, the value of the voltage a t the receiver input n i l 1 be uncertain.
9. Since the modulation f r e uencies of the b-o siglral generators i n question 9 a r e i20t the same, 1000 c/ s has been specified fo r CT218, and 400 c/s f o r A. P. 54704/~. This difference i n modulation frequency should make no s igni f icant difference t o the figures achieved f o r the t e s t i n westion. The difference in fac t amounts t o a l i t t l e over I dB. Other t e s t equipment specified is C.N.R.T.E., normally supplied t o the ships or dockyards concerned.
Conrlec t o r de ta i l s
10. The f oll~vi-ing connectors are designed t o conform vvith the alignment and t e s t ing requirements fo r the B&0 and B41 Receivers, hen us- ~.~.54704/~
Sig ia l Generator.
Connect or I i l ~ u t
11. This connector comprises two items; an attenuator and a connector. The attenuator plugs d i rec t ly into the Signal Generator A.Y. 547Q4/., output
ai?d is joined t o the receiver input by the connector.
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT SIGNAL GENERATOR O U T W T
LOAD (RECEIVER INPUT)
ATTENUATOR A.P. 63693 FIG. I
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 19% B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7
A t t e r n t o r Unit, Design 38, 20 dB, 10 ohm ingut, 92 ohm load AmPo 63693
12. The at tenlator is housed in a small metal screening box containing two resis tars R l and in series, ~ i t h res is tor R2 connected from the centre
point to earth. The box is f i t t ed with two connector terminations, one (SKI) t o f i t the output of the Signal Generator (A.P. 54704/A), whilst the other ( s K ~ ) is an A.P. 62151 connector. The attenuator is designed, so that when used mith Signal Generator A.P. %704/A, ( cutput voltage V l ) and worldng into a nominal 92 ohm load represented by the receiver input, the ~ l t a g e V2 across th i s load
v1 1 is giv* = - or 20 dB voltage ratio.
10
Connector Flexible Screened, 3 f t long A.P. 63691
13. This i s u s e d toconnect t h e a t t e n u a t o r t o t h e receiver. I t c o q r i s e s a suitable length of Uniradio No. 31 cable (A.P. 13831), a
characteristic imCpedance of 92 ohms. This cable is f i t ted a t one end with a plug (~.~.62150); the other end terminates with a 4 pin ldk. .4 socket (~.~.560110) t o f i t into the aer ia l plug on the receiver ( ~ ~ 1 0 1 ) . The cable connector is connected t o Pin "C"; Pins "11' and "B1' are connected together and Pin 'ID" is l e f t unconnected,
Connector IF ( ~ ~ ~ ~ 6 3 6 9 2 ) - 14, Comprises a suitable length of Uniradio No. 31 cable (A.P. 13831) ; f i t t ed a t
one end with ~ . ~ , 6 2 1 5 0 plug t o f i t into the A.P.63693 Attenuator output. The other end terminates in a 0.01F capacitor screened by a small piece of brass tube which is sweated t o the cable screen. Two short flexible insulated leads, each about thme inches long and terminating i n a "crocodile" clip, are connected t o capacitor and screen respectively. A rubber cover i s f i t t ed over the brass screening tube. The corrnector is primarily used for feeding signals into the IF anqplifier, although i n one case it is used for taking RF measurements.
NOTE:- I f these special connectors are not available, they should be made up, - 15. liihen .using Signal Gensrator CT248, a l l lmds for connect ion beb-een the
1 generator and the receiver ( i f not supplied with the signal g e n e m t z r may be found i n the "Box of Flexible Connectors f o r Pattern 67166 Noise Generator CT82",
16. . The cutput connector employed f o r the t e s t s given in Section "B", consists , of a 6 Pin Mark 4 socket ( ~ r e e termination) and a txisted pair of different
coloured wires (flex, or P.V.C. insulated), m e end of which is connected t o Fins A and B of the socket. Pattern numbers fo r a l l the i t e m t o assenble the socket are given i n Chpte r 8 Para. 18, th i s chapter a lso de ta i l s apprwed rmthcds of assenibling the socket with the leads, and soldering t o the pins. The leads should be abmt four feet long, with the free ends connected to spade terminals, o r crocodile clips. I n use, the wire from Pin A must be connected t o the earth terminal of the output meter. I n earlyreceivers n i t h a 'VJ' type output outlet plug the corresponding item rmst be used instead of the Jllark 4 socket. (see also Chap. 6, Para. 6, Item 2).
17. Other special items and leads of a minor nature, are specified i n the instructions for the t e s t concerned.
S ~ . D W Ql? THl3 TESTS, AND THEIR OBTECT
Noise Factor Test using Noise Generator CT82
18. T h i s t e s t determineswhether o r n o t theamount of noisewhich isproduced ~ i t h i n the receiver (as *posed to atmospheric noise pickpd up i n the
aer ial) is within the prescribed limits.
Noise Output Test using Noise Generator CT82
19. Having established that the a m w t of noise being generated i n the receiver i s normal, the output due t o the amplificatim of that noise
by the receiver can be measured. Tests have eatablished the cutput which can be eqected from a receiver whose perfonnance sa t i s f ies the Test Specification for overall gain. ( see a l s o Para.37, s t e p 6 f o r Noise ~ a i n ) . This standard of per- formance i s bound t o f a l l o f f during serv ice , and a lower l i m i t of acceptable performance has therefore been fixed, NOTE: - A s an " i n s i tu" t e s t t o establish that a receiver is s t i l l performing -
satisfactorily, it is norrrally only necessary t o carry out a Noise Factor and noise output check a t the centre of' each wave-band.
A s a check on performance a f t e r alignment, the t e s t s should be carried out a t the Hi? a d IF end of each band, i n add i t im t o centre- band. This t e s t should a lso be carried out subsequantly, a t infrequent intervals.
Deductions to be drawn f r m CT82 readings
20. Where ei ther noise factor or noise output readings f a i l t o sat isfy the recpirernents laid down, intel l igent study of the figures achieved can
do much t o i d e n t i e the s a u c e of' poor performance. W t h e r detai ls are given under the heading "Interpretation of CT62 readings" p a r a m h a 40 and 41.
Valve electrode potentials - 21. The f i r s t p h a s e inreceiverfault-findingistoramowdcn(-v'nthe
investigation t o a particular uni t or circuit. It may the11 be possible t o locate the faulty component by checking the electrode potentials of the valve i n the suspected circuit. It is desirable t o place certain receiver controls in predetermined positions i n order t o obtain controlled conditions for the test.
PART B - Signa l + ~ o i s h o i s e ratio, and overall sensi t ivi ty
22. (a) The receiver should be capable of an output of 500 rnilli~atts vihen fed piith an RF input voltage of 1 microvolt a t the low iqedance ae r i a l connection. This output is due to signal and receiver noisn i.0.
Signal + Noise.
(b) m e n the signal is sviitched off, the output should f a l l by a t leas t 22 dB. The output nm r e i n i n g i s due to receiver noise alone.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956 ~.R.1517 CHAPTER 7
( c j The Signal + ~ o i s e f i o i s e r a t i o is therefore quoted a s 22 dB, and the sens i t iv i ty a s 500 millin-atts f o r 1 microvolt. These a re the performance figures which the receiver should achieve.
Overall Audio-Frequency Response - 23. (a) This t e s t ensures tha t the AF response a t the receiver o u t i t conforms
t o the f ollovling reqiremlents : - ( i) l l i t h a reference level establislxd a t the maxiinu~ output obtainable
over the AF band, the output a t 3 0 c/s and 3000 c/s modulation should not f a l l by more than 4 dB helm the reference level.
( i i ) The output a t 80 c/s modulation frequency should f a l l by a t l eas t 13 dB beloti the reference level.
(b) A n RF signal a t 1.05 i.ic/s i s fed i n a t the receiver a e r i a l connecti-c:?. The inodulation applied t o t h i s signal is w r i e d from 80 c/s t o 3 kc, s, and the AF response a s indicated by the out2ut meter readiiigs is note5. The amplitude of the IT signal, and the depth of modulation, is maintained a t a constant level,
( c ) Besides checking the response of the AF stages, t h i s t e s t provides usefi . information a s t o the alignment of the remainder of the receiver, since misalignneiit of the RF or stages would probably influence the s'mpe of the A2 response curve.
Output levels
24. (a) This t e s t ensures that the output levels a re not less than:-
PHONE JACK 1 - 3.5 milliwatts
PHCINZ JACK 2 - 3.5 milliwatts
(b) The reference level of output i s 500 ni l l iviat ts from tlie 1ouds;eaker connectiolis of tile output plug,
25. (a) A n intermediate frequency s i p 1 of 5C0 kc/s nay be obtained r . i t h an incoming signal 5C0 kc/s abwe or below tlie loca l osc i l l a to r fi-equency.
(b) The local osc i i l a to r aperates a t 500 kc/s above the inc~liliil;; sigrial. The t e s t is therefore desisned t o ensure t l a t a t the frequency where image interference ( i. e, secon6 channel interference) could occur - tha t is, I lic/s higher than the fundamental frequency -, adequate attenuation is achieved i n the RF stages before the iri terfering s ignal reaches the iiIixer stage.
--l-l-..-l--l % second channel -. 1 i
e m ll-nu- % local osc.
f in,
A. G. C. Perf ormance
26 la) The function of the a.g.c. system i s t o maintain a reasonably constant
receiver output 1-iith an input siglaal 1-ihich is varying over a %ide voltage range.
(b) The t e s t is designed t o ensure tha t the receiver output does not vary by more than 3.5 dB, s h i l s t the input R.il ~ l t a ~ e is varied over a range of 77 dB.
Anti-Cross-1:iodulat ion
27 fa) This t e s t i s designed t o check the range of control of the ANTI-CROSS-
- - 510DUMTION potentiometer. d i t h t h i s potentiometer turned fu l ly clockTrYise - tha t is, permitting the f i r s t Rl? stage to give maxi1mm gaiil - the receiver GAIN colitrol i s adzus ted so tha t an i n p t of 100 micrwolts a t the aer ia l terminal pmduces an outgut of 500 milliwatts.
(b) >#!hen the STTI-CROSS-j-;iODUUTION control is turned t o the other end of i t s t r ave l i, e. i u l l y anti-cloclc-Vise the IIF stabe gain is reduced. In order t o produce an output of 500 id-? from the receiver, the s iznal generator output m s t nm be increased by a t l e a s t 45 dB.
Crystal controlled operation
28, ..here exceptional receiver frequency s t a b i l i t y is required, the loca l osc i l la tor 2requency iimy be crystal-controlled. This t e s t check
tha t the receiver operates sa t i s fac to r i ly i n t h i s condition. The t e s t is purely functional.
Noise Limiter Action
ZY(a) The noise LIiiITXR control should be effect ive on signals ,--hose modulation depth l i e s bekeen and 6&.
(b) In t h i s tes t , an RF vo l tage modulated successively beb-eel1 143 and 6G;3, i s fed to tile grid of the mixer valve. A t each variation 0-2 de-ptii of modulation the receiver l imi te r control is operated t o ensure tha t the receiver output, vihich i s displayed as a t race o;l the c.r.t. of an oscilloscope, is limited by the act ion ol" the L;ClETER control.
30 (a) The gain of the audio frequency stages is checked a t a nominal frequency
of 1000 c/s. A n input of 0.15 vol t s t o the ;rid of the f i r s t AF valve should produce a reading of 500 millir~iatts or more i n the output meter.
(b) Due -Lo t h e 2oor se-l;-tiig accu%cy 02 the "OuG~ut Voltcgel' scale 0-f -t:le &' OsciLla-kor a-t 101-i vol-ta,es, an out;3ui; of q5 vol ts is used.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
This i s reduced t o an input of 0.15 volts a t the receiver by means of a 100/1 (approx, ) voltage divider beb-ieen AF Oscil lz t or an2 receiver.
(c) For t h i s t e s t , the Povier Unit should be removed from the receiver.
IF response - adjacent channel se lec t iv i ty - 31,
(a ) This t e s t ensures that, vihen the receiver is i n the I\TARROV o r 3 k/s posi t ion of the RAiJD:E?YTH miitch, the bandwidth 0.2 the receiver is greater than 2.5 kc/s v&de a t 6 dB da-"n and l e s s than 9 kc/s a t 40 dB d m . When the MDl:IIIPH sviitch i s a t iiIDE or 8 kc/s, the bandwidth of the receiver shculd be greater than 8 kc/s a t 6 dB dmjn, and less than 25 kc/s a t 40 dB d011;.
(bj The incremental tuning scale of the signal generator is f i r s t calibrzted, t o provide an accurate measurement of bardwidt h.
( c ) The signal generator output voltage and the receiver output pmier a r e then established a t fixed levels. The s ignal generator cutput is increased by 6 dB, and the cutput frequency detuned u n t i l the receiver output f a l l s t o i ts original figure. The bandr-iidth i s then measured by rLeans of the incremental tuning scale.
(d) This t e s t is repeated on the i-JID3 or 8 kc/s posi t ion of the BNJDJXDTH s-ii t ch.
(el A h a l te rna t ive method, involving the use of a frequency-m-ept osc i l l a to r and oscilloscope, is included. Although t h i s r.~ethod is preferred, it i s not often alplicable, since the frequency sfi-ept osc i l l a to r i s not generally available,
(f) By t h i s nethod, the response curve due t o the IF voltage a t the second detector i s displayed on an oscilloscope, a sviept frequency about 500 kc/s being fed i n a t the mixer y i d , Using the scan length as a scale, the bandwidth a t 6 dB and 4.0 dB do~-m from resonance, can b e measured f o r each 2osi t ion of the IWIOYIIDTH sviitch.
Il? Gain
Overall Gain
3 2. ( a ) This t e s t ensures that the voltage gain over tile IF stages is correct.
It is carried out slt1-1 the EZNDi;IDTH sT-iitch ln the ;;IDE (B~o/A) or 8 kc/s (B~OB/C/D) position, and a l s o i n the IVAKROII (B&O/A) or 3 kc/s (&OB/C/D) position,
(b) An RF s i ~ l a l of 100 rxicrovolts, modulated 3 0 ; a a t 4-00 or 1000 c/s injected a t the mixer g r i d , should produce a receiver outpxt of a t l e a s t 500 milliviatts x i t h the BAiDlIIDTH s ~ ~ ~ t c h i n its widest bandviidth position.
(c) 1;iith the WIUD\~IDZH sr-;itch s e t t o NARROTf or 3 kc/s a s aml ieable , an liF s ignal of 35 microvolts, modulated as before, should produce an output of a t l e a s t 500 rnillivi-atts.
IF Stage gain
33. Should the w e r a l l stage gain not reach the specified fi&ure, it is necessary to determine tihich stage(s) are a t fault. Individual stage
gain figures are theref ore taken,
RF gain
34. (a) In th i s test , the gain w e r the entire BF amplifier i s measured. Should
this p rwe unsatisfactory the gain of individual RF stages can be checked. The ga in- i s measured indirectly, in the sense tkt if the receiver is operating viithin satisfactory linlits, a given RE' input should prcduce an AF output of 500 d7, It is possible t o derive stage gain fikures i f so desired.
(b) When the Signal Generator A.P. 54704A i s used, a 20 dB attenuator is inserted betvieen it and the receiver. I n addition, when the signal generator is connected t o the grid of a valve, a special lead inc oworating a screened 0.01 capacitor is employed. F
( c ) I'lhen the Signal Generator CP218 is used, it is connected direct ly t o the receiver mken feeding the ae r i a l connector, or through a special lead and 0.01 capacitor when connected t o the grid of the mixer or RF valves. /"r
( d ) Irrespective of the signal generator used, the Il? gain is reduced when the signal voltage is fed in a t the f i r s t RF grid, or a t the a e r i a l connector. This is achieved by connecting an attenuator, consisting of a O.Ol/uF capacitor and a 68 ohm res is tor i n series, bekeen the grid of the second IF valve, and the chassis.
( e ) To check individual stage gain, commencing on Band 1 a t 1.05 1\1k/s, a signal is fed in a t the mixer grid, sufficient t o produce s reading of 500 mW,in the output meter. The signal generator output voltage is noted, t o see that it does not exceed the maximum value permitted, as la id dmn i n the table provided i n the Test Instructions. The procedure is repeated on the same frequency, but with the signal fed in through the second RF valve a i d , the f i r s t RF valve grid, and l a s t ly the aer ia l connector, i n that order, the mlue of signal generator output voltage being checked a t each stage.
(f) The entire procedure is repeated a t a given frequency i n each v- v ave band,
PART A
PEXFOIIIU@iCE TESTS PRDWU FOR THE USE OF SHIES
NOISE FACTOR Ik iEASUBW
Test Equipment required
I Box of flexible c mnectors for use viith CT82
Test Equipment Description
Noise Generat o r
Identity
CT82 * AePe
671 66
This Sheet issued with A. L, NO* 2 October 1957 B. R. 1617 CHAPTER 7
The D r i l l
STEP 3 6.
I
CONNECT C.T. 82 NOISE OUTPUT TO RECEIVER LOW IMPEDANCE )€RIAL INPUT CONNECT C.T. 82 %AUDIO I N SOCKET TO RECEIVER TELEPHONE JACK.
* cT410 may also be used. S e t input impedance to 600 ohms and read 75 ohm dB scale (see B.R.1771(43) 1.
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIACRAR FIG. 2
PROCEDURE
Set the receiver controls as follows: - ( I ) NOISE l i m i t e r t o (ZW
(2) BADWIM!H switch to 3 kc/s
(3) MONITOR L.S. switch t o ON
(5) CRYSTAL switch t o OFF
( 6 ) ANTI-CROSSadOD. control , fully clockwise
(7) GAIN control, fully clockwise
(8) AF GAIN control , adjus t as described overleaf
(9) DUMMY LOAD switch. Toggle towards f ron t of set.
NOTE:- The b.f.o. i s in c i r c u i t with t h e object of operating - the second detector i n the l i n e a r range.
A. G. C. SWITCH-1 I
- om
t
RECEIVER
BW --
wB/c/D
S Y S ~ SVJITCH
Manual
Tuna
STEP - PROCEDURE (~ontd . )
2 Set the CT82 controls as follows: - ( I ) "Noise outt1 switch to 75 ohms
(2) "Audio in" switch to HIGH ( i f the output of the receiver is low it m y be necessary to use e i ther the 'Medium' o r 'Low' switch positions).
Tune the B4.0 receiver to the mid-band frequency on Range 1.
Adjust AF gain f o r a midscale reading (i.e. 10 dE3) i n the output meter with the Diode Current switch to "OFF1'.
Switch the Diode Current switch to "10 mA".
Rotate the Diode Current control unt i l the reading in the output meter has increased by 3 dB. I f the Noise Factor is higher than 11 dB it w i l l be necessary to switch t o the "100 mA" position to obtain a 3 dB increase.
Read off noise factor on the 75 ohm scale of the Noise Factor Meter.
Repeat the test on a l l bands, with the receiver tuned successive1 to the remaining mid-band frequencies , then ( i f desired 3 to the LF and HI' tracking points.
NOISE OUTPUT MEASUREMEDT USING NOISE GJ3NERATOR CT82
The D r i l l
37. Test Equipment connections as for Noise Factor measuremnt.
STEP - PROCEDURE
1 Set receiver control as fo r measurement of noise factor, but adjust both gain controls to maximum. Tune t o the centre- band frequency on Range I .
2 Set CT82 control as for measurement of noise factor with the Diode Current switch to "OETF" , and the ''Audio In" switch to llHighll .
3 Read noise output i n dBs on the output meter. If the output of the receiver i s so low that no reading i s obtained, turn the "Audio In" switch to "Medium" or tlLow" as appropriate. Note the reading obtained and whether measured on "High" (H), "Medium" (M), o r "Low" (L).
NOTE:- An output which reads 0 dB on the "High" position of the switch - will read approximately 16 dB on the "Low" position of the switch.
' ( 2 aqox aas ) a ~ q y s q u x a d sr J O ~ D V J asjou uy uoyqcxouaqap MOTS EZ
puz a-pp21ps a3umaqqm ayq uo papa-quy sz &-cqoy~ad poq3ayo aq p-poys aaATaoaJ aqq Xnu~115osqn~ *Janyaoa;r 3~4% j o & ~ r o y q . n ~ Z u m s s ~ a-a jo acqqou
ayq 0% ~ Z F ~ C J ~ ~q ppoys q ~ ~ j aw c a ~ q e l aq? uy u o y s a m 9 ~ j .ra@?y ayq u e q ~ a q s a ~ 8 'a*T cas.xcm g;p u e q aaom sr zozpz j assou aw maw sssao Ltn
% T q q aw u~ paqvafpq sv aq pvoys peuy'slqo s q p s a z asayL *san t3g ~ e - g ~ u ~ a= se paproaar aq p-poys sasn9rj asaw pun c p a ~ ~ ~ q s u ~ uaaq sey JanTaoar
p ~ r r d a ~ JO Aiau aw J a q p a ~ q ~ s s o c l se uoos sa uavq aq p p o q s s ~ o q o z j asroN
m.ropzg a o r o ~ ;nre u ~ m asrola jo surraq u~ ~ J G M oq c(sa-pas ma ayq asoo s ~ y q ur 0ao-t) am ams aqq 30 sranpoar 2kqxv~uoo u a q M quaruaAuo3
qsaq p m o j uaaq s ~ y q-g (quciqsuoa suy.eu:aJ u p 8 ST? 8 u ~ m s s ~ G a q v a ~ B
NOISE GAIN ( see Notes below)
The a c t u a l f igu re obtained f o r noise ga in i s somewhat dependent on t h e l o c a t i o c of t h e rece iver , e.g. i n a screened cubic le , lower noise gains may be obtained than i n a "noisy" loca t ion o r where t h e r e i s considerable in t e r f e recce on t h e mains supply. Fo r t h i s reason it i s b e t t e r t o i n s t a l l t h e r ece ive r i n i t s bay and take a s e r i e s of noise f a c t o r and noise ga in readings, If these readings a r e taken a f t e r t he i n i t i a l i n s t a l l a t i o n of the r ece ive r o r subsequent t o i t s r e - i n s t a l l a t i o n a f t e r r epa i r , they should be used a s t h e i n i t i a l noise ga in and any subsequent r e s u l t s showing a sudden de te r io ra t ion of more than 3 dB should be invest igated. A steady de te r io ra t ion i n noise ga in is permissible ( s e e Note 2 below).
NOTE I
The recommended p r a c t i c e a s s t a t e d i s t o obta in the noise f a c t o r and noise gain when the rece iver is known t o be i n good condit ion and use these r e s u l t s a s a b a s i s f o r comparison of l a t e r pe r iod ic readings, I n general t he noise f a c t o r s w i l l tend t o worsen, i.e. increase and the noise ga in t o decrease with time. A steady de te r io ra t ion i s t o be expected and only sudden changes of s eve ra l dB need be invest igated.
NOTE 2
It i s emphasised t h a t t h e f i g u r e s given i n t h e t a b l e only apply when the rece iver i s f i r s t i n s t a l l e d and the r ece ive r should not normally be defected if the r e s u l t s gradual ly d e t e r i o r a t e below those given i n the t ab le , The r e s u l t s given i n para. (b ) below a r e the noise r e s u l t s which should be obtained, when a rece iver has reached t h i s low l e v e l of performance, e f f o r t should be made t o discover the reason, s e e t a b l e of F a u l t diagnosis using CT82, and e i t h e r the necessary a c t i o n taken t o r e s t o r e the performance o r a copy of the r e s u l t s (not the r ece ive r ) s en t t o the Dockyard o r base f o r information and proposed ac t ion .
Re-alignment of the r ece ive r should not b e attempted except i n an emergency and i n general it w i l l be found t h a t the performance can be r e s to red without re - alignment. ( s ee t a b l e of F a u l t diagnosis us ing ~ ~ 8 2 . )
NOTE 3 The Noise Gain f i g u r e s a r e ca lcula ted a s shown i n para, 37, s t ep 6.
NOTE 4 I n B&OC/D the noise f a c t o r s obtained a r e usua l ly s l i g h t l y worse than those f o r B&oA/B. However t h e permissible limits given apply t o a l l B40 type rece iver .
NWE 5
The l e v e l of ,performence quoted i n para. 38(a) using the CT82 f o r B40 type rece ivers a l s o app l i e s t o 6ZB. However, due t o i t s loca t ion , i n t e r f e rence can sometimes give r i s e t o bad noise f a c t o r s , even on i n s t a l l a t i o n . I n t h i s event, t he r e s u l t s only should be returned t o the i n s t a l l a t i o n au thor i ty f o r comment and ac t ion .
(b) I n general , i t is considered t h a t B40 rece ivers which do not reach the s tandard of Noise Fac tor and Noise Gain performance shown below should be considered un- serv iceable and removed t o t h e E,M,R, f o r i nves t iga t ion a t the e a r l i e s t opportu- n i ty .
Noise Factor: 15 dB on all ranges ( ~ ~ 8 2 & ~ ~ 4 1 0 ) ; Noise Gain: -10 dB using CT82 (-36 dB using C T ~ I G ) on a l l ranges.
The minus s ign of Noise Gain which occurs when r ece ive r performance i s poor need not l e a d t o confusion i f it i s remembered, f o r example, t h a t a Noise Gain of -7 dB i s 3 dB b e t t e r than a Noise Gain of -10 dB.
T h i s Sheet is issued w i t h A.L No. 2 Oc tobe r 1957 Bm 1617 CHATTEX 7
I N T ~ T A T I O N OF CT82 READINGS
Diagnosis of the causes of poor Noise Factor and/or Koise Gain
39, The following table indicates some common faul t s ,
NOTE 1:- Variations i n supply voltage of 2 10V will cause variations i n Noise Gain of + 1.5 dB, Noise Factor remaining substant ial ly the same.
NOT% 2:- Where a portion of the receiver i s suspected from examination of the CT82 resul ts , fur ther more detai led t e s t s w i l l often be necessary t o locate the defective component,
WORTANT NOTE: It i s most important where receiver alignment i s suspect, thpt a l l other possible causes are investigated before carrying aut re-alignment, T f . S IUST ONLY BE ATTEiiTTED AS AN EIiEEGE3TCY 1iiE:ASLTR.E and the s e t must be made a Dockyard Defect a t the ea r l i e s t opportunity. (A.F.O. 534/57 refers).
FAULT DIAGNOSIS USING CT82 TEST RESULTS -
Symptom
High (poor) Noise Factor on a l l bands
C, Low r. f a gain
Possible F a q t
8. Bad contact i n r e f , valves
High (poor) Noise Factor on a l l bands
I
Be r e f , v d v e fa i l ing
High (poor) Noise Factor on whole of
-
Location of P a d t
r e f e gain low i n tha t band only.
C, h, t, voltages o r mains voltage low, Unswitched compon- ents i n r, f , stages, i, e, any component c o m n t o all bands of the receiver.
Remedy ---
socket t o give cleaning action on pins. Inspect holders,
Check using Avometer I Model 7K. I Check by-pass capacitors I electrode voltages etc. ) i n r e f , and mixer stages./ Replace fau l ty component.' i
B, r, f , valve and mixer valve
---
Check valves on CTI 60 Valve tes ter , f o r emission etc, Replace fau l ty valves,
D. Switched components to tha t band, i n ref, and mixer circui ts .
Check appropriate com- ponents, co i l s etc ,
-1 I
E, Alignment of r. f. stages on tha t band only,
I
See important note a t head of table. Realign r e f , stages and osc i l l a to r stage on tha t band only,
FAULT DIAGNOSIS USING CT82 TEST RESULTS (~on td . )
Symp tom
High (poor) Noise Factor a t one end of a band
Noise Factor k measurement not obtain- able due t o no increase i n receiver Noise Output
u2 E
!3 2,
'3 u 2 W I P ;
Noise Factor suddenly changes on one band o n l y
Noise Factor suddenly changes i n all bands
I -4
Possible Fault
r e f . gain low a t that point
No noise enter- ing Receiver Aerial terminals
r. f. gain Low on t h a t band
r, f , gain changed
Location oi' Fault bl* A s i n E above
G, Noise Generator not ope rating
H, Connecting lead from Noise Generator to Receiver aerial terminals open or sho rt circui ted
J. Receiver Noise Factor greater than 20 dB
Ipppp K. See D, E, F above,
- Remedy
See important note a t head of table,
-
Check mains on, Diode current meter reading etc, See BR. 1771 (1 2) f o r f a d t finding,
Check f o r continuity and insulation, -1
Check overall gain
I etc, as indicated
i i n Receiver handbook,, Pay particular attention t o f i r s t r , f , and mixer stages,
See important note
I a t head of table,
I L. r e f . stages of Receiver
M e
Noise Generator fau l t
Check ha t. mains voltage electrode voltages.
See Be Re 1771 (1 2). 1
This Sheet issued with A,L. No, 2 October 195'7 B,R. 1617 CH!,FSER J FAULT DIAGNOSIS USING CT82 TZST RESULTS (~on td . )
I Symptom IPoss ib leFau l t LocationofFaCLt I Remedy I Noise Gain Low on a l l bands, Noise Factor normal.
Receiver gain low*
N, h. t. voltage low. Mains voltage low,
non switched sections, 1 voltages use handbook 1
P* Fad. t y components i n Check elect rode
1 locate faul t , ,
e,g, by-pass capaci- tors.
Q*
Check suspect valve s ! I on CT460 valve tester. ;
maintenancernethods.
B. F. 0. not working properly.
i , f . alignment
Valve o r Valves low i n Check a, f. overall gain, gain o r emission, I i .f , o v e r d l gain to
Check according to handbook.
Realign i.f, as an emer ency measure '&e important note a t head of table before attempting alignment. )
Noise Gain Low on one band only. Noise Factor
r, f, gain 1cw i n mixer stage.
T S&itched components i n ref, stages and osci l lator ,
particularly i n the mixer stage.
Noise Gain Low on one end of one band only and Noise
Check these components,
ref, gain low a t bad point.
u. Alignment of ref.
Factor No1~11d-o
stages and osc i l la tor stage,
Try a l l other f au l t finding before attemp- t ing an r. f. redlignment. See important note a t head of table.
/ XB i n T & U abwe.
/ Noise ah ~ i ~ h Receiver
Noise Ga'n /B.F.OO Low On a t 1 frequency or bands. Noise Factor s l igh level chiingee change. 1
.
W e
Main voltage high. h, t, high.
I r e
B,F.O, circui t ,
--
Check using Avomzter. Higher than usual
Check B. Pa 0. frequency and level as indicated i n maintenance notes.
gain.
40. Spare.
41. Spare.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 19%
VALVE mmm POTENTIALS
In d e r t o obtain the figures with masonable certainty, the receiver should be aperated vdth t he controls se t as follows:-
(2) CRYSTAL switch to CET
(3
(4) Z9aTiB switch to CFF
(5) OEEW! switch at back of receiver, toggle to front of receiver
SYSTEldSLTTCH '
A.G.C. S'$IITC~
&ma1
Tune Off
r
RECEIVBl
BGdA
WVC/D L
( 6 ) mmOR LS. #itch to. Om
uMSFTlD!l!H m a
Narrm
3 k d s
(7) WIN controls both fully clocbise.
Test Equipment to be used
43. . (a) The figures given uverlaaf wre obtained ruiag an Avometer Patt. 47..
If a different instnunent is used, the result8 obtained may in certain instances dif fer considerably fkan those laid down, particularly *ere a voltage measurement is being nade across a high medance.
(b) The l imit8 given are approximately 1s the normal reading.
Valve electrode potent ial t ab les (&o/~B/c)
44. (a, RF Unit
(b) AF and P o m r UKQ
Valve
I st Ri? valve VlO1
2ndRFvalve V102
2requency Changer Vl 03
Acceptable lirlits
I.
iYleter range (volts)
4-80 4-60 480
450 480
12
480 480
-I2
480
FJectrode
Anode Screen Cathode
Anode Screen Cathode
Anod e Screen Cathode
-
prom
4 70 1 70 55
65 65
4.3
205 55
? a 6
1 25 1 25
-I
Reading (vo l t s )
200 200 65
100 75
1.5
240 65 1.8
150 Local i Anode OsciUa t o Screen V-104 I
To
230 230 75
4-15 85 4.7
275 75
2.0 I
4 75 4 75 480
Reading (vo l t s )
250 150 200 230
25
80 30
1 e 4
250 250 3.8
iiieter range (volts )
480
1 t
I1
..
Valve ( o r socket)
s ~ o l
150
Electrode
Pin 1 2
H 4 7
SK302 Gain control fully anti- clockxise ( i. e. ) Iriin.
Gain
I s tAPva lve V301
Output valve v302
" Acceptable limit s
215 1 25 4 70 200
20
70 25
1.2
Pin 8 I 120 ( ~ 3 0 5 slider)
TO
265 4 75 230 260
30
90 35 1.6 i
215 2.1 5 3 .3
Anode Screen Cathcde
Anode Screen Cathcde
265 265 &. 1
480 480 42
4.80 4-80 12
This Sheet issued with A.L. NO. 1 August 1956
(c) IF Unit
UCAL OSCILUTOil OUTPUT
Valve
Test Equipment required
45 (a) Valve V o l t ~ ~ e ter, CT54, A.'P. 67921.
Set t o measure a.c. volts, 24 volts range.
Electrode
Connect ions -- (b) The probe comector of t n e CT54 need not be used.
Comect the valve voltilieter bein~een the osci l lator g r id of the rnixer valve (p in 4 B~o/A/B/c, Pin 7 &OD), and earth.
i.ieter range (volts;
1 s t IF valve V20 1
2nd Il? valve V202
3 r d IF valve V203
A.G.C. diode
200 50
1.9
200 50
1.8
1 85 75
2.2
5.5
145
20
155 33
7
90 60
Zead iix (vol ts )
2 60 70
2.3
260 70
2.2
245 95
2.8 i --
.11.5
1 95
26
205 47 I I
1 20 86
Anode Screen Cathcde
Anode Screen Cathode
Anode Screen Cathode
Cat hod e
Acceptable -
Prom
4-60 LkG O
12
480 &Go
12
480 4.80
12
1 20 V204-a 1 (a. &. c. delay
voltage)
limits
To
230 60
2.1
230 60
2
21 5 85
2.5
I0
480
&LO
4-80 480 4 20
480 480
B. F. 0. ( ~ 2 0 6 )
b.f.0. "au B&O/A - bKhTUAL B~OB/C/D - TUNE
b.f.o, "Om"' (SYSTZ'I S2. t o m) SYSTBi S~-iitch
t o CAL
170
23
1 65 40
9
105 73
\ 1 Anode ;
Screen I I
Anode Screen Cathode
Anode Screen
R F Voltage
(c) The H? voltage measured should approxir~ate t o the values given below 7 .1 volt*
VALVE EUCTRODE P0TETJTIA.L TABLES - B40D
1
2
3
4 5
Voltage Checks
46. The follo~ving series of measurements have been taken viith a doc. 20 000 ohrq/volt meter (~vometer Biodel 8 B.P. 12945); they are average
values and should only be considered a s a guide t o the proper functioning of a part icular valve. The figures viere taken whilst the receiver rr;as delivering an out-put of 500 millil-iatts,
0.67
1.66
4.1
9.8 18
(a) RF Unit
6.5 volts
6 "
7 " 6 4 "
Valve Type Posit ion
V101 m40%- 1s t RF valve
V102 CQ454 2nd RF valve
Valve Electrode
Anode Screen Cathode
Anod e Screen Cathode
Avometer I.iodel 8 h
V103 . CV2128 F.C. valve
Vl04 CV&o 4 4 L. 0, valve
-
P. D.
223 223 61
1 20 59
0.6
Anode 25 7 Screen 60 250 Cathode I. 6 I 0
Anode 1 49 250 Screen 4 49 250
- Range
I000 1 000 250
250 250 2.5
Thi s Sheet issued with A.L, No. 1 Lug= t 1956
(b) IF Unit
(i) Amplifier
These masurements are taken with the g r i d of V206 connected t o ear th through O . O I p capacitor (B.z. 0. not oscillating).
Avometer Liodel 6 Valve Type Valve - Position Electrode P. D. Range
v201 CVl3-l Screen 1st lJ? valve
( ii) B. F. 0. -
I ---4
V202 ~ ~ 1 3 1 2nd I F valve
V2O3 ~ ~ 1 3 . 1 3rd IF valve
V20L1.a Wl&O A,G.C. valve
l'
Valve Type Posit ion
- -- --
I Position 6 I
v206 CV131 B.F.O. valve
Position 1-5 of SIT S202
Anode Screen Cathode
Anode Screen Cathode
Anod e Screen Cathode
Ca tilode Delay Voltage
Valve Zlectrode
Anode Screen
257 108 2m4
23 8
Avometer Tillode1 8
I Position 7
1000 250 I0
I000
3?. D.
205 53
i
166
10.8
Range .
-- 250 250
/ (cA;;~;~ srr I :ig 250
- b
250 I
(c) AF and Power Unit
Valve Type Valve Position Zlectrode
V301 Anode m454 Screen AT Anq valve Cathcde
~ 3 0 2 Anode CV2136 Screen AJ? Output valve Cathode
R305 Tapping Point 'Gain' control fully anti-clochise
Avometer IvIodel 8
Range 100 100
0.63 1 2*5
( d ) H.T. Outputs fromPower Unit
Avometer Model 8 Point of' Output
P. D. Range
SKj0.1 Pin 4 277 1000
253 " 4 229 tt
4 50 250
Thls Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
PART B
?ER310Ri,WC3 TZSTS iilORE SUITABIS FOB USE B!J DLPOT SIXES .AND iXCKU.RllS
SIGNAL + NOIS&/NOISE RATIO, hND OWAm SENSITIVITY
T e st Equipment required
I Ins trument T i t l e
Signal Generator cover ing 500 kc/s t o 30 il:ic/s
Outmt TTattmet e r with Connector (see para. j6 )
Decibel 2leter Portable I'Jo. 3 'Output Paiier 3ie t e r TF34.0
Attenuator
Connect o r
I Note:- This 7
I ins t rument is
rn
LI
C onnect o r
not calibrated ' above 25 lic/s.
a
These b-to items are required for use I>-ith A. I?. 54704 S ignal Genera t o r
--
Required for use t i i th CT218. Part of Box St~viage f o r connectors f o r CT82 Noise Generator
Test Req-uirement
43. (a) SZ~SITNITY 500 &7 output f o r not more than 1 microvolt input.
(b] SIGITAL + NOISI$/NOISZ RATIO Better than 22 dB.
OUTPUT CONNECTOR (SEE PARA 16)
o) WHEN USING A.P 54704 SIGNAL GENERATOR
FIG 3(a)
PL 101
A.P 5 4 704 A SIGNAL
RECE l VER
B 4 0 / A/B/C/D
GENERATOR rl F! b3693
ATTENUATOR
C) WHEN USING 1 0 s /lb780 SIGNAL GENERATOR C.T. 218
AL 64960 CONNECTOR
PL20215 PLlOl
TEST EQUIPMENT C M E C T I O N DIAGRAM FIG. 3(b)
RECEl VER
~ 4 0 / A/B/C/D
The Drill
49.
1
OUTPUT METER bOOn
Connect the instruments as shown i n FQsw 3a or 3b above, Switch on, and allow t o mm thrcugh for 15 mins.
Set the receiver controls as f ollms: - (I) ANTICROSSIlMQD. control filly clwlwise
(2) mS!CAL 8P41toh t o
(3) I;raPrrsa switch t o ON?
(5) OUTFUT mitch tawrds back of receiver. Short cirouit R223.
u
nSt0ph.f.o. oscilletingbyconnectinga0.01 oapacitor between the chaasis and the g r i d of' tho b.f+.fvalve .
.- t t
OUT PUT CONNKTOR
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
STEP - PRocEjDuRE
(6) L0UDs-R switch t o Om (7) TEIBPHONES unplugged
(8) AF GAIN control fully c locb i se (1~224)
( 9 ) G A m control ful ly clockv~ise (~~305/309)
( 10) TUNE the receiver t o 0.67 bk/s
3 Set the relevant signal generator controls i n accordance with i ts Handbook instructions to provide the fol1ming:-
Output frequency 0.67 ~ c / s
Output level 10 microvolts A.P. 54704~) 1 microvolt [ (221 8)
4 S e t the output meter controls to prwiae the follmdng:-
Input impedance - 600 ohms
Output level - t o read a t leas t 500 M.
5 Tune the signal generator accurately t o the receiver setting as i n d i c a t e d by maximum reading i n the output meter. The receiver output must exceed 500 fie
NOTE: - If it is not possible to obtain this cutput, sensi t ivi ty - is low, and the reason nust be investigated.
6 Reduce receiver gain by means of the GAIN control (~~305/309) i f necessary, un t i l 500 fl is obtained,
7 SYSTBM switch t o TUNE. W/A only - unclip &capitor shorting g r i d of b,f. o, valve t o chassis, Remove s h o r t circuit f'rom R223.
Switch off signal generator modulation i. e. to C.V.
8 Tune signal generator f o r zero beat.
9 &C$S/Q/C SYSTEM witch to IOW. B40D - SYSTEX switch to FSK NARRGV m e
10 Ad just receiver AF GAIN control (~224) for a reading of 500 mi/ i n the output meter.
11 &itch off the signal generator carrier, but re ta in a l l the connections to the ~ c e i v e r .
Check that the output rneter reading has fa l len by a t least 22 dB, i. e, t o less than 3 milli~vatts.
Repeat the above procedure on the follo~l-in;: frequencies:-
Test Equipment required
BAND
I
2
3
4
I 5
ilescription
Signal Generator covering 1 II~/S v i t h provision for external modulation
Identity I A. P.
Frequency (iJc/s)
CT218 I OS/I 6780 I krc oni
Audio frequency variable frequency 1 Oscillttor
TOP
1.52 -
3-8
9.2
, 28.0 "*& 1
Bottcm
0.67
1.66
&ell
9.8
18.0
Output Meter with Connector (see para. 16)
EIid d l e
1.05
2.6
6.4
13.1
23.0
Decibcl Heter Portable NO. 3 m343
NmE 1 : - These ill be required i f A. P. 54704/~ Signal Generator is used. For detai ls see paras. 11 to 13.
ZD. 00022
54708
~t tenuat or See Note 1
Connector
C onne c t or See Note 2
NOTE 2 : - Required i f CT218 Signal Generator is used. Provided i n the "Box Starage for connectors for CT82 Noise Generator".
I
L
- -
63693
63691 -
64960
This Sheet f ssued with A.L. No. 1 ~Zugust 1956
Test requirement
51. Theaudiofrequencyresponse, measureda t the rece ive r output, ~ i i t h t h e signal fed to the receiver input, should conforn t o the follmiing
r e q~irer~ients : - (a) With a refererice level established a t the rraximum output obtainable over
the audio-frequency range, the output a t 300 c i s and 30CO c/s moclulation should not f a l l by more than 4 dB belav the reference level.
(b) The output a t 80 c/s modulation frequency should f a l l by a t l e a s t 18 dB belmi the reference level.
ATTENUATOR AP 63691 CONNECTOR
J
A F OSCILLATOR
G205
V
REQUIRED FOR USE ONLY WITH A.P 54704 A. SIC. CEN
TEST EQUl PMENT CONNECTION Dl ACRAM FIG 4
\ ?
n
CONNECTOR METER
\\ n PLIOI
d l + SIGNAL
GENERA TOR CT 218
RECEIVER
B ~ o / A / B / c / D
AP 6 4 9 6 0 OUTPUT
The D r i l l --- - --
520 - STEP
I
P I I O C ~ U R E
RECEIVER controls as follm-s:-
(1 ) ANTI-CROSS-iiOD. control fu l ly clockwise
( 2 ) CRYSTAL svi v tch t o 03%'
(3 ) LIiSTEX switch t o OFF
(4) OUTPUT switch, toggle t o r ea r of receiver
(5) LOUDSPEAXER m i t c h t o 03°F
(6 ) GAIN control f'ully c l o c h i s e (~~305/309)
(7) TUNE t o 1.05 ~'iic/s
(8)
Signal generator
( I ) Adjust output level. t o 10 microvolts, (100 in icro~ol ts i n the case of A.P.~&~o~/A).
A, G, C, SIt ITCH
- RECEIVER
~ 4 0 / ~
WB/C/D
(2) TUNE t o 1.05 liic/s ( the receiver frequency) and adjust careful ly f o r KIl!Kli~Ubil output meter read1n.g i.e. zero beat.
...-
SYST23,I switch t o VT (B~oB/c/D). SYSTBi switch t o D W A L (B&O/A) and stop b. f. 0. osc i l la t ing by connecting 0.01 capacitor betvv'een b, f. o. valve g r i d aild chassis. P
RANDWIDTH SirITCH
\!id e
8 kc/s
Sigral generat or t o external modulation. AdJust modulation frequency of external AF Osci l la tor f o r m x h m receiver output, maintaining modulation depth a t 30:~.
SYSTXVL hVITCH
Tune
Tune
Ad jus t receiver g a i ~ by means of the AI? GAIN control ( ~ ~ 2 2 4 ) f o r a reading of +I5 dB on the 10 m i l l i ~ i a t t s output 111eter range i. e. 316 milliviatts. This is the reference level.
T n l s Sheet issued with A.L, No. 1 Axgust 1956
STEP - PROCEDURE
6 liaintaining the modulation depth a t 330, vary the AF modulation frequelicy i n steps betvieen 80 c /s and 3000 cycles per secoild.
Check t h t : - ( I ) The output meter reading does not f a l l more than 4 dEs
belmv' the 4 5 dB reference level a t any modulating frequency between 300 c/s and 3000 c/s , i.e. it must not f a l l b e l m 125 mill i~iat ts .
(2) The output meter reading f a l l s more than 18 dB be1ot.i t h o + I5 dB refereace level, i. e. belm 5 mli, a t a modulating L'requency of 80 cycles per second.
Test equipme nt required
53. (a>
NCTE 1.- Required f o r usc with ~.~.54704/A S i p 1 Generator
NOTE 2 : - I t I t 11 I t 11 " CT218
r
Description
Signal Generator covering approximately 1 I.IC/S
Output I'ieter ~ i i t h Connector (see para. 46)
- Connect o r
See Note 1 kttenuator i Connect or See Note 2
(b) To fac i l i t a te th i s t e s t a special output coimector should be made u p It consists of a six way Mark 4 socket ( see Chapter 8 Para. 18) with three twisted pairs suitably coloured ?or ~dent i f ica t ion, about 4 f t long. The three pairs are c o n ~ c t e d t o Pins A and b, C and D, and E and F, the f ree ends being f l t t ed vjith e i t h e r spade terminals or crocodile clips. Chapter 8 gives informatim on ha-i t o asserable th is socket conaector and deta i ls concerning approved methcds of soldering t o the pins.
Identity
CT218 1:iarconi.
Decibel i.ieter Portable
No. 3 T3'3U
i
+ A. 2.
I 05/1 6780 54704/~
--
Z3.00022
54708
6369 1
I
63 693
64960 i
( c j A fur ther connector is required for Step 5 of the t e s t t o coimect the o u t p t meter t o the phone Jack. This consists of a standard phone jack plug terninat ing a biisted pair about 3 f ee t long. Spade terminals o r crocodile clips are connected t o the f r e e ends.
Test requirement
54. Uhen the receiver i s s e t up t o give 500 a t the external loudspeaker pins of the output socket, the levels a t the other outputs should be
as follm-s:-
Output Socket pins f o r LINE - 5 mi l l iv~at t s 9 I! t t It It PHONES - 3.5 millivi-atts
Phone Jack I 3.5 milliviatts t Phone Jack 2 3.5 millitkatts . 1
3 TWISTED PAIRS AB. CD C EF
, SPEC AL CONNECTOR
1 -636.3 ti) kF? 63691 ATTiNUATOR
CONNECTOR
REOU,RED FOR USE ONLY WITH AP 54704A StC.CEN.
1
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Cf 218
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECT1 ON DIAGRAM . FIG. 5
(SEE PARA 53 b)
PLlOl
A P 64960 CONNECTOR
REC VER
B ~ O / = A / B / C D
OUTPUT METER
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956
The D r i l l
55. - STEP
I RECEIVlB controls a s fo1lovfs:-
( 1 ) ANTI-CROSS-IiOD. control - f u l l y clockvjise
(2) CRYSTAL srii tch - O F F
(4) OUTHJT sni tch (at back of receiver) - Toggle to rear of re ce iver
( 6 ) GAIN control - f u l l y c loch- ise
Signal Generator controls a s Follot-7s: - (I) Ilodulation, 1000 4 s ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 ) o r 400 c/s (54?04 /~ ) 3 ~ 2 depth
of modulation,
( 2 ) Tune t o 1.05 &ic/s, and ad just f o r r r a x i m readlilg i n the autput meter.
(3) Output level - 100 microvolts (~.~.54704/~) 10 microvolts ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 )
'2ith the output neter connected t o pins A and B of the special connector described i n para. 53(b), ad jus t receiver AF G.4JN control f o r a reading of 500 mi{ i n the meter.
Put the t o a l e o f the output switch tcvvards the f r ~ n t of the reoeivsr. Disconnect mtput wattmeter frcm plns A and B of j?~203/2, and connect it i n turn, by meals of he special connector, t o pins C and D (600 ohms l ine ) a n d I3 aild F (600 ohms 'phones). An ZUL u t ower reading of 5 15: for "Line" and 3.5 f o r "phones" (+ dB 7 should be obtained.
KOTE: - Pins A and F should be cormected t o tne earth termiral - of the output meter. ilhen t e s t ing the output across pins C and D, no p r t i c u l a r connectioil i s required.
Plug i n the output meter i n t a m t o earh of the telephone &cks on the front panel, usili;; the ccnnecto- described i n para. 53(c). 5 i t h the rcattmeter se t t o 600 ohms an output pa re r readi~ng of 3.5 15,~ + dB shcwld be cbtained frcm each jack.
Test Equipment required
56e
NGTE I :- These w i l l be required if A . P . ~ & ~ o ~ / A Signal Generator is used.
Description __ - Signal Generator covering 1 iqlc/s t o
25 IIIC/S
Output hietsr viith Connector (see para. 16)
Attenuator See Note 1
Conredt or
Connect o r See Note 2
NOTE 2:- Required if CT218 Signal Genezator is used. Provided i n the "Box S t a g e f o r connectors for CT82, Nolse Generator".
Test requirement
Identity
CT218 I.iarc oni
Decibel ide t er
Portable No. 3 73'340
I
.I
a
57. The h g e rejection should be a s fol1avts:-
+
A, Pa
1 O S / ~ 6780 54?04/~ -.
ZD, 00022
54708
63 693
63691
64960
/
Syave- Band
I
2
3
4
Pundamenta 1 Frequency(iv1Js)
1.05
2.6
60 4-
13.1
Image Frequency(~vlc/s)
2.05
3. 6
7.4
5 1 21 I
+
Imge R e j e c t i o n ( d ~ )
Exceeding 95 dB
tl 80 " I I 60 t t
14.1 I II 0 'I
24. I I 40 "
B.R 1617 CHAPTER 7
The D r i l l
5&. STEP - I
s Shect issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
A.P. 63693 A.P. 63691 ATTENUATOR CONNECTOR
REOUIRED FOR USE ONLY WITH AP.54704A SIC. CEN.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
CT 218
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FIG. 6
/ - < b o o n
\ SPECIAL CONNECTOR
PL lot ' ( S E E PARA 5 3 b )
A.P.64960 CONNECTOR
X3CXIVER controls as fol1ovis:-
RECEIVER
8 4 0 /A /B/C/D
( 1 ) AN!l'I-CROSS-i.iOD. control - fully c loch i ise
OUTPUT METER
(2) CRYSTAL switch - OFF
(3 ) LIi.lITi3R switch - OR?
(4) OUTPUT sviitch - toggle tm-ard rear of receiver
(5) UUDS- switch - OFF
(6) GAIN control - ful ly clochi- ise
(7) TUNE t o 1.05 bic/s
N. B. B&O/A - connect g r i d of b. f. o. -
( 8 ) r
RECEIWR
BLQ'A
WB/C/D
A.G.C. STIITCH-'
L --i I I
~ B A N D I ~ Y T H S ~ T C H
T J ~ m OR-
- S Y S T ~ . I S.IITCX
i.ianua1
3 kc/s R/r 1 OFF -- 1-
PROCEDURE
Signal Generator controls:-
Output tune6 t o receiver se t t ing of 1.05 ik/s.
Output modulated 3@, 1000 c / s ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 ) or 400 c/s ( ~ . ~ . 5 4 7 0 k / - )
Output level - mmcrovolk f o r A.P. 5470d~ Signal Generat or 1 micr~vo l t fo r CT218 Signal Generator
Receiver A2 GAIN control ( ~ ~ 2 2 4 ) , ad just fo r 500 nE? reading i n outkut neter.
Tune signal generator t o 2.05 21c/s. Increase the s ignal generator output by a substant ial amount (e. g. by approximately the number of decibels s h m i n the tfimage rejection" column under "Test requirement". Vary the s i m a l generator tuning around 2.05 Mc/s u n t i l the imge frequency is tuned exactly, a s shmn by a r i s e i n output meter reading. Adjust the s i p 1 generator accurately t o t h i s setting,
Re-ad just the si,ml generator output level u n t i l tllc output meter reading i s again 500 miil.
Check tha t the signal generator output level i s ncvi greater than i t s original se t t ing by 95 dB or more.
Repeat the procedure f o r the other frequencies l i s t ed i n the table under "Test requirementt', and check that the appropriate image reject ion figure i n decibels i s obtained.
NoB. Vhen A.P.54704/~ signal generator is used, the r s s u l t i s - not all-jays accurate, due t o the mismatch which occurs vihen the attenuator i s st-iitched to "mV x -100".
Thls Sheet issued with A,L. No, 1 August 19% ~.R,1617 CHAPTER 7
A.G.C. r n O R i l i A N a 3
Test equipment required
5 9.
NOTE 1 : - These xi11 be required if A.P. 54704/~ Signdl Generator is used.
NOTE 2: - Required if CT218 Signal Generator i s used. Provided i n the "Box Stowage for connectors for CT32 Noise en era tor".
I
A.P.
1 OS/I 6780 5 4 7 0 6 ~
-"
ZD. 00022
54708
Description b
S i p l Genem t or covering around I LIC/ s
Output bheter ~ 6 t h Connector (see para. 16)
Test requirement
Identity
(2218 ih rc oni
Decibel Lieter Portable Noo 3 TF340
60. Thereceiver isadjusted t o ~ i v e a 200d7cutputPr i tha 1 .5micro~ol t input. liodulation i s 3 6 , 1000 c/s ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 ) or 400 c/s (A.P.%~o~/A).
The ingut a t the receiver is increased from 1.5 microvolt to 10 n i l l ivo l t s (i. e. by 77 d ~ ) . The receiver output should not change by more than 3.5 dB a t any point betvieen the two input voltage levels.
Attenuat or 'i SeeNote1 connector I'
,I i
N. B. When using X.P. 54704/~ Signal Generator, the output a t t enuat or should - be set to 15 microvolts and 100 millivolts respectively, due t o the use of the Attenuator AoP.63693.
- a
I 63693 1 63691
649 60 Connect or See Note 2 i~
a
The D r i l l
6 1 STEP -
RECEIVER
0 4 0 /A /B/C/D
A.P. 63693 A.P. 63691 ATTENUATOR CONNECTOR
> SPECIAL CONNECTOR
PL IOI ' ( S E E PARA 53b)
OUTPUT METER
SIGNAL GENERATOR
CT 218
REQUIRED FOR USE ONLY WITH AP.54704A SIC. CEN.
< b o o n
AP.64960 CONNECTOR
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION D I A G R A M
RECEIVER controls as f o l l a ~ s : -
FIG. 7
(1 ) ANTI-CROSS-lliOD. control - fully clockvrise
(2) CRYSTAL switch - OH?
(4) OUTFUT switch a t back of receiver - toggle toward back of receiver
- om
- f i l l y clockwise
A. G. C. SWITCH
- m
RECEIVER
W/A
MNDITIDTH WITCH
N a r r o ~
SYSTmI SJITCH
&'T
&OB/C/D 3 kc/s R/r L
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956 B.R. 1617 CHAFTER 7
STEP - 2 Signal Generat or controls : -
(I) Output level - 1.5 microvolt ( ~ 1 ~ 2 1 8 ) 15 rmcrovolt s (A. P. 54704 A)
(3) Frequency - tune t o receiver frequency of 1.05 bic/s, as indicated by miximum cutput rnetsr reading.
Adjust receiver AF GAIN control ( ~ 2 2 4 ) t o give a reading of 200 m i l l i ~ ~ a t t s i n the output meter.
SloVily increase the signal generator output voltage in convenient steps L ~ C O tiues , 1. e. by 77 dB ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 , t 0 10 mmll~volts, A.Pa5470@ t o 00 millivolts). Check that output rceter reading does not Increase by nore than 3.5 dB a t any point between the hi-o voltage output limits.
ANT I -CROSS-LIoDuLflTIOI\3
Test Equipment required
Signal Generator covering around I iiic/s
Output l,ieter x i t h Connector ( s e e para. 16)
.Atternator
Connector 1 Connector See Note 2
Identity A. Pa
NOTE 1 : - These u ~ i l l be required if A.P. 54704/~ Signal Generator i s used.
Decibel i.,Aeter Portable
No. 3 TF340
NOTZ 2: - Required i f CT218 Signal Generator i s ustd, 2rovided i n the 'Box Stmiage for connectors fo r CT32 do se Generator'.
ZD, 00022
54708
Test requirement
63 (a) With the ANTI-CROSS-IiODUIdTIW control fully cloch-ise (maximum gain
position) receiver gain is adjusted s o that 1-iith an input of 100 microvolts (CT218) o r 1 millivolt (A.P. 54704/A), an output of 500 mil l iv~atts i s obtained,
(b) Turn the ANTI-CROSS-E/iODULATIm control fully anti-c loc la- a s e , Increase the output of t h e s ig ra l generator u n t i l the output ire t e r again reads 500 dT, and check that the signal generator output i s nm- a t leas t 15 dB greater than in (a) i. e. 560 microvolts ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 ) or 5.6 millivolts (A* P* 5470d-A)
1 AP.63693 AP63.91 ATTENUATOR CONNECTOR
REQUIRED FOR USE ONLY WITH A.P54704A SIC GEN
SIGNAL GENERATOR
CT 218
TEST E Q U I P M E N T CONNECTION D I A G R A M
2 b o o n
\ SPECIAL CONNECTOR
PL 101 ' ( S E E PARA 53b)
A Pb4960 CONNECTOR
The Drill
RECEIVER
B 4 0 /A/B/C/D
STEP 64. ?ROC~URE:
I
OUTPUT METER
I RECEIVDi controls as f 01 lovis : - ( 1 ) ANTI-CROS4.iJOD. control - fully clockviise
FIG. 8
(2 ) CRYSTAL sviitch - OFF
This Sheet issued with 6.L. No. 1 tlugust 1956
STW - PF.OCEDURE
( 3 ) LIiiiITER switch - OFF
(4) UIUDSPEAK3R miitch - CN
(5) AJ? GAIN control - f'ully clockwise ( ~ ~ 2 2 4 )
(6) TUNE t o 1.05 AC/S
(7) --
(8) OUTEUT %--itch a t r e a r of receiver, toggle t o r ea r of set.
RECEIDB
B ~ O / A
B~OB/C/D
Signal Generator controls a s f mllom-s : - (I ) Tune t o 1.05 iilc/s, unmodulated, exactly t o zero beat as
indicated by zero output meter reading.
( 2 ) O u t p t to 100 microvolts (1 mill ivol t ~ . ~ . 5 4 7 0 4 / ~ Siga Gene j
1
A. G. C. SII'ITCH -.-
- Om
--A
BANDilIDTH SviITCH
Narrow
3 kc/s
&O/A - Manual, but detune receiver f o r iraximum "audiot' output .
SYSTIQI SiIITCH
1 ianua 1
Tune
&OD - FSK NARROII LC&$
Ad just GAIN control (~~305 /309) for a reading of 500 rnillivcatts i n the output meter,
~ l s e . ANTI-CROSS-1:IOD. control f i l l y anti-clockv-'
Increase signal generator uutput u n t l l output meter a ~ a i n reads 500 mi:.
Check that signal generator output has increased by a t l e a s t 15 dB i. e. a t leas t 560 microvolts, or 5.6 millivolts, depcndlw upon the signal generator employed.
CRYSTAL C m T R O m OPXRATIrn
Te st Equipment required
65.
NOTE:- - Provided ~ i t h connectors f o r CT32 Noise Generator.
Test requirement
>
A, P.
10~/1 6780 54704/~
a960 --
Description
66. Vith a suitable crystal of frequency Fc plugged in, the receiver should operate, crystal controlled, a t n.Fc - 500 kc/s, rihcre n i s 1, 2, 3 o r 4
e.g. Fc = 2.5 llc/s.
Identity
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FIG. 9
The D r i l l
Signal Generator covering 2 &/s - 10 ik/s
Comecat;or - See Note
STEP 67.
I
CT218 1.h rconi
I
mCEIvEEl controls as fol loi~s: - ( 1 ) AI'ITI-CROSS-;iOD. control - ful ly cloch-iise
(2) CRYSTAL sc~itch - to ON. Note that ~ a r n i n g lamp should work.
his Sheet issued with il.L, NO. 1 nugust 1956
STEP
B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7
(3) Plug-in a crystal of any frequency, € 0 g. 2.5 k i d s
(4) OUTXJT sn-itch a t back of receiver - toggle toviards front of receiver
(5) L;fll;ITTER a-iitch - 03'3'
( 6 ) LOUDSEEAKER mi-itc h - toON
(71 GAIN controls - ad just f o r adequate loudspeaker autput.
(8)
Signal Generat or controls : -
- >
(1 ) C.lT. operation
( 2 ) Output levcl - 10 microvolts (il.p.54704~) - 1 microvolt ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 )
A. G. C. STCITCH I
( 3 ) Tune t o Fc - 500 kq/s (2000 kc/s)
Tune receiver t o Fc - 500 kc/s (2000 kc/s) then tune signal generator t o receiver frequency a s indicated by mxirmm volume in the loudspeaker. Tune the receiver around t h i s frequency and check that a note i s obtained, vhich varies m amplitude but not i n pitch. The receiver is then operating crystal controlled.
W/A
BANDVtIDTH STJITCH
Repeat the operation a t tvjice, three and four times the crystal frequency (2, 3 and 4 Fc - 500 kc/s). Using the crys ta l quoted t h i s riould be a t 4.5 i:ic/s, 7 ~ c / s and 9.5 Lic/s.
T
SYSTEU 3 I I T CH
3 kc/s Tune
Narrow lil'ianual
NOISE LIi'iIITER ACTION
Test Equi~mf3n-t reauired
NOTE 1 : - This mill be required if A.P. 54704A Signal Generator is used.
NOTE 2:- This w i l l be required f o r use viith CT218,
Test re quirement
69. !;hen a signal of 2OOpV ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 ) or 1000,m'V (A.P. 54704~) moiulated a t 1000 o r 400 CIS, the mdulat ion depth being any value between
and 6 6 , i s applied t o the mixer valve grid, the l imi ter control i s effect ive i n i t s l imiting action,
t I
Description
Signal Generat or covering around 0.67 ~ic/s
CONNECTOR A.P. b3b92 FOR USE WITH A.P. 5 4 7 0 4 A SIGNAL GENERATOR
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Ident i ty
(221 8 Idarc oni
\
FIG. 10
A. I?.
IOS/I 6780 54704A
. - .-,
Oscilloscope
Attenuatcr See Note 1
Connector
Connecting lead with attenuator. A s supplied with CT218
See Note Z
CATHODE RAY osc lLL0SCOPE
Al E
JK 3 0 1
7-5- I1
E RECEIVER
Connector consisting of a phone jack (A.P. 650/1) connected t o a twisted pa i r (see para. 53(c)). i
-
I
.
I C L I P
\
SIGNAL GENERATOR C T 218
l 0 ~ / 8 3 1
63 693
63692
B ~O/A/B/C/D
7 . 5 ~
J IS
CROCODILE
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
The D r i l l
70. STEP PROCEDURE:
I Set RECEIVER controls a s fol1ovis:-
( I ) CRYSTAL m-itch - . Remove crystal
( 2 ) SYSTEM snitch - R/T
(4) OUTEUT sviitch a t back of receiver, toggle tmi-ards rear of receiver.
(5) LOUDSPEAKER switch - OFF
( 6 ) GAIN control - t o give suitable amplitude of trace ~ i i t h ~ ~ t distort ion
(7) AF GAIN control - ful ly cloclcvriise
(8) TUNE t o 0.67 kic/s.
2 Set Signal Generat or controls as f ollavs: -
REmIVER
~ 4 0 / ~
%OB/C/D
Frequency - 500 kc/s
Modul2tion Depth - I G a
EUNEV'IIDTH SVITCH
Vide
8 kc/s
Output level - 1 000 microvolts A. Po 54704.A 200 microvolts CT218
'r
A,G. C, SVITCH
. ON
Connect output v i aa0 .01 capacitor (alreadyincomorated i n A.P. 54704A Sigral Gene lead) t o the receiver mixer grid.
3 Set oscilloscope controls as fo1lo~is:-
Trig. Sync. to Yl
Velocity range q00 c/s
Fine velocity u suitable value
Y Plate selector - Al , A2
STEP PROCEDURE
Tune the signal gcncrator exactly t o the receiver IF as sham by maximum hcight of trace on the c.r.t. Adjust the oscilloscope "Y" plate amplifier control fo r a convenient hoight of trace.
Switch the receiver LMCTER switch t o "CN", Check that the LIMITER control i s effective, as indicated by a reduction i n the amplitude of the trace on the c.r.t., when the limiter control i s operated,
By steps, increase the mdulation depth up' t o a maximum of 6@, checking the effectiveness of the LIMITER control a t each step.
Test Equipment required
71.
Special Items
72, A 100/1 voltage divider should be m d e up as follows: -
Description
Audio Frequency T est Oscillator capable of operating a t 1 kc/s
OuQut ivieter
T O A F OSCILLATOR C
$ 68 TO RECEIVER
I d entity I
G. 205
Decibel Meter Portable
No. 3 TF340
100/1 VOLT,ACE DIVIDER
Am P.
W. 7252
ZD. 00022
54708
FIG. I I
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 .B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7.
Test requirement
73. F o r a receiver output of 500millivratts, the input t o t h e g r i d of the first AI? valve should be not greater than 0.15 volts, a t 1000 c/s .
NOTE 1:- Vith the t e s t equipment connected a s sham, the output voltage a t the AF o s c i l l a t o r should be 15 volts,
NOTE 2:- It is necessary t o remove the AF and Power Unit from t h e receiver i n o r d e r t o carry out t h i s test .
TEST EQUIPMENT 'CONNECTION DIAGRAM FIG. 12
A F OSCILLATOR C 2 0 5
The D r i l l
RECE1V.R B 40 /A / B/C/D POWER UNIT
1 PIN 8
O S K 3 0 1 SK302 OUTPUT METER
4
Remove the AF and Poa-zr Unit from the receiver. Reconnect the mains plug. Connect up the t e s t equipment.
b
On a l l patterns of the receiver, connect pins 1 and 9 of SK302.
On B~O/A, connect pins 5 and 6 of SKJOI.
Switch on, and a l lm 15 minutes t o warm through.
AF osci l la tor frequency, 1000 c/s.
Adjust the AF osc i l l a to r nitput leve l so t h a t the output meter reads 500 milliwatt s. The osc i l la tor output, should be not more than 15 volts.
ADJACENT Cw\JZL SEUCTIVITY - - - i.ZTHOD USEiG SIGNAL G ~ . R A T O 2 . . AP OSCILiATOR - - AID OU!TPUT 1 ST=
Test Equipment required
75 4 - --
I Instrument I Title I A.P.
S ig~xi l Generat or covering 500 kc/s 1 O S / ~ 6780 ibis rc oni
---- r 1 I
I Oscil lator I I) I 11.7252 -.- ,
Decibel iiet er Portable
NO. 3 Output Bmer ibieter TF34.0
I See Note Connect o r
ZD. 00022
54708
PiOTE: - For use w i t h A.P. 54704/11 Signal Generator - . . .
Additional e&pment
76.(a) A 0.01 rnfd capacitcrr vfith a crocod i le clip on each lead. (~40/A only).
(b) A coaxial plug ( ~ ~ ~ ~ 6 0 0 4 6 ) connected t o a sui table length of coaxial cable (see Chap. 6, Para. 6).
T e s t requirement
77. The m i n i m acceptable bandwidth a t 6 dB dmin, and the mximu~~ a ~ s e ~ t ~ ~ l s l e bar-dii-idth a t 40 dB dam for each pos i t ion of the BAHDh't'IDTH
%itch i s a s fo1lmis:- I
ileceiver B ~ O / A I Receiver BWB/C/D Respons e . -
@ - k v e 1 N a r r m- 'ifid e 1 kc/s 3 kc/s 8 kc/s
I 1
I kc/s 2.5 kc/s 8 kc/s
I 1
kc's
I 25
4
" kc/s positiontt measured a t 30 dB dm-n
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 BaRa1617 CHAPTER 7
USED I N STEP I 2
SIGNAL GENERATOR CT 218
The D r i l l
B ~ O / B / C / D ONLY AVOMETER FJ
NOTE 1- IF A.P54704 A SIGNAL GENERATOR IS USED, 'HE CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SIGNAL GENERATOR AND THE GRID OF THE MIXER VALVE IS MADE THROUGH THE A P.63693 ATTENUATOR AND A.P. 65692 CONNECTOR.
* CROCODILE CLIPS FITTED
FIG. 13Q) TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
FRONT O F RECEIVER CONNECTION TO CONTROL ,, ii,RID O F \lxER VALVE ~ [ I o ~ )
EXTREME LEFT
1
NEXT T O LEFT COIL ASSEMBLY COIL ASSEMBLY
(M XER VALVE)
Receiver settings as follo~p-s: -
REMAINDER O F 'TURRET COIL A
OUTPUT switch tmards rear of receiver
FIG. 13(b
ANTI -CROSS-MOD. control fu l ly cloch-iise
1ROCEDUFtE
CRYSTAL switch ON, c rys ta l removed
A.G.C. m i t ch t o OFF
NOISE IJIviiTER t o OFF
LOUDSPEAKER mi t ch t o ON
GAIN a d AJ? GAIN controls f i l l y clocbiise
SYSTEld switch t o TUTE
BANDVIIIXPH switch to PJAREiOTii or 3 kc/s
TUNE receiver t o 0.67 ii~c/s
Calibrate the signal generator incremental or logging scale as f ollmis : -
(a) A . P . ~ & ~ o ~ A - follow the instructions contained i n the Signal Generator Handbook, o r use a methcd similar t o that given below.
(4) Set the signal generator output t o approximtely 50 microvolts, and connect t o mixer grid, no modulation.
( 2 ) Tune the signal generator accurately f o r zero beat a t 500 kc/s as indicated by the output meter. Note the lobging scale reading, and identify this reading as (A).
(3 ) Increase the signal generat or f'requency u n t i l the audio note i s approximately 1000 Js.
(4) Receiver SYS'PELi m-itch t o R/T. Signal generator t o modulate 3C$i a t 1000 c/s.
(5) Compare the 1000 c/s note rf i th the audio note heard i n c 3 ) above.
( 6 ) Switch off signa 1 gene ra t o r modulation. SYSTEXvi switch t o TUNE. A d Just khe signal generator frequency and repeat steps 4 and 5 a s necessary u n t i l the two notes are eqgal i n pitch.
(7) Note the logging scale reading, and identify t h i s reading as (B).
The difference between readings (A) and (B) represents .I000 C/S (1 kc/s).
Greater accuracy can be achieved by repeating the procedure viith the signal generator 1 kc/s be lm the zero beat frequency (see (3) above), and tak ing an average of the two results.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7
STEP - PROCEDURE
3 SYSTEXI switch t o CAL.
Adjust signal generator frequency for zero beat a s observed i n the output meter,
Signal enerator output level t o 50 microvolts ( ~ ~ 2 1 8 ) or 250pV ?A. P. 54704/~).
SYSTEM switch t o TUNE
A n y note heard represents an error i n b. f. 0. alignment, and i f t h i s note i s higher i n pi tch than a low "burr", the b. f. o. should be re-aligned,
Ad just the signal generator accurately for zero beat.
SYSTaL switch to R+/T (&oB/c/D), IUNUAL ( ~ 4 0 / ~ ) . I n &O/U, stop b.f.0. oscillating by connecting an 0.01 capacitor betvieen b.f.0. valve grid and chassls. p Switch signal generator to modulate, 3 ~ 2 , CT218 - 1090 c/ s
A,P.~&~o~/A - 400 c/s
Ad just AF GA7N to give suitable receiver output i. e. 100 inilliwatts.
Increase signal generator output voltage by 6 dB i. e. from 50 microwlts t o 100 microvolts (o r 250 t o 500 microvolts for A.P. 54704/~). Detune the sl-1 generator un t i l the receiver output f a l l s t o the orlginal level. h ote cdrefully the amount of detuning on the incremental o r lo&blng scale, and convert th i s reading to kc/s.
Repeat, detuning the signal generator i n the opposite direction. The sum of the ~II-o frequencies derlved from the incremental scale readings, gives the bandwidth a t 6 dB d m . This should be greater than 2.5 kc/s.
Repeat steps (7) (8) and ( 9 ) , but t h i s time increase the input by 40 dB i.e. from 50 microvolts to 5 millivolts (250 V to 25 mV fo r A.P. 54704/~,, a f t e r detuning the s ig l a l gene P ator so that the ~ u t p u t meter i s not dhmaged. head off from the incremental scale readings, the bandw-idth a t 40 dB. It should be l ess than 9 kc/s.
Repeat steps (5) t o (10) inclusive, with recelver BAAXIMPH t o 8 kc/s or VIDE. I n t h i s case, the bandwidth 6 dB dmn shculd be greater than 8 kc/s, and h e bmih;-idth 40 dB d m should be less than 25 kc/s.
STEP - -I 2 I n the case of B~OB/C/D, t o check the receiver bandwidth i n
the 1 kc/s position, the output meter should be disconnected and a idodel 8 (high resistance) Avometer connected t o read second detector current. The connection of the Avometer i s fu l ly described i n Chapter 6 ?ara. 23.3. (2) under Crystal F i l t e r Alignment. The follo~rving proced-me should be carried out using the Avometer for measuring receiver autput,
(I) i"?ith the Avometer disconnected, se t receiver BANDTImH miitch t o I kc/s and SYSWVI switch t o GAL. Switch OFF signal generator modulation, and ad just i ts tuning for zero beat, as heard i n the monitor loudspeaker, Note the logging scale readirg.
(2 ) SYSTSi switch t o R/T. Connect Avometer and adjust the s ignal input voltage t o obtain a reading of 50 microamps i n the Avometer (sliiltched t o the correct current range - 2 5 0 ~ ) . Care must be taken when using the ueter t o ensure tha it is not damged by overloading.
(3) Increase the signal input voltage t o tviice i t s original se t t ing ( 6 d ~ ) , and increase the signal generator frequency u n t i l the reading i n the Avometer i s again 50 microamps. Carefully note the amount of de-tuning on the logging scale and convert the reading t o CIS.
(4) Decrease the signal generator frequency t o the set t ing below 500 kc/s J-i-here the Avolneter again reads 50 microamps. Note the frequency on the logging scale, and convert t o Js.
(5) The b-io f r e uencies so obtained are added together and should exceed 'l kc 7 s.
( 6 ) Tune the signal genemtor t o 500 kc/s and repeat the procedure, but th l s t une lncrease the signal input voltage 30 times (30 dB approx.). The bandwidth a t t h i s level should not exceed 5 kc/s.
Important. Vhen making t h i s t e s t it i s essential tha t the signal generator i s de-tuned over 5 kc/s before =king the voltage increase, both above and below 500 kc/s, t o avoid damging the rileten
79. Por those ships and dockyards 1-iho my possess a ganging osci l lator , such as the Cossw i.~odel A. P.5470.7, a quicker method is available. The
shape of the response curves which should be seen, i s given i n Fig. 15.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956
Test Equipment required
B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7
Addi t ional equipment
Instrument T i t l e A. P.
81. A O.Ol /uF czpci tor w i t h a crocodile c l ip a t each end. @or use with W-O/A only.)
Frequency swept Oscillator covering 500 kc/s
+
Oscilloscope
Connectors of suitable length made up from any convenient unirad io ( screened) cable.
FREQUENCY- SWEPT OSCILLATOR
TO GRID OF MIXER VALVE
Coss hi od el
I
Type 13A
LIMITER CONTROL TAG (SEE F I G . I ~ C )
54707
10~/83 1 J
+CROCODILE CLIPS FITTED
FIG. 14@) TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
The Drill
82, STEP - I
RIGHT HAND SIDE OF RECEIVER (I.F. SIDE) :-+rjHG;&
GREEN BLACK LEAD LEAD
EARTH TO A l 1 E RMINAL ON C R O
CONNECTION TO RECEIVER FROM C RO
FIG. 14(B
Receiver settings: - (I) OUTPUT switch t m r d s front of receiver.
(2) ANTI-CROSS MOD. control fully c l o c ~ i s e .
(3) CRYSTAL m-itch t o CN, crystal removed.
(4) SYSTEM switch t o CAL
(5) LOUDSPEAKER switch to OFF.
( 6 ) AF GAW control fully clockwise (~~224).
(7) GAIX control, ad just for reasonable output i n the telephones;.
This Sheet issued with A,L. No. 1 August 1956 B,R,1617 CHAPTER 7
PROCEDURE STEP - (8)
( 10) Plug i n Telephones
Ganging oscillator settings:-
A, G. C. SiJITCH - - CN
RECEWn
W/A
BK)B/C/D
(1) Frequency - 500 kc/s. Adjust tuning s l ight ly un t i l zero beat i s heard i n the telephones. Leave the -tuning d ia l a t th i s setting.
EW~JIDTH SVJITCH
Narrow
3 k d s
(2 ) Bandwidth - 20 kc/s.
Oscilloscope settings : - (1) Trig. Sync. - EXT
(2) Velacity Range - 10 c / s
( 3 ) Fine Velocity - A s low as convenient
(4) Cal. iviarkers - OFF
(5) Y Plate Selectca. - A l , A 2
SYSTEli m-itch BW/A - MANUAL Short the grid of the b.f, o. valve t o earth by a 0.01 capacitor.
WB/C/D - q / ~ r"F Ad just GAIN control fo r reasonable picture amplitude i n c. r. t.
Do not overload the receiver
Ad just the A4 gain control on the oscilloscope t o give a convenient measurable deflection on the grat icule.
Inspect the IF response curve displayed i n the c.r. t., for symmetry. Re-alignment must be undertaken i f the skir ts are noticeably as,yrrr::e t r ic ,
Measure the bandwidth across the response curve a t the point where the a q l i t u d e has dropped to ha19 the value of the centre-frequency (500 kc/s) amplitude L e e a t the 6 dB dmm points. The horizontal frequency scale m y be calibrated by the 20 kc/s length of the oscilloscope time-base.
STEP
Repeat the above procedure, with the BANIXKCDlX switch in the follovfing positions : -
The curves shuuld be shaped similarly t o those i l lustrated i n Fig. 15. It is especially important that the 1 kc/s curve should be accurate.
Receivers which f a i l to satisfy the t e s t should have the IF stages re-aligned.
I.F. RESPONSE CURVES
INCREMtNTAL TUNING
RESPONSE - CRYSTAL FILTER' FIG- 15
Ttfs S h z e t Sssued with A.L. No. 2 October 1937
IF GAIN ~ I I E A S W I ~ T S
B. R. 1 617 CHAPTER 7
Test Equipment required
83.
NOTE 1: - This w i l l be reqyired if A.P.54704/~ Signal Generator is used.
Description of instrument
Signal Gene rator capable of operation a t 500 kc/s, and modulation of 400 o r 1000 cycles per second a t 3@
Output Meter with Output Connector (see para. 16)
Connector See Note 2
Connecting lead with attenuator See Note I
NOTE 2:- This i s supplied with CT218 Signal Generator.
Test re auirement
Identi ty
CT218
Marconi
Decibel Meter Port able No, 3 W3kD
I)
-
84. I n order t o produce a reading of 500 milliwatts i n the output meter, a signal a t 500 kc/s modulated 30419, injected by the signal generator a t the
grid of the mixer valve, must not exceed the following: -
A P. --
IOS/I 6780
547a-b
ZD.00022
54708
--.
63 692/3 I
B A N D B r n SvVITCN: POSITION
NARROW o r 3 kc/s
WIDE, or 8 kc/s
INPUT VOLX'AGE -
CT23 8
50 microvolts
100 microvolts
A. Po 5 4704/~ - 4 250 microvolts
500 microvolts -1
TO CHASSIS *I
SIGNAL GENERATOR' CT 218 ' TO GRID
OF MIXER
CONNECTING LEAD WITH ATTENUATOR
CONNECTOR AP 63692
v* (FOR USE ONLY WITH
AP 54704A SIGNAL GENERATOR)
ih CROCODILE CLIPS FITTED
FIG-.' 16 TEST EQUl PMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
\)
The D r i l l
85. - STEP PROCEDURE
I Receiver controls as follows : - (1 ) ANTI-CROSS-MOD. control fully clockwise
(2) CRYST& switch - ON, with crystal removed
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
( 3 ) SYSTm switch - CAL.
OUTPUT METER
-0
.Q . . J
(4) LIMITER switch - 025' (5) OUTPUT switch (.at back of receiver) - toggle toward rear
of receiver
(6) LOUDSPEAKJ3R switch - ON
(7) GAIN control - fully clockwise
(8) AF GAIN control - f d l y clockwise
I RECEIVER I BANDWIDTH SViITCH I . A. G. C. SWITCH I r I
Narrow
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 2 October 1957 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7
STEP - PROCEDURE
2 Signal Gene ra t or control s as follows : - Operate on C, W.
Tune to 500 kc/s, and tune exactly f o r zero reading i n the output meter. (zero beat with receiver calibrator. )
Receiver controls
Monitor L.S. switch - O F F
SYSTEU switch - R/T Signal Generator controls
Modulate carr ier a t 1000 or 400 cycles, per secona, J@
Output - adjust output level f o r a reading of 500 milliwatts i n the output meter. Check that signal generator output voltage does not exceed the figures quoted i n the table below.
RECEIVER BANDTdIDTH SWITCH t 0: -
Adjust the signal generator output Eor a reading of 500 milliwatts i n the output rreter.
Check that the signal generator output voltage does not exceed the figures given in [the table below:-
A. Pa 54704.h -
250 microvolts - 500 micro-~ol t s
I
BANDVJrnH STiITCH
3 kc/s
8 kc/s :
CT218
50 microvoits
100 microvolts
IF STAGE GAIW
PART 2-
I st. 2nd OR VALVES
SIGNAL GENERATOR C T 2 l 8
CONNECTOR A.P.63692 '
(b) --* (FOR USE ONLY WITH A.P 54704A SIGNAL GENERATOR)
% CROCODliE CLIPS FITTED.
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
FIG. 17 TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
1
0 4 0 1 ~ /B/C/D
lST i.F. TRANSFORMER T R I04
OUTPUT METER
b o o n
(ON FAR SIDE OF RECEIVER)
FRONT OF RECEIVER
NOTE :- I. FIN 6 MAY BE IDENTlFlED BY THE GREEN COVERED WIRE CONNECTED TO IT.
2. IN THE CASE OF 840D, THE GRID PIN IS PIN I. (SEE FIG 2 CHAPTER 6 )
* IN B ~ O / A , THE ITEM MARKED IS NOT FITTED. TR 201 IS FITTED IN THE POSITION SHOWN OCCUPIED BY @ AND L 201 IN THE PLACE SHOWN OCCUPIED BY TR 201.
FIG. 18
T h i s Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 7
Te st requirement
86. A500 kc/s signal, modulated3Gat 4.00 orlOOOcyclesper second, i s applied t o the grids of the three IF valves i n turn, to give a receiver
autgut of 500 a.
I L
125 microvolts 600 microvolts -I 7 Point
I Test
For a receiver output of 500 milliviatts, the input should not exceed the figures given i n the Table above.
Input level t o a l l patterns of I340
w refer to Fig. 17(c) fo r detai ls of CT218 connsction to SK201.
m21 S
45 t t
800 ---- i
I t --I
L I
The D r i l l
. - . - - - - . - A. P. 54704/A
V202
V2O3
STEP 87. --
I I
11 millivolts
I00 millivolts ( amrox. 1
PROCEDURE
Receiver controls as follom: - (1 ) ANTI-CROSS-liOD. control - 2ully clockvjise
(2) CRYSTAL switch - ON, Rer,love crystal
(3 ) SYSTEZ.1 switch - GAL.
CITER switch (4) - L r n (5) OUTiUT svvitch a t back of receiver, t o ~ l e tmards
back of receiver
(6) LOUDSP- switch - CW
(7) GBm control - fu l ly clockxV5se
(6) GAIN coiltrol - ful ly c loch ise
( 9 ) r-
RECEIVER
W/A
--- BANDb;rIDi!HS71TCli I A.G.C. Sl:ITGi I
Narro~i - i
STEP - 2 Signal Generator controls a s follons : -
Tune to 500 kc/s, and tune for zero reading i n the output r i ~ t e r . (zero beat ~ i t h receiver calibrator)
Receiver controls as %ollm~s:-
MUNITOR IOUDSFEUXR switch - OEI%
EU+O/A - SYSTEM smitch t o I&WUAL capacitor be-keen the grid
valve and chassis. (see Fig. 18) S h o r t c i r c u i t R.223.
B ~ + o ~ c / D - SYSTEiL switch t o R/T Signal Generator controls as f o 1 l m : -
Modulation - 400 c/s or 1 0 0 4 s (as applicable) 3C$; depth of modulation.
Connect the signal generator atput via the 0.01 6" capacitor - (N.B. This i s "built-in" i n Connect r AeP.63692) - t o the grid of the third IF valve, (~203) . Check that an output of 500 r L i i l l i w a t t s can be obtained n%th less than the signal inpuf specified in the chart under "Test requirement".
Repeat the procedure i n (5) with the signal generator output connected successively t o the grid of the second and f i r s t IF valves.
Repeat the procedure i n (5) with the signal generator output connected beween pins 2 and 3 of SK201 with PLIOJ removed (see Fig. 17(c)).
Test equipment requlred
88.
4
Description of instrument
Signal Generator covering 1 lv~~/s t o 24 l!lc/ s
Output ldeter and Connector (see para. 16)
Coniiector - For use with CT218
Connecting lead with a t t emat or I ~ ~ i i t h CT218 / ! .- - I
Identity
m218 lviarconi
Decibel hieter Portable Noe 3
m340
-
.- AmPe
-...... - I 0s/i 6780 54704/~
ZDo 00022
54708 --
64960
Supplied
This Sheet issued with A.L, N o , 1 August 1956 E.R.1617 CHLPTER 7
The f o l l o v i i ~ ~ additional i t e m v v i l l be required i f A.2.5470W Signal Generator i s used:-
Connect o r - A. P. 63692 (i~on-aerial inputs)
Connector - A.P. 63691 (Aerial input)
The f o l l ~ ~ i i l g special item is required: - A 68 ohrn & w a t t res is tor , i n ser ies vfith a 0.01 7
capacitor, with crocodile c l ips a t the f ree endfiFig. I 9(c / )
Te s t requirernent
89. (a) The follm-ing tab le gives:-
(i; T'ne equivalent voltage a t the t e s t point, (assuming no atJienuators)
( i i ) The voltage sham on the CT218 output level indicator
and ( i i i ) The voltage shmm on the A.P.~L+~o~/U mtwt indicator
(b j E'or a receiver output of 500 milliwatts, the s ignal input modulated a t 4-00 4 s (~.?.5470k/~) o r 1000 c/s (CT218),at 3@~, should not exceed the figures l a i 6 dovm i n the table,
17- -
1 ISignal Generator Output reading i n microvolts (except "Equivalentrf Col.) I
Breq, / Jiixer Grid ' 2nd RF Valve G r i d Valve Grid ! ,Band l (iiic,s) (Turret Contact l j ) / ( ~ u r r e t Contact 8) Contact j) Aerial -1
T h e variat ion be-hieen the figures given under 'tequivalent", "CT218" and "54704" m y be explained a s follo-its: - Under "ibiixer Grid" and "2nd R3' Valve Grid" I---
( a ) The ftequivalentlt and "CT21G" figures a r e the same, but because the 54704/~ 10:l a t t e n u ~ t o r is not correctly terminated i.e. it i s coimected across a high hpedance, the actual attei~uatioi? i s a2proxir;ately 5:1 in practice.
Under the "1 s t RF Gr id" and "Aerial" -- -.----i.--.-- -- (b, The "54704/~" f i-ure for the I st RT valve is 500 t ines the "equivalent"
figure, due t o t h e 100:l attenuator in the IF stages, and the 5:1 s tep dovm of the incorrect1 mtched k.P.63693 attenuator. ilhen connected t o the aer ia l , the 5J+70d f i w e i s 'i 000 t irnes the '' equivalent" f i w e , since tile attenuator i s now correctly mtched and gives i t s norm1 do:? s tep dmcn in voltage. Due t o the 100:l IF attenuat or, the "CT218" figure is 100 times greater than the "equivalent" figure fo r both the 1s t grid and ae r ia l ~neasurements.
Details of the attenuators employed a re given under the Test Zquipraent Connection Diagrams,
CONNECTOR A.P. 6 3 6 9 2
(b) - 0 1 1 * INPUTS OTHER T H A N AERIAL * CROCODILE CLIPS FITTED
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
O U T P U T METER
( 0 ) P L l O l
NOTE 1- THE I.F. ATTENUATOR I S CONNECTED BETWEEN THE ZND. 1.F VALVE G R I D A N D CHASSIS, I N TESTS WHERE THE SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED T O THE IST. R.F VALVE G R I D O R T O THE AERIAL.
1.F ATTENUATOR i . e . THE LAST T W O COLUMNS I N THE TABLE
FIG. 19 TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM
B ~ O / A / B / C / D
I
CONNECTOR APb3691
(AERIAL INPUT)
A.P. 63693 - O 6 0 0 n
SIGNAL GENERATOR A.P. 5 4 7 0 4 A
ATTENUATOR
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956 B.R. 1617 CHAPTER 7
+ CROCODILE CLIPS FITTED.
I **
I F. ATTENUATOR
CONNECTING LEAD WITH ATTENUATOR
NOTE:- THE I.F. ATTENUATOR IS COHNECTED BETWEEN THE ~ N D . 1.F VALVE GRID AND CHASSIS, IN TESTS WHERE THE SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO THE Isr. R.F. VALVE GRID, OR TO THE AERIAL CONNECTOR
i.8. THE LAST TWO COLUMNS IN THE TABLE.
FIG. 20 TEST EQUIPMENT CONN ECTION DIAGRAM
The D r i l l
STEP 91
I Receiver controls a s f ol lms: - ( 1 ) ANTI-CXOSPPI~OD. control - fully clockxise
(2) CRYSTAL sm5tch = O F F
(3) OUTRTT switch a t kick of receiver - toggle toviards back of receiver
(4) LCHJDSPEAIW switch
(5) GAD? control
(6) AF GAIN control
- OFF
- filly cloch-rise
- fully cloch45.se
STEP -
NOTE:- W/A - stop b.f.0. valve oscillating by connecting - capacitor between ib grid and chassis.
Signal Genemtor controls as f ollms : -
( 8 )
(I) Zodulation = GT218, 1000 c/a AP.54704A1 400 CIS 3@
RECEIVER BA3iDtQIDTH S J n C H
Narrm
(2) OU-t - Connect to receiver mixer grid , using the appropriate connector.
(3) Tune t o 1.05 ws, and adjust tuning for maximum output meter mading.
SYSTEM SWmCH
libnual
S i g n a l Generator output level t o give an atput meter reading of 500 dl1imtta. Check that this output level does not exceed the figure speci f ied i n the table for the signal generator in use.
A. G.C. SJITCH
L.
3 kc/s WT
Repeat the prooedure, with the signal generatar connected i n turn t o the aecord RF valve gr id , the f i r s t RF valve a i d , and lastly, t o the aefial ~o'nnector, employing the connectors a d a t t e m t o r s specified.
m
Repeat the whole procedure for the remaining four frequency bands.
I
I OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT 2'DR.F.GR~D 1 1 r R 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ CIRCUIT
DETAILS OF R.F. COIL ASSEMBLY
FIG. 21
This Sheet issued with A.L. No 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 8
introduction -
Routine Maintenance . . , , , , , . , . . . . Replacement, Connect ion and l!lounting Solder and ?lux . , , , .., ... ... m e *
Xethod of Soldering Trepzration of conductors ,.. ... ..* ... Preparation of Pole Contacts Temporary Iiountings . . . . . . , . , , . , ... Making the connections Cleaning , . . -.. ... ... l . . . . ... ... ... ... IlIounting the F l u p (Fixed, Panel T lounting) .ksembly of the Sockets ( ~ r e e Cable terminating eonneetors) Socket ~lssembly d e t a i l s Specific details of Iiark 4 Connectors f i t t e d to Receiver B40 . . . F i t t i n g the 4 pin liark 4 Socket t o the h e r i a l Cable 1i.P. 4 3831 I\~Iarkl+Plugs and Sockets, Components L i s t ... ... ,.. ...
LIST OF FIGrnS
Para. -
Elark 4 Plug and Socket, Pin ident i f ica t ion I ..issembly of i i iniature Cable v i t h 21lark 4 Socket , . . ... ... 2 .$sserdiLy details Iiark 4 Sockets 3 I1iarlc 4 rjocket connections t o Co-axial Cable . , . ... ... e r n e 4 iiark L, Connectors, Components comprising the f r e e socket
termination i n the order in r-ihich they are placed on the cable 5
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 8
C H A P T E R 8 ----------------- -----------------
R E P A I R D A T A F O R M A R K 4 P L U G S A N D S O C K E T S ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ................................................................................
I n t reduction
1. The range consis ts of nine bas ic sealed rnultipole plugs and sockets accommodated i n small, medium or large s i ze shells. The Receiver BW
i s fitted ~ s i t h three of these plugs and sockets, a l l of them being of the smn-11 s h e l l s ize , a s i l l u s t r a t e d i n Yig . I.
P L 101 AERIALS Z 5 6 0 0 7 0
/ SOCKETS - . - . 7
Z S b 0 0 9 0 2 5 6 0 1 1 0 2 5 6 0 1 2 0
FIG. 1 RECEIVER B 40 A.P 57 I~O/A/B/C MK 4 PLUGS 8 SOCKETS PIN IDENTIFICATIONS
2. These components are norrnally employed as f ixed plugs f o r panel mounting and f r e e sockets f o r terminating connectors. They are
designed fo r use with Vinmetsmall and Metvinsmall cables.
Routine Xaint enance
!-hen mating f ixed and f r e e items, care should be taken t o ensure tha t the free item is f u l l y engased. The coupling nut should be tightened a s f a r a s possible by hand; spanners should not be used.
(b) Lubrication of Screrr Threzds
Screq:$ threads should be l i & t l y coated with Grease . \n t i=3eiz ing -I-. 2.556.
( c ) Te-sting
The use of prods x i t h sharp points f o r t e s t ing o r other purpose should be avoided. The t e s t connections should be made t o simulate the normal engagements of the mating contact.
Replacement, Connection and Mountin8
4-. General
The miniature cables used ~ 5 t h these plugs and sockets are insulated WLth polythene; care must be taken, therefore, t o avoid damaging this
w i t h t h e heat o f t h e soldering operation, The campact design a l so necess- i t a t e s especial care i n soldering. Eorrever, i f due a t ten t ion is paid t o the methoa-s l a i d down i n the folloi7cing procedure, l i t t l e d i f f i c u l t y w i l l be experienced.
Solder and Flux
5. _!. good qual i ty solder 77dth r e s in core should be used
Metho6 . of Soldering
6. (a) One pole of a su i tab le transformer (.lpprox: 1 Volt, 80 imps) o r ba t t e ry of similar rating, is connected by means of a mating item, o r contact t o the contact t o be soldered. The other pole i s connected through a f l ex ib l e lead t o a metal or carbon penci l b i t , a;i~pmximately a quarter of an inch i n diameter tapering t o a ch i se l point; aluminium has been found t o be a sui table material f o r t h i s b i t . I n soldering, the b i t i s applied firmly t o the surface of the pa r t t o be soldered, i s thus heated by the current which f l o ~ - ~ s ,
(b) An e l ec t r i c , or h i& pressure gas soldering i ron with a similar penci l b i t , tinned on one face only may be used but w i l l be found t o be l e s s convenient. The heat fram the gas i r o n should be cor rec t ly adjusted by experinent.
preparation of Conduct o m
7. (a) The eads of the cable should be i n accordance ~ 5 t h the cable connection d e t a i l s given i n para. 14, If' the insulat ion or any p a r t of the conductors have become damaged, when rernwing a f au l ty plug or socket, i t r r i l l be necessary t o replace the conductor o r cable concerned, The cable should be dram a suf f ic ien t distance throu& the appropriate ou t le t f i t t i n g s t o enable the soldering operation t o be ,prf omned,
(b) See t h a t the insu la t ion of the conductors i s s t r ipped f o r approximately 4 in. aril thebare ends t inned ~5th the minimum of heat, prefer~.bly 3 y dipping them 5nto a bath of molten solder, It is important t o see t h a t the exposed ends are trimned accurately and the exposed par t of the conductor kept t o a minimum. Synthetic rubber sleeves should be f i t t e d a t t h i s stage, i n such a manner t h a t they can be rol led do\-m over the soldered connections,
?reparation of Tole Contacts
8, A l l "buckets" of pole contacts should be 'careful ly tinned, using the m i n i m u n of heat. Excess solder must be avoided and any excess f lux
removed,
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 19% B.R.1617 CHAPTER 8
Temporary l ' iounting
9. , It v r i l l be found tha t the soldering operation i s f a c i l i t a t e d if' the item t o be soldered is held by mating w i t h the corresponding plug o r
socket, preferably mounted a t an adjustable angle. The oontacts of t h i s mating item can be connected t o one pole of the low voltage supply, if electr5ca.l soldering a s described i n para. 6(a) is employed.
10. (a) If it should be necessary t o r epa i r a connection, su f f i c i en t conductors should be unsoldered t o allow easy access, After the repa i r is complete, they should be reconnected i n the order outlined i n the following paragraph, which i s the procedure t o be followed fo r the complete connection of a plug or socket,
(b) -4mange the out le t f i t t i n g s on the conauctor [see paragraphs 1 2 (fixed items) or 14 ( f r ee items)l . Hold the conductor ready, melt the so laer i n the bucket a t ' t he l e f t hand end of' the bottom row of contacts, with the minimum of heat, The conductor i s then dipped i n t o the molten solder and the heat i n s t an t ly removed. The solder should be used very sparingly, blobs and spikes should be avoided The same procedure i s then f olloved f o r the other contacts i n the rom, ~prorking f r a n l e f t t o ri&t. 1;Fter each rot--$ i s completed, the jo in ts should be checked by giving each conductor a s l i z h t pul l , and rubber sleeves, i f used, ro l l ed down over the jo in ts u n t i l the ends are f lush with the surface of the moulding. The other rows should be t rea ted s imi la r ly working from the bottom t o the top.
14. Y t e r the soldering operation the face of the moulding must be cleaned and any solder, flux or other matter, which m y impair the e l e c t r i c a l
performznce, removed, -4 s t i f f brush and a l i t t l e carbon te t rachlor ide w i l l be found useful f o r th i s operation,
lount ing the Plugs ( ~ i x e d panel mounting)
(a) F i r s t the p la in metal mountin, r i n g should be screvred up t o the body u n t i l it just touches t h s rubber gasket, which should then lie i n its hollov~ edge without distortion. The fea ther edge of the mounting may then be bent t o the "D" flat of the body t o prevent rotation. Sef ore mounting the item, the seal ing gasket, pznel f ~ c e and the zdjzcent threads of the s h e l l should be given a th in coat of bdce l i te varnish, care being taken t o prevent the varnish get t ing t o those \-?orking threads, engaang ~ 5 t h the coupling nut,
(b) The plug i s pushed throu& the panel and the locking r ing screwed home f inger t i ~ h t . If the panel i s 3/32 in. thick o r less , the mounting vasher must be used under the locking ring. The plug should then be held ~:!Lth the appropriate male body holder and the locking r ing tightened home r-sith the semi-tubular spanner.
Assepbu of the Sockets ( ~ r e e Cable Terminating connectors)
13. (a) AS t h i s assembly i s more involved, than tha t f o r the panel mounting items, de ta i l s are given step by step with the accompanying i l lus t ra t ions t o make the d r i l l as simple as possible. It must be real ised that the whole operation should be tackled rd th extreme ccre 2-nd at tent ion t o de ta i l , t o produce a workmanlike job.
(1 ) Trepare the ends of the c2.ble as shown by s t r i p i ~ i n g the 2.V.C. METAL BRAID
sheathing, braid L ~ O polythene tape. S t r ip ead t in-dip the wire ends. aimension "!ill should be & in. f o r o
the st rai&t outlets and 5 in. f o r p.v.C sr~"""c lc
the riat mgled outlet. THRU:T RING
Thread the out let f i t t i n g s on the cable ns shown, comb out the metal braid and solder bhe conductors t o the bucket ends. 4 Helsyn sleeve, f o r $ in. csble, should be used for packing i f ' necesszry.
/ UNION CASKET
OUTLET CA!
17ith the the ou-tle with the compressi clear of P u l l the
out let gasket inside, lock t t o the moulding assembly outlet nut, Move the on r ing on the braid, just c
the P, V, C. sheathing. ends of the braid out a t
ri&t angles t o the cable and $ r i m , Adjus t czble sleeve close t o compression ring.
Send the braid back over the compression ring, taking care that the ends do not project over i t s re= face. Slide the &o'n gasket up t o the rear face of the cmgression ring, over the Helsyn sleeve,
Force' the cable in to the outlet rLiember un t i l the braid seats i n t o it, (the conductors will bow t o permit this,. Bring up the thrust r ing 2nd lock I-sith the union nut,
THRUST RING -
BRAI'D OVER COMPRESSION RlNG
ASSEMBLY OF CABLE WITH MK.4 SOCKET
FIG. 2
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1 9%
TOMMY BAR +
ASSEMBLY DETAl LS OF MK. 4 SOCKET FIG. 3
15. Special. too l s are supplied with these connectors. One of these, the female body holder, should be used t o hold the cable uni t , while the
o u t l e t nut i s tightened ~ v i t h the spec ia l spanner. \%en both hr lves of the connection are mated the cable nut should be f u l l y en aged and the coupling nut t iyhtened by hand, A small amount of lubr icant should be applied t o a11 screw threads.
Specif ic De ta i l s of ':lark 4 Connectors f i t t e d $0 Receiver Bl@ - -I- *I- -
16. (a) plug PLIOI , - 4 . e a l cqnnectqr
I n most ins ta l l a t ions , the cable f o r t h e f r e e i tem cons i s t s of a s ing le co-axial l i n e (A.P. I 38 31 > connected t o P in C. The only other conuection being a l i n k between Pin A and F i n B. The cable b ra id screen i s securely bonded t o the body of the socket.
(b; ?lug S 2 0 3 or FLs02, O&zt Connector
Although t h i s i s P. s i x p in connector, a s a r u l e only four connections are necesssry, theref ore the speci f ied miniature cable i s ~ ~ 6 1 4 5 - I 0001 5.
( c j Plug FL30l,'"l~.ins Connect-or
The miniature cc-ble required f o r this connector i s ~~614.5-1000008. Note. Further d e t a i l s can be obtained from Ins t a l l a t ion Specifications 3.705 and B.649/~1.
F i t t i n g t k 4 pin :lark -- LSocket t o the Aeerial Cable (A.~.13831)
17. The co-axial a e r i a l input cable should be connected t o the Mark 4 socket a s f o l l m s : - (1 ) Prepare the cable R.P. 13831 as sham i n (a).
(2) Thread the union nut and th rus t r i ng on t o the cable as shown. Place the gasket union on t o the cable i n such a posi t ion t h a t i t coincides I-&tIi the end of t h e P.TT.C.sheath on the cable. To prevent damage t o the cable during t h i s operation Helleman type p l i e r s should be employed i f a v a i l ~ b l e . Af't envards thse ad on the compression r ing and t r i m the byaiding a s shovm i n the d i a g a n (b).
Comb out the braiding l e f t a f t e r trinrming as i n (2) 2-bove, this 7 5 1 1
consis t of 211 the bra id projecting beyond the oompression ring. Bend back the braiding i n e similar manner t o t11z-b sham i n Fig. 2(d) so tha t it is taken over the compression ring, tz f ing care tha t the ends do
CABLE A.P.13031
UNION NUT \ THRUST RING COMPRESS'ON / RlNG '
not project over i t s rear f ~ c e . Thread OUTLET
GASKET UNION GASKET on the ou t l e t s t r a igh t and secure it t i z h t l y a ~ a i n s t the braid ana compression r ing with the union nut. Ease the assembly h.ck as f a r a s it v r i l l go over the polythene, trim the cable t o e q o s e the conductor as shmn.. Thread on the ou t l e t gasket and solder the conductor t o Fin C on the socket, Pins A and B are soldered together with a small piece of l-sire (c;.
(4) Zase the asse~ibly over the polythene u n t i l i t mates tvith the socket. Secure vJjth the ou t l e t nut (dl.
MK.4 SOCKET CONNECTIONS TO COAXIAL CABLE
FIG. 4
UNION THRUST UNION COMPRESSION OUTLET STRAIGHT OUTLET OUTLET CABLE FREE NUT RING GASKET Rl N G NUT (MAY BE ANGLED) GASKET SLEEVE SOCKET
MARK 4 CONNECTORS
COMPONENTS, COMPRISING THE FREE SOCKET TERMINATION
IN THE ORDER IN WHICH THEY ARE PLACED ON THE CABLE
MARK 4 PLUGS AND SOCKETS
COMPONENTS LIST
Mounted on t he Reoeiver
Plug, f ixed, 2 p in ( ~ a i n s input) Plug, f ixed, 4 p in Aer ia l input) Plug, f ixed, 6 p in Audio Frequency output)
Joint-Servic e Catalogue
No. -
The mating sockets (cable entry) f o r these plugs a r e catalogued i n t h e i r component pa r t s and a re supplied with the receivers a s follows:-
For mating with 2 P in Plug 2560050
Socket, f ree , 2 way Gasket, union Gasket, o u t l e t Outlet , angle including:- Nut, union Ring, th rus t Ring, compression Cable Sleeve
Alternat ive improved items for use with mains input cable 6145-910-0008 a r e a s follows: - Socket, e l e c t r i c a l ( f r e e ) male s h e l l Seal, rubber, special shaped sec t ion Shield, e l e c t r i c a l , plug-soc ke t (angle) Adaptor, cable t o e l e c t r i c a l plug-socket Washer f l a t Ring, e l e c t r i c a l bonding Seal, rubber, spec i a l shaped s ec t i on Sleeve, cable binding
For mating with 4 P in Plug 2560070
Socket, f r ee , 4 way Gasket, ou t l e t Gasket, union Outlet , s t r a i g h t , including: - Nut, union Ring, t h ru s t Ring, compression Cable Sleeve
For mating with 6 P in Plug 2560080
Socket, f r ee , 6 way Gasket, o u t l e t Gasket, union Outlet , s t r a i g h t , including:- Nut, union Ring, t h ru s t Ring, compression Cable Sleeve
It i s not possible t o draw from s tores a complete assembly under a s ing le number,
Spanner Ki t , Pa t t e rn NO, 056-9322
Body Holder, double-ended, male and female, Size I Body Holder, double-ended, male and female, Size 2 Body Holder, double-ended, male and female, Size 3 Spanner, Ad justable Spanner, Semi-tubular, Size 1 Spanner, Semi-tubular, Size 2 Spanner, Semi-tubular, Size 3 Tommy Bar
This Sheet issued with 1,IL. No. 1 i-ugust 1956 B 61 7 LIST OF COilTG%TS C W T P . 9
C H A P T E R 9 -----. -.------------- ----------*----------
T U N I N G D R I V E M E C B l i N I S l h ------------------------------------------- -------------------------------.-------------
LIST OF CON-T
J e s c r i p t i o n Receivers 2h0/~& S m r y 3eceivcrs 3&Q/A . . . . . . . . . . ... - . . . Description Rcceivcrs ~&G~,'c/D 3ummsl.r-y 2eceivers c ~ o : I ~ , ~ , / D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..* Checking the mechanism Cornecting thc ganged cz-pacitor t o the dr ive . , . . . . . . . To remove the s c s l e drum assembly Toremove t l ieshaft a n d & u m f r o m t h e c u r s o r f r a m e ... .., To re-essemble shaft and drum i n t o the cursor frpme To re-assemble the sczle drum asscmbly i n t o the d ie casting ... T o adjust the cam operated st02 bar
\
To adjust the locking mechanism md/or the c l u t c h .:" . &, . . Removal of the upper gear box (2) on Receivers ~.$OB/G/L)
3eceiver 540 A. F. 571 40/,1 Tuning &rive mechanism Receiver B4O 1. P. 571 ~OB/C/D Tuning d r ive mechanism . . . . . . . . .
Para. -
This Sheet issued with A L . No, 1 August 1956 B .Re 1 61 7 CHAPTER 9
C H A P T E R 9 ----------------- --------------I--
R E P - 4 I R D A T A --------------------- -------I------------.-
1 . From the drawing (pig. 1 ) i t ?-rill be seen t h ~ t the tuning knob spindle assembly comprises the f ollo~xing i terns: -
The knob The spindle (B) The flywheel and clutch mechanism (C and D) The logging scale (A) mounted on the flywheel The worm gcaring t o the scale drum and gang (H and J) The drive locking device (F, G and U)
2. The boss of' the flywheel houses the clutch, which is a simple f r i c t i on type comprising the spring ( c ) secured a t the end of the spindle by the
nut (D). Reference t o the drawing w i l l show that the spring f i t s over and along the spindle. It exerts suff icient pressure against the face of the flywheel f o r the turning moment provided by the knob and flywheel, to be transferred t o the spindle and 170rk the mechanism. ;:hen the drive is stopped by means of the locking device o r cam operated stop, the clutch s l ips , so tha t only the knob and flywheel turn.
7
i 3. A s f lyitheel tuning i s employed, the xesultant mechanical i ne r t i a could
cause damage t o the gang by exerting sudden excessive pressure a t the ends of i t s travel, especially as it has a comparatively f rag i l e cerrarnic spindle. To prevent this , the cam operatea stop is f i t ted. It is located at the bottom of the ?vorm wheel shaft and is i n two parts:- A driver plate (T) securely fixed t o the shaft and a cam p l a t s (s) mounted on top of the driver plate but f ree to revolve on the shaft. Due t o the gearing, the t o t a l movement of this shaft i s about one and a half turns , from the closed t o the open position of the gang. -1 s lo t is cut i n the upper cam pla te f o r a radia l distance of approximatsly 180'; a l i p from the lower fixed plate engages into this s lo t , resulting i n the lower plate t ravel l ing f o r about half a turn as the l i p moves along the slot , before i t reaches the end and s t a r t s t o drive the upper cam plate. Thus f o r one and a half turns of the under fixed pla te (T) the up e r p la te (s) ~3.11 only revolve once, to operate the spring loaded push rod (E P azainst the stop (2) on the log$nz scale, a t each end of the gang traverse.
4-0 The meche-nism cen also be stopped a t any given point by means of the d ia l locking device. The d i a l lock lever (3 ' ) when placed i n the locking
position, turns an eccentrically grooved shaft (G) a t l ight an les to the tuning spindle t o produce suff icient breaking ef fec t on th is spindle t i n the item (u)) to stop it turning. The lever has a spring loaded clutch t o prevent the grooved shaf t from jamming the tuning spindle.
!= I* The :-rorm (H) at thc cnd of thc tuning sp id . l e d r ives t h ~ -om 17h~sl (J).
?hhc s c c l c &rum (F; T:chich r o t a t o s on t h i s>indle (I-) i s clriven by t h e s p l i t driving pinion (I,,. This s p i n d l i i s h e l i c a l l y growad and imparts a v ~ r t i c c l up o r dom motion as it rota tos . The p i t c h of t h i s h e l i c a l groove on t h c q i n d l c - i s t h e SPL-LIG IS Clz- hGlica.lly sraduatid s c d e on thc drum: this r e s u l t s i n zach inZ-ividuel sc;.la bc ing p res~n tcd . through 1.82 t u r n s of the drm,
t o the ~ t i 0 bctlirecn th; p in ion (L, zn& i t s matin2 gszr on (&I).
6. A chain s;?rockat (11; is mount25 untkrneath t h e s p l i t d r i v i n g p in ion on t h ~ t t o m ~ h ~ e l shaf t . T h i s i s connected by a s u i t a b l e chain to a further
mountod on the g2ngcd cs.pficitors spin2le. Ths chain incorpora tes 2 s p i n g Q with a t o r s i o n bar (v, t o reducd backlash. atte tern 5'714.0 is sp*ckf f i t t e d - 5 t h t h e spring only. j Suo t o thc rc-lative size of the chain sproc!cets 8 t r~ .nsmiss ion rcduction of j:l tekcs place through this p a r t i c u l a r d r ive , as thc rcduction from the tun ing spindlc t o sprocket (P) i s 20: 1, it follovqs t h a t t'ne t o t a l rcduct ion t o the gang is 60:1.
70 ( a ) The gcar box reduction r a t i o i s 20:l.
(b) The chain dr ive reduct ion i s 3:l.
(c) Tota l speed reduction from thz tuning h o b t o the ganged v a r i a b l e capac i to r s i s 60:1,
During the ~ h o l s t r a v s l of the mechanical s t o p s the v a r i ~ 3 1 c I 73s0 end not 180°.
tuning mechanism between t h e cp-pacitors a r e r o t a t e d t h r o u a about
( e ) The scale d rum c a l i b r a t i o n s ma mark~d on a hel ix ena the drum turns through &out 1.82 t u r n s t o movo p a s t the cursor. A s it rotates thc arum r i s e s o r fa l l s $- in. each complete turn
( f j Sacklash throughout t h s mechanism i s taksn up by sp r ing loading.
( g ) T'ne s t o p bar engags i-rith an angle piece on thc hi& speed s h a f t of the gc2.r box 2nd i s cam opcratzd from the scar box low speed shaf t .
(h ) The tuning knob dr ivcs the gear box through a f r i c t i o n c l u t c h t h a t prevents an c-xcessive s t r a i n being placed on the mschanism ?;then the s t o p s eze h i t .
( j ) The tuning roech;.-.nism f l p ~ h e c l makcs e e s i i r , l a rgc movements of the p . n ~ z d capaci tors .
DZSCItmPION II=CXVERS B~OB/C& Fig. 2 -------..-. &
8. The c lutch , fLy:r'neLl, Locking 2yld. s topping devices arc the same as those i n Recciv~rs B~O/L previously dc;scribsd. The drntt\ring shavrs that the
mt.chanism driving t h ~ s c ~ l c - drum, 5.s cxact ly the s a w as f o r t h o o the r pat terns .
9. Tllc chain s p r o c k i t (N) i s mounted a t t h c end of the tun ing spindle (B) ins tcad of cn the shaft a s s o c i a t j d -:cith the d r i v i n g pinion (L) , thus it
i s not su3jcctcG- t o t l i b 20:l speed rzduct ion of the ear l ie r models and as the ch2.h d r ivc r o t i o beV.-?ccn spmckc t s (N) and (P) r c m i n s t h e same, the reduction i s provifie6 by a fu r th i - r ;car box (X) i n the transmission from t h e sprocket (P) t o t h i gangcd c2.pacitors. Jockey pulleys (Y) es; fitted i n the cha in drive t o take up any slzclc, The arrangcmcnt cons t i t u t s s z considerable improvement over tho c e r l i e r p a t t ~ r n s , r c s u l t i n z i n r oduccd backlash.
- T l i ~ s slrect I ~ \ L I L T ! w ~ t i ? A L NO. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Chaptet. 9
FIG. I
RECEIVER B 4 0 A.P S ~ I ~ O / A TUNING DRIVE MECHANISM
FIG. 2
TUNING DRIVE MECHANISM. RECEIVER B 40. A. p. 9 1 4 0 B/C/ D
This Sheet issued with A.L.No. 1 August 1956 ~ . ~ . 1 6 1 7 CHAPTER 9
(a) Reduction t o driving pinion (L) is 20:l.
(b j Ratio betwccn pinion (L) and the sca le drum, about 1.5 turns t o I, 82 turns.
(c ) Xeduction from the tuning spindlc t h r o u a the chain drive i s 3:l.
(d) Roduction between the chain drive and the ganged capacitors i s 20:l.
( c ) Total reduction from t he spindle t o the gangea czpacitors i s 60:l.
( f ) The backlash is not morc- than + one divis ion of the logging scale.
( ) The s top bar engages wkth an angle piccc on the high speed shaf t of the lower gear box 2nd i s cam operated fkam t he associated low speed shaft.
(h) The tuning knob ar ives the gear box t h r o u g a f r i c t i o n clutch, which s l i p s t o prevent an excessive s t r a i n being put on the mechanism when the stops are hit .
( j ) The f lyc~hei l f ~ ~ c i l i t e t e s largc movaments of the ganged capacitors.
CKECKll!?G THE P . m I S 1 I
91. 17arninq. Before making any adjustments, free thc s h a f t of the ganged capacitors from -the drive by loosening thc r ~ l c v a n t grub screw. Fai lure
t o tdce t h i s precaution c?.n r e s u l t i n damage-to the gang byVcausing it t o turn through an angle greater than i t ivould m w e ~ 5 t h correctly adjusted stops.
Scale 3rum (a ) - - The sca le &urn should be f r e e on i t s sha f t during the v~holc of i t s trevel. If necessary i t should be oiled.
(b) Scale Posit ion
If tho drum i s too high o r too low re l a t ive t o the cursor pointars, it may be lmerod o r ra ised by slackening the $ in. S. S.F. lock nut at the top of the shaf t m d rotat ing t h i s shaf t w i t h a screwdriver plzccd i n t h ~ s l o t i n the top,
Turn the tuning knob fFxlly anti-clockwise and s e t the cursor pointers t o ths cnd of their corresponding scales, Thc pointer should be nearly central.
:;'ith the cursor frame s e t a s above, tu rn the tuning knob fully cloch-rise u n t i l engaged by the stop. The end of the sceles should be *thin a%out 1/46 in. of t h ~ cursor pointers. If tho tuning drum ovcrshoots by P-?!out $ in., the cam oporated stop must bc adjusted (see para. 17).
(d) Drive
A l l s c t screws securing the gears t o t h e i r shaf t s must be ti&& on t h e i r f l a t s , Similarly the s c r e ~ ~ s on the stop bar operating cam should be ti&%.
See t ha t the chain is arranged a s i l l u s t r a t e d i n Figs. I and 2 f o r the d i f f e ren t pa t te rn receivers, Xake sure t h a t it i s not twisted and i n ~40 /n rccoivers see tha t the tensioning c o i l spring (Q) does not foul e i t h e r the upper capstzn pulley (P) o r the i d l e r pulleys (TT and Z ) a t the other end of t h e t ravel , thus r e s t r i c t i n g the tuning traverse. The chzin shoula be lubricated 1~5th a th in layer of enti-seize grease A.P.556.
(f) W n C a p a c i t o r Gouplin~: W
The coupling grub screw f ix ing the gangod capacitors shaft t o the mechanism, must be accessible when 'the tuning knob i s rotated f u l l y counter-clockwise,
CCEW-mING THE G!JJG@ ITOR TO iBHE D T
1 ) T m the tuning lmob f u l l y counter-clockurise.
(2) Turn the gang shaf't cz refu l ly by hand, u n t i l it i s f i l l y c l o c ~ s e a s seen from the f r o n t of t h e receiver.
(3) Holding the shaft i n posi t ion by hand, t ighten the grub screws. In Rcciivers ~WB/C, Allen type grub screws arc fitted and i t ~ n l l be necessary t o have the special t o o l f o r f i t t i n g this i tem
Note. It i s e s sen t i a l that this operation is don€ at the LE' end of the t ravel , f o r the angle through which it is ro ta ted by the driving mechanism i s much l e s s than the angle through which the c q a c i t o r i s free t o ro ta te a n y from its f u l l y ant i - clochrisc position,
(I 1 Unscrew and remove the logging scale p i l o t lamp holder.
(2, Remove the scale lamp c a r r i e r inside the drum a f t e r undoing the two retaining screwed rods a t the top.
(3 ) Remove the $ in. B. S. F. hexagonzl nut and washer a t the b p of the centre shaft.
(4) P u l l f o n ~ a r d the t o p of t h i s shaf't until it c lears the die-casting, then l i f t o u t the esscrnbly.
TO ~ . I O V X .mA .rlND DRUB I ~ T R C B I ~ TEE CURSOR Fm.E ---- (I) Lay the cursor framc-, I -~ i th the scale drum i n it, face a m w a r d s on
the bench.
This Sheet issued with A, L. No 1 ilugust 1956 B.R.1617 CHAPTER 9
(2) 9cre-q the shaf t d-o~::n thz drum as f a r a s i t :rill go. Then remove 3 the f r i c t i o n m s h a r ~nCi the 6:ro 3 in. 3.3.3. he::agonal nuts from
the shaft.
( 3 ) Zcrcrr the sha f t r i g h t out of' thc asscmbly, from the top, t z d n g care not t o scrz.tch t h s drun,
(4; 3 i f t out the drum.
(5) P u l l t h o u & the drum beming -:&tl1 a piecc of s o f t rag soaked i n p e t r o l or paraffin.
( 6 ) Clean the shaft :-5th the same s o r t of rag.
(7) Put a fa-I drops of t h i n anti-seizc l u b r i c a t i ~ g o i l on the shaft .
TO P Z - , ~ S S ~ ' ~ B ~ SHVT m D R ~ I mo THE CURSOR FRAME --F -
(1 ; Lay t h e drum i n t h s cursor frame so t h a t the drum pinion boss i s at the oprosi te end t o the cursor knurled thumb plate.
( 2 ) I n s e r t the sha f t i n t o t he centre tube of the drum, through the top hole i n the cursor frame, put t ing the he l i ca l l y cut end of the s h a f t i n f i r s t . 3crev the sha f t u n t i l i t pro jec t s a s much r s possible through t h ~ bottom hole of the frane.
( 3 ) On t o the sha f t put the t ;~o 2 in. 3. S. F. hexagonal nuts, l:v'ith chamf'cred ends outxx-rds, end - then t he f r i c t i o n washer. Have the nuts so t h a t there i s about 3 in. of thread c l ea r above the washer.
(4) sc?err back thc sha f t u n t i l the top end i s ins ide, and f l u s h :-rith tho upper cnd of thc top hole i n the cursor frame.
(5; Check t h a t the s h a f t is locatcd ve r t i ca l l y , e.nd is free t o turn.
1 Lock the tuning, -;,tth the knob turned f u l l y clochcLse.
( 2 ) Hold the s c ~ ~ l c drum assembly v e r t i c a l and have the spigot on the end of the sha f t just pro jcct ing belo\-I the hole a t the bottom of the cursor f rzme,
( 3 ) Allow the drum t o - r o l l dam the h e l i x t o i ts laest los i t ion .
( I ; ) Rotate the centre sha f t u n t i l the cursor pointers ,we opposite the El? ends of the ca l ib ra ted scales.
(5) In sc r t the spigot on the end of the shaf't i n t o thc- hole i n the b o t t ~ m of t i c die casting.
( 6 ) Place one of the two $ in. s t e e l ~vashers on tho top of the s h a f t just above the top hearing of the cursor frame.
(7) Slide the top of the sh&t bachrards u n t i l t h i s end ju s t engages the s l o t i n the die czsting.
(8) Tlith the second f i nge r of the r i g h t hand hold the top half of the s p l i t pinion (L) against i ts anti-backlash springs.
( 9 ) iTith the f i r s t f inger of the ri&t hand k c ~ p the d m turned SO t ha t the I23 ends of the cnlibrated scales are central.
(1 0) Yith the l e f t hand, gently push the top of th- shaf t t o the back of the s l o t i n the top of the die casting.
(1 1 ) On the top end of the shaf t put the other $ in. steel washer, then thc $ inch 23. S. F. hexagonal nut.
(1 2) ?,take sure tha t the anki-backlash springs i n %he pinion gearing are vorking P-nd tha t the HF ends of the scales s r e c e n t r ~ l .
(13) Raise the drwn t o the correct height by turning the centre shaf t with a screwdriver f i t t e d i n t o the s l o t a t the top end, u n t i l the cursor pointers just overlap the bottom of the bvo l ines containing the cal ibrat ion divisions of aach scale.
(14) S t i l l holding the sha f t steady rrith the sc~;vdr iver , t ighten the $ in. B. So F. hexagonal nut on the top.
(15, Adjust thc t ightness of the f r i c t i o n rr-lsher holding the cursor frame, by a l t e r ing the posit ion of the two $ in. B. S.F. hexagonel nuts t h a t
jus t below the cursor frame, u n t i l t h i s can be comfortably, but not too easl ly , rotz-tod by one t h d .
(I 6 ) Xqlace the scale illuminating lamps. EIake sure t h a t the bottom end of the c a r r i e r f o r the imps does not touch the inside of the drum a t e i the r side.
(a) T h i s mechanism is indicated i n the two drawings Figs. I and 2 by the l e t t e r s "Sf' andffT". It i s s i t u a t e d a t the bottornof the low speed shaf t of the reduction gear box t o the scale drum. It i s accessible, if the receiver i s turncd on t o its r igh t hand sid-L. Thc following points must be check&:-
(i) The tun: 12 hcl- should rotzte rhout 28.55 turns between the operations of the cam against the s top bar. It i s possible t o ro t a t e throuplh e i t h e r 27.95, 28.95 o r 29.95 turns, according t o the angular posi t ion of the operating cam on the shaft.
( i i j Adjust t h i s zngular posit ion of the cam u n t i l the movement of the stop bar is the same a t each end of the 28.95 turns of the tuning knob.
(iii) Make sure that the f l a t spring between the cam boss and the th rus t race underneath the gear box occupies 1/16 in. + 1/64 in. ; this should be measured when the gear box output shaf t is hold dam by a f inger applied t o the, end of the sha f t a t the top of the s p l i t driving pinion (L).
This Sheet issued with A.L, N 0, 1 August 1956 B e R e 1 6 1 7 CHAPTER 9
TO ADJUST THE LOCKmG 1 . m I m AND/OR THE CLUTCH
(1) Remove the tuning knob and unscrev the se l f locking nut (D) on the f ront end of the tuning spindle (3). Remove the TTZ-sher h e l i c a l spring and f l y ~ h e c l .
(2) Turn the log,@ng s c d e f u l l y counter-clockwise. Set the cursor frane so t h a t t h c pointer corresponds accurately ~ J i t h the IJ? end of the drum s c d e f o r Bmd 5, Lock the dial,
Note. Do not touch the cursor again u n t i l the following adjustments Ere completed,
(3 ) Undo the screw i n the logging scale boss, 2nd ranove the logging scale complste.
(4) Release the dial lock. BE CAREFULNOT TO TOUM THE TUNING SPINDLE.
(5) Undo the sc r swin the end of the lockingcross sha f t (G). Renlcve the 1-mshcr, h e l i c a l spring and locking lever.
(6) Loosen the grub screws i n both the co l l a r s on the cross shaft.
(7) Turn the cross shaf t by f inger pressure as f a r as i t vCi.11 go i n a cloclcvise direction, looking a t i ts r igh t hand end.
(8) Slide the inside co l l a r up t o the d ie cast ing and t i & t e n the grub screw.
( 9 ) Place a thin piece of paper between the external c o l l a r 2nd the spherical bearing and hold the c o l l a r t i g h t against t h i s bearing, w i t h the cam fzces i n a horizontal position. Tighten the c o l l a r grub screw rea l ly hard. Remove the piece of paper.
(1 0) Put back the locking lever, h e l i c a l spring, washer and screw.
(I I ) , Lock the tuning spindle with the locking lever.
(12) Replace the logsing scale d i a l i n the f u l l y counter-clochvise posi t ion i.e. ageinst i t s stop (R), and i n such a posi t ion on the sha f t t h a t i t has running clearence.
(13) Ti&ten the screr? i n the logging scale a i a l boss.
Note. If, when t r ied , the logging scale has not enou& clearance, turn i t back t o the f u l l y counter-clockwise position, lock t h e tuning spindle and undo the screw i n the cent ra l boss, Iyiith the loggin, scale s t i l l held against its *stop, move it a l i t t l e d o n g i ts sha f t and re-tighten the cent ra l boss screw.
(1 4) Release the tuning spindle. See that the logging scale revolves f r ee ly i n a cloclrrise direction. I n the anti-clockwise posit ion the logging scale should be against the stop bar when the LF end of the tuning scale f o r 5 corresponds with the cursor pointer.
(I 5) Repl~ce the flywheel, spring, 7:s-sher and the 2 BA hexagonal nut.
(1 6 ) T i a t e n the self-locking 2 92- hexagonal nut u n t i l there is su f f i c i en t f r i c t i o n t o drive the gears eas i ly , but insuf f ic ien t to overcome the lock &en applied gently,
19. (a) ThLs gear box i s si tuc-ted be tmen the drive and. the upper chain sprocket ( I ) on thcse pat terns and provi.2-es the 20 : l speed reduction t o the ~ m g , l o s t on these models e a r l i e r on i n the transmission; due to the chain dr ive being t&en frm the tuning spindle, ins tead of the -,-rom~heel sha f t as i n the e a r l i e r patterns.
(b) It xi.11 be noted t h a t the gear box i s encased, and frm the diagram Fig. 2 vill be seen t o cons is t of two s p l i t pinion wheels with anti- backlash springs, f~r iven by corresponding spur gears, t o give the required transmission reduction.
( c ) The construction i s such, tlm-t normally no maintenance v i 5 l l be requirerl. However i f i t e v e r becomes necessary t o remove the gear box f o r repzip, the f ollotv'ing procedure ~15.11 achieve t h i s : - ( 4 ) Bemove the scale drum.
(2) Slacken the grub screws keying the drive t o the gang capacitor shaft.
(3} Remove the four f i x ing screws tha t secure the gang capacitors t o the chassls and s l i d e the g3ng amay from the gear box until it i s f r ee of the spindle.
(4) Remove the chain sprocket (P) f r m the gear drlve.
(5) Remove 3 fix5ng screws from t h e gear box frame s i t ua t ed direct ly behind the scale drum position.
( 6 j Remove the socket SIilOl, by withdzatving the filring screws. The gear box can nmr' be removed, -!hen replacing reference should a l so be made t o paragraph I 2.
i b 8 sheet lirued w t h A.L. No. I Augdst 1956
PART 3
ILLUSTRATIONS, COMPONENT LISTS
AND COIL DATA
This Sheet issued with A&. No. I August 19% B.R.1617 PART 3
-______-________-___I__ I L L U S T I 3 A I O N !LA ------- C O N P O N E N T S --- ---------------------------- L I S T S A N D ---------------------------------------- _-_-----------------------
C O I L D A T A ----------------- -_-_-------------
LIST OF CONTENTS
B ~ D / A / ~ c - PD U n i t
Turret S d t c h coqonents, layout diagram TWi- t ST-htch coqonents, c~1-u.i.t diagram 2ight hand layout Circuit d i a g i a opposite Fig. 3 Circuit diagram op20s~te Fig. 6 Top layout
Components Llst
B&D - 23' U n i t
Turret Switch components, layout diagram Turret Switch colrponents, circait diagram C i rcult diaglam Layout diagram ( ~ i ~ h t llznd)
Components List
BU/A - IF unit -- -
Layout and srsitch l r r i r i n g diagmn Circuit diagmn
Components L i s t
B@@ - IF Unit
Layout and switch wiring diagmx C i ~ u ~ t diagram
Components L i s t
W D - IF unit
Layout a-ld switch wimng diagram Circuit diagram
Components List
BN/A - cnd Po17~i- U n i t ----I--- - -I--
T0~3 l a y o u t Bo t tori1 l ayou t Circuit diagi-an
C0~12oilents List
BLOB/C - AF and Power Unit - -- .- - - - - - Top 1 ayou-t; 3ottoliz l ayou t C i r c u i t d i a p m
Cofi~~oneiits L i s t
BLQD - AF and Pover U n i t c- ----
3ot'corn 1a;rou-t Circuit diazmn
Componegts L i s t
LIST OF COl\?TE5~?TTTS &nt inue dl -I- .-PI- -- * --___L
JV- ,:a'J2- !2iD :zNDING: - - - - - --- DL-IT ti ID? C O I L 3 - s . -- - .u
A e r i a l C o i l s ( ! S i ' l ? l ----- Band I hid 1 B~@C/D oiiLjr Bend 2 Band 2 3 4 0 ~ / ~ o d j B a d 3 Band j BWC/D oiily Rand 4 Bai~d 5
Band I Ba1.d 2 Band 3 Band 4 Bmd 5
Second PZ C o i l s (TT C l ~ 3 3 1 - -- Band I Band 2 Band 3 Baiid 4. Band 5
(ii)
This sheet 1 ssued with A.L.. No. 5, July, 1 959
Turret Coils (continued)
Oscil lator Coi l (LI 02)
Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5
LIST OF CONTElNTS (continued)
Fig.
If? cons
I3 C o i l A s s e n b l y for the base IF Transf om.er (TRI 04) (BW, TRI 1 6) If? Coi l ( ~ 2 0 1 ) IF Trans f onners, TRZOI and TR202 (B+~/A) IF Transformers , TR201 and TR202 (.EL$.OB/C/D) IF Tro-nsfomner, !EX203
B. F. 0. Coils, L202 aria 2205 Pitch Co i l s , L203 and L204 Choke RF, 1.5 mH Crystal F i l t e r Assembly, details (B~OB/C/D) C r y s t a l F i l t e r Wiring Diagmm C r y s t a l F i l t e r Coil ~ 2 0 6 (BWB/C/~) Note F i l t e r 1,301, (B@/A)
IHOIS COD n m 1 7 0 m ~ ~ am C H ~ - DATA - Choke, A P. 65560, L302 Choke, & P. 65564, L303 Choke, A. P. 67762, L304 Output T~-ansformer, A.P. 65689, -1 Output Transfo~ller hlonitor Loudspeaker (w-wo~) &ins Transfomer A.P. 65563/A/~, TR302 (BW/A) blains T r m s f onner A, P. 67763~, 'El302 (B&oB/c/D)
C i r c u i t D i a g r ~ m
Cor~sonents L i s t
C i r c ~ u t D i a ~ l - s m Turret Si'citch Cmp~ncnts
Para. -
Fig.
65
Fig.
66 67
( iii) .- - -- -
Thls sheet ~ssued w ~ t h A L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Par t 3
FIG. I
LOCAL OSCILLATOR 2"" R . F. I" R.F. AERIAL
BAND I
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS IN AP 57140 C. ARE SHOWN DOTTED
BAND 2
BAND 3
BAND 4
BAND 5
RECEIVER 840 A P ~ ~ I ~ O / A / B / C - TURRET SWITCH COMPONENTS :- LAYOUT DIAGRAM.
COIL TAG NUMBERS
This sheet issued with A. L . No. l Auqust 1956 B.R. 1617 Part
FIG 2 I
AERIAL. LOCAL OSCILLATOR 2ND. RE IST. R. F.
I
I_-,-- ---)
c o w o N r -&
C ARE 'TED.
BAND I
L---L -=---- A
. = ADDITIONAL IN, AP.57140 SHOWN DO1
BAND 2
I I I I
I IOP
I I
4 R109 I I
I I---- + - - - - -.J
BAND 3
BAND 4
BAND 5
RECEIVER B 40. A.P. ~ ~ I ~ o / A / B / c .
TURRET SWITCH COMPONENTS. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
FIG. 3
0 1
O M l TTE
M I C R O ' 8 4 0 A
LP 101 LP I 0 2 L P 1 0 3 LP 1 0 4 L P 1 0 5 L P 1 0 6
SWITCH F I T T E D O N . P . S 7 1 4 0 C ONLY.
RECEIVER 840 A.P. S ~ I ~ O / A I B / C R.F. UNIT. RIGHT HAND LAYOUT.
Th~s s h e e t issued w ~ t h A L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 P a r t 3
R
IU RF SKI02
R.I. S.
Y
101 103 104 105 110 113 114
C
MISC
R.F. UNIT FREO CHANGER SK l O l
l2<
FIG. 4
122 123 124 119 101 103 105 107 108 113 118 114 115 117 I l b 119 I 2 0 121 122 126 124 127 128 129
4 102 ' 0 4 HI 112 1 0 6 131 134 133 133a 132 140 123 125 109 110 I 3 5 136 137 1 3 0
PLlOl RV 102 V lOl V 102 V I 0 3 V104 SWlOl
SKlQl SW M TRIO1 TR 102 TRIO3 TRIO4 PL103 SW102a LPIOI-107 RV125 SK I 0 2 L102 SWlO2b XLlOl SW102c L l O l SW102d
RECEIVER 840. A . P . S ~ I ~ O / A / B / C R.F. UNIT. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
116 107 1 0 6 108 109 111 112 115 IZ I 118
'17 120
C
MISC
R
R.F. UNIT
FIG. 5
T R.F FREO CHANGER SK IOI
S K I 0 2
I C131 ID PLIO3
I 2.2 p " / Rl2 l I
I / 4 7 0
L -7--------------- l------ -/ / SKI01
:;:?$ I
3 (
I I 1
I C 1 3 0 l o o p
I SKlOl
I s (
I 4
I X 7 (
SW lO2d
NOTES - LOCAL OSCl LLATOR
I THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS ARE ONLY FITTED TO PATT 57140C - C14 , ' 4 2 C 4 3 AND SW M
2 THE n l c n IMPEDANCE AERI L CONNECT ON TO PLIOI , INCLUDING CIOI, IS 0 T TTED PA T 5 1 4 0 C
3 C133A IS FITTED ONL IN PAT 57140B /C
4 REFER TO F C 2 PT3 FOR VALUFSOF COMPONENTS IN TVRRT tOMJ*RTMW S
R
C
MlSC
R
C
YISC
RECEIVER 8 40. A.P S ~ I ~ O / A / B / C R F. UNIT. C RCUIT DIAGRAM.
101 103 104 105 110 113 114 I I b 117 I 2 0 107 I 0 6 108 109 Ill I12 115 I21 118 -
122 I 2 3 124 119 101 103 105 107 108 113 118 1W 115 117 116 119 120 121 122 26 124 127 128 129
, I I 0 2 I 0 4 111 112 I 0 6 131 134 133 133a 132 1: I 4 0 123 125 109 110 13 5 136 137 1 3 0
PLlOl RV 102 V l O l V 102 V I 0 3 V104 SKlOl SW M TRIO1 SWlOl TR 102 TR I 0 3 TRIO4 PL103 SW102a LP 101-107 RV125 SK 102 LlO2 SWIOZb XLlOl SW102c L l O l SWlO2d
FIG 6
C O i T Z O N E N T S -,----------,----,-------------_------------------------A L I S T E Z C E I V E R B 4 O .........................................................
P A T T E R N S 5 7 1 4 0 / A / B / C -_----__---_--------------------------- .......................................
R F U N I T ------------- ------------
1
C i ~ d C I ~ O ~ -
Tol,
I @; 265 2& 2q; 2Q
2 ~ 2 2Q? 2 ~ ; 16. I GJ
$ $ 5 s
&; 14:
4 C$ -l 16 $ % 3;
2-(z: 2qy. 2&
20*; 2C& 16
1 qi
R.P, or Joint-Sexice
C a t , No.
2131175 21 231 94 21 45095 21 1505'5 21 24-4-07
Zl 2,1177 %112&77 Zl21A.77
a 21 60009 21 31 178
2.131 1 94- ZI 25666 Z l 25 664 A,?. 501 89
5 21 60009
ZI j.i I 69 3-1 31 058 Zl3.i *I 86 31 ,I I 97 21 25666
Zl 25664. !A. 2,601 89 .Z123194 ,dq 21,$Q7 A1 'l 5095
Rating
~ O O V 35@V 35ov 35ov 35OV
35OV 35OV 35ov
5OOV
~ O O V 350V 35OV
~ O O V 500V ~ O O V 5OOV 35ov
35ov
35ov 35OV 35ov
35ov 35ov
5OOV 5OOV
Z l31 184 22 PI' 21311 94 j 47 P- 21 25664 450 pF ZI 25 666 600 pF A.P. 60189 12-322 ?F I
- "
Value
12 pY 100 PI?
O a l F ::AG 0.003 /IF O.OOjF 0.003/yi 4-1 8 pF 15 p~
47 PP 600 pF 450 pJ.? 12-322 p2 44 8 p3
6.8 PI? I 0 pP 27 23' 56 SF 600 ;22
450 pF 12-322 PI? 100 pP
UpT
Remrks
Not in AP. 571 40C
Variable Band 4
Band 5 Band 4 Band 5 Ganged Cap. Sect. Variable
Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 4
Band 5 Ganged Cap. Sect.
Variable Band 2 Band 3
16 I& 55 56
L L -
~ O O V 500v 35ov 35oV
21 15095 I 0 . l p Zl23194
z Zl50009 2131169 21 31 058
Band 4 Band 5 Band 5
i Band 4 I Ganged Ca?, Sect,
100 pT 4 - 4 8 $? 6.8 pF I 0 p3'
, _._I-
This She
Ref.
?t issued wi t;h AIL. No. 1 August 19% B.R.1617 PART 3
n Replacement Component.
1
1
LIST RF UNIT B~O/A/BIC
Rennrks
Variable Band I Band 2
Band. I 13a1ld.2 Band 3
Sand 4 Band 5 Ganged Cap. Sect.
-
Rating
5 0 0 ~ 35Ov
Ref.
(3433 ~ 1 3 3
COMPONENT@
Rating
35ov : 35ov
35OV 35ov 5OOV
50m
500V 5mV
35Ov 350V 35oV
35ov 35Ov
5 0 0 ~ 35Ov
350V 350V 35OV
I GP. o r Joint-Senrice I Cat .No.
1 2315095 21 15095 21 25665 24 -I 5095 2131 206
2131 I 65 XZI 60009 21 31 I 86 Z131181
21 25476 21 26350 Z? 26351
I Ww4 21 25450
1 60189 2131 178 2130206
I 21 231 94 21 231 94 27 2447.7
i
*
Remrks
7:
Band 3 Band 4
Value
1 2 3 22 9
LP. or Joint -Service Cat. No.
z4322& 2132276
1
Tol,
4 C$ 96
C l 3 3 C433A
Value
C e l / I F 0.1 4-70 fl 0 . 4 p 100 pF
2.2 pp 4-1 8 @' 27 fl 18 3
470 I@ 1050 fl 2200 pE'
500 fl 390 @' 12-322 @ 15 fl 100 @'
100 pl? I00 pF 0*003/-@
33 @ 6.8 pF
21 25608 21322f%
Tole
2ai 2 6 % 2c@ I@ 0.5 pF 16 I 1 6
!% !$
1 6
$ %
1% I@
500V Band 5 Band 3 Band 4
I I
c I 3 3 C 1 3 3
I
2125704 2132279
PATrraW 571 40C ONLY r
A.P. o r Ref , Joint-Service Remarks
/ Ref.
RVI 02
, A.P, or Joint-Service
Cat. No, Value / Tol. I Rating 1 Remarks
2701~ ohns look ohms 220k ohms I00 ohms I 0 ohms
look ohms 8.2k ohrns 100 olms 1.5k ohms
lk ohm
I,% ohms 3.9k ~hx-ls
68k ohms look o-hls 470k ohins
47k olms 43s ohas
220 ohms 5ac ohills
4 - a d-lms
390 ohms I C30 0 l l l L l ~
47 oh= I 180 o h m
471.= ohms
I 20 ohms
Variable
Band I Band 2
Band 3 Band 4
Band I
Band 2 Band 3 Band 4
Variable I
This Sheet issued with A.L. No, 1 August 1956 B,R.1617 PART 3 COMPOIGNE LIST RF UNIT BbO/AD/c
~ J ~ S F O ~ J V I E R S
Ref, Pattern NO. Desc r ip t ion
TRI 01 bands I - 5
. TR102/.3
TR 1 04 I - I Transformer 1.F.- I.F. Output I INDUCTORS
.. .
Replace wi th 5905-A.P. 184026/7/8/9/30
-
/Ref. I Description I
Transformer R.F. A e r i a l i
Transformer 1st & 2nd R.F,
Choke 1.5 mH - Oscillator - Coil, Tuned - O s c i l l a t ~ r -
muGS AND SOCKETS
LAMPS -
Description
Plug 4 pin - A e r i a l (Mk. 4) Plug 4 pin - IF Output Socket 12 way - RF/IF U n i t inter-connection Socket coax ia l - R. I. L. I
. Ref,
PL1 01 03
SKI01 SKI 02
&Po or Jointdeivice
Cat. No.
25 60070 57771 601 56 60451
Description
Pilot Laqs, 6.5V. , 0.3~ ivL E. S. ..
Ref.
I L P ~ 01 -1 07
Ref.
Snl 01 SWl02 St!. hi
. J.S. Cat. No,
X951225
Pattern
65 638
-
Description
Crystal, 2 pin, - Local oscillator - -
Ref,
XL? 01
Description
Switch, Lamps Switch, Wafer, Crystal iaicrosmitch - WC o n l y -
Y
Patteni
A s required A
FIG. 7
OSCILLATOR MIXER GRID AERIAL
BAND I.
BAND 2.
BAND 3.
BAND 4.
BAND 5.
RECEIVER 840 A.P 57140 D. TURRET SWITCH COMPONENTS. LAYOUT DIAGRAM.
COIL TAG NUMBERS
B.R. 1617 Part 3 This sheet ~ssued with A L. No.2 October 1957
FIG. 8
0 SCILLATOR
2 0 16
MIXER GRID 2ND. RE GRID AERIAL
t5 II K) 6 5 I
BAND
A A A A A
I a44
I IOSOp Ll02
I I CU5
. - A A A A A A A A A h
I I
BAND.
BAND 5
RECUVER 840 AP s- l~o D. TURRET WITCH COMPONENTS. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
B.R.1617 Part 3 --
RECEIVER 840 A.P. 5 7 1 4 0 ~ R.F: UNlT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
102 103 I27 I28 K)4 K) I 123 124 125 129130 160 164 b5# 177 182 184
)6 105 0 7 122 I26 141 142 143 IS9 162 161 179 181 178 183 K)I 103 112 123 124
~ 1 2 105 106 107 113 115 114 120 126 12s ~n 120 104 IK) 116 08 122 121 . 129
YO2 LPIOI LPD7 RVDI MRI VDI SKDl V K n X L I ~ TRlll Vla3 >I16 SKlOj M I RVIQ2 -LKN Y l P b - SWD3. -SKI@ SWiO& wo* +aa
* C
R -- I?. E UNlT
IT R.F. - -2wRs +RE6: CkANGEf? SK I 0 3
B.R.1617 Par'
FIG. 9
R. E UNlT -2m-m
IC
C
R
RECEIVER 840 A.P. 5714 R.E UNlT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
'l8? 103 ~n 128 K)4 123 124 125 129130 160 164 16518 177 Ia2 184
106 105 0 7 122 I26 141 142 143 199 162 161 179 181 178 1 83 lol 103 112 123 I24
102 0 5 106 Kn 113 115 114 120 126 125 In 128 104 CK) 116 108 122 121 . D9
PCDI SW102 LPlOl LP07 RVDI MRI VDI SKK)I V K n XLld TRlll VO3 ?I16 SKI03 ' " ' S C ~ ~ l sVJ163o l%1 RvtQ2 -LKJt s w a b - S W 3 c SKI- bMO !Ma' - -
CAPACITORS (conttdm)
RESISTORS
Ref.
CI 76 c177 C178 C179 CI8O
C181 C182 C183 c184 CI85
C ? 86 C187 C188 C189
h
Ref,
R l 01 R102 R103 R104 R105
~i 06 RI 07 R108 RlO9 R110
Rl I I R112 RI I 3 ~ 1 1 4 R115
RI 1 6 R117 R1 I f? R I I ~ R120
A,P, or Joint-Service
Cat. No.
O l 2-71 05 01 1-5905
A, P, 601 89 01 2-31 65 01 2-31 65
01 2-71 1 3 01 2-3984 01 1-5095 01 2-71 1 3 91 1-5674
01 2-3926 01 2-3926 012-3926 01 2-7087
Remark s
1
Stud mounting Ganged Cap, Sect,
Stud mounting
,
Value
330 pF 0 . y
1 2-322 pF 100 PI? 100 pF
100 pF 470 PF 0.1p-F 100 pl?
0.003/@
I20 pF 120 pF 120 pF 6 .8pF
A.P, or JointService
Cat, No,
022-3091 022-3079 022-1 1 09 022-21 23 022-1 002
022-3037 022-1 109 022-2025 022-2004 022-2037
022-2079 022-301 8 022-3037 022-221 6 022-31 21
022-201 6 022-1 1 &+ 022-1 142 022-1 067 022-221 6
Tol.
1% 1% 10% 1%
1% 1% 1% 1 6 I
;$ 1% 1@
l @ 1@ 1% 1% 1 6
Value
270k ohms 220k ohms 100 ohms 8,2k ohms
I 0 ohms
1 OOk ohms 100 ohms I .5k ohms
l k ohm I ,8k ohms
3.9k ohms 68k ohms
IOOk ohms 4Tk ~ X J ~ S
470k ohms
i.2k ohms 390 ohms 18G ohms 47 ohms 47k Chris
T o l ,
% 2 6 %
2% 2%
% % G 8 2%
2 $
0.5pF
R a t i n g
75OV 35ov
75Ou 75OV
75OV 75OV 35ov 75ov 35OV
75ov 75OV 75OV 75OV
Rating
1 - 2!w
$4 3 &W
9 $7 TW $W &W
&w 3 9 2w &W
+W .1
2!w 2
4~ TW
Remarks
Change No. 7 September 1967 BJt.1617 PART 3 txwwmrs LJm RF UNIT B4a) .
RESISTORS (C ont ' d. )
VARIABLE RESISTORS
t
Ref.
R121 R122 RI 23 R124 RI 25
RI 26 RI 27 R128 R129 Rl 30
TRANSFORMERS
Value
68 ohms 180 ohms
82k ohms 5.6k ohms 390 ohms
47k clhms 22 ohms 47k dims
470 ohms 220 ohms
=
A.P. o r Joint-Service
Cat, NO,
022-1 088 022-1 142 022-3030 022-21 00 022-1 I 84
022-2214 022-1 026 022-2214 022-2079 022-1 151
Remarks
Anti-oross-mod. Lamps , B r i l l i a n c e
Ref,
RVI 01 RVI 02
Tol.
A.P. o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
900-4942 580-31 98
f
Description-
R.F. Transformer Band 1 , R.F. Transformer Band 2
R.F. Transformer Band 3 R.F. Transformer Band 4 R.F. Transformer Band 5
R.F. Transformers I st and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands 1 t o 5 R.F. Transformers I st and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands I t o 5 R.F. Transformers I s t and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands I t o 5 R.F. Transformers I s t and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands I t o 5 R.F. T r a n s f o r m e r s l s t and2ndR.F. Tuned, Bands1 t o 5
R.F. Transformers l ' s t and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands I t o 5 R.F. Transformers I s t and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands 1 t o 5 R.F. Transformers I st and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands I t o 5 R.F. Transformers I st and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands 1 t o 5 R.F. Transformers I st and 2nd R.F. Tuned, Bands I t o 5
I .F. Transformer
t
- Ref. ,
TRI 01 : TRIO2
TRI 03 TRI G4 TR1.05
TRI 06 TRI 07 TRI 08 TRI 09 TRI10
TR111 TR112 TRI 13 TR114 TR115
TRI 16
.
Rating
$7 qw ,2w FW
3 q TW q
2-w
- P a t t e r n No.
5905-Amp. 184026 59Q5-A.P.1 84027
' 5905-A.P. 184028 5905-Ampe 1 84029 5905-A.P. 184930
5905-A.P. 106099 5905-A.P.106100 ~ Y o ~ - A , P . 1061 08 5905-~.P.l06109 5905-A.P.106110
5905-A.~.106101 5905-~,~.106102 5905-A.P. 1061 I 1
' 5905-A.~.106112 5 9 0 5 - ~ . ~ . 1061 13
5950-A.P. 1061 17
Remarks
Rating
0,IW 2.51'
Value
100k ohms 20 ohms
Tol.
2% I WO
INDUCTORS
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Ref.
I
LlOl L102 Li 03 L104 L4 05
LI 06 b
Ref,
r
PL101 F'LI 02 SKI 01 SKI 02 SKI 03
SWITCHES
9
Amp, o r J o i n t -Service
Cat, NO,
' A.P,Io~~oJ A,P.106104 A.P, 1061 1 4 A,P, 1061 1 5 A,P. 1061 I 6
A,P, 1 061 51
. Ref,
LPlO1 t o LF'I 07
b
I
Descr ip t ion
I
Coil , Tuned - Local O s c i l l a t o r Coi l , Tuned - Local O s c i l l a t o r Coi l , Tuned - Local O s c i l l a t o r Coi l , Tuned - Local O s c i l l a t o r Coi l , Tuned - Local O s c i l l a t o r
Choke, 1.5 mH - Local O s c i l l a t o r
A.P, o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat, No,
999-3526 972-81 83 580-3620 A46852
972-8233
CRYSTALS
. Descr ip t ion
4 Pin , Mark 4 - A e r i a l Input 4 P i n - In t e rconnec t ing (RF/IF u n i t s ) Coaxial - R. I. S, Crys t a l - Local O s c i l l a t o r 12 P i n - In t e rconnec t ion (RF/IF units)
A,P, o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat, No,
995-1 225
Ref,
SWI 01 SWI 02 SWlO3 -
I
Descr ip t ion
P i l o t Lamps, 6.5V 0.3A M.E. S.
AmPo o r Joint-S e r v i c e
Cat, No,
. 051 -0080
Ref,
XLI 01 MRI
I
Descr ip t ion
1
Micpo Switch Switch Lamps C r y s t a l Switch
A,P, o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat. No,
CWl30 037-2373
7
Descr ip t ion
I
Crystal - Local O s c i l l a t o r Crys t a l - R e c t i f i e r
BR 1617 Part 3
FIG. lo
RECEIVER 840 A . R S ~ I ~ O / A / B / C R.F. UNIT. RIGHT HAND LAYOUT.
Change No 7 Seprember 1967
R
C MISC
121 123 124 117 118 I l b 115 119, 12C 158 137 139 136 I 2 0 1 4 0 127 130 126 129 103 I2
LP I 0 1 - 1 0 7 RVlO2 X L l O l SW102 LlOl T R I O 4 V 1 0 4 V I 0 3
R E C E I V E R B 4 0 C-C-M-P-o-NE-N!-S---L-L-S-T-~ ___________________-------------------------------------
A-*-E-2-5-1-I-!k-Q-&? -------------------
R . F . U N I T --_------------- ---------------
C A P A C r r O R s
+ C
Ref.
CIOI C102 CI 03 C l o r C C I O ~
CI 06 Cl07 C108 Clog C l l O
Cl I I C112 C I I ~ Cl l4 CI I 5
c116 c l l 7 CAI8 CIA9 C120
C? 21 C122 Cl23 a 24 C I 25
CI 26 CI 27 C128 C129 C130
C131 C132 C133 CI34 cl 35
AmPo o r Joint-Service
Cat, NO,
01 1-5095 01 1-5095 01 2-4407 01 2-31 65 01 2-7099
01 2-7099 01 6-0009 01 2-7097 01 2-7099 01 2-7099
01 6-0009 01 2-7093 01 2-7095 01 2-7095 01 6-0009
01 6-0009 01 2-7097 972-9507 01 6-0009 01 2-71 07
01 2-3941 A.P. 601 89
91 1 -5674 91 1-5674 91 1-5674
A.P. 601 89 01 2-7081 01 2-4607 OI 2-31 65 01 6-0009
01 6-0009 01 2-6772 01 6-0009 01 2-7089 01 6-0009
Value
O a l p F 0 .1pF
0.OIflB 100 pF
27 pF
27 pF 4-18 pF
22 pF 27 pF 27 PF
4-48 pF 1 5 PP 18 pF 18 pF
4-18 pF
4-18 pF 22 pF
600 pF 4-18 pF
56 PF
330 PF 12-322 pF
0.003pF O0O03/uF O m 0 0 3 ~
I 2-322 p~ 202pF
O.OI/liF 100 pF
4-18 pF
4 -18pF 6.8 pF
4-18 pP 10 pF
4-18 pF L
Tol.
2@ 2C$ 2% 2096 16 5% 16 5%
Z 1%
5% % !%
1%
1% !% %
I@ %
% &
2% 2% 2@
% 0.5pF
2046 2% 1%
10% 0.5 pF 1%
0.5 pF 1%
Rating
35ov 35ov 35OV 75OV 75ov
75ov
75ov 75ov 75OV
75ov 75ov 75ov
75ov 35OV
75ov
75ov
35OV 35ov 35OV
75OV 35OV 75OV
75OV
75OV
Remarks
J
Stud mounting Stud mounting
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Ganged Cap. Seot,
Ganged Cap, Seut.
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
R
BAND WIDTH SWITCH
Y lSC
SW2Olcd.e FRONT
L > U LJI Llb LIU 234 232 219 213 215 214 235 2 0 6 2 0 7 2 0 2 2 0 3 226 225
233 227 228 229 221 222 212 211 2 0 9 217 2 0 8 205 223 218 201 2 0 4 254 215 . 210 205 201
SW 2 0 1 b FRONT
R
- - - - - . ---
2 32 228 227 217 218 231 SK203 SK202 PL203 L 2 0 3 V 2 O b L 2 0 2 TR203 TR 2 0 2 V 2 0 I L201 T R 2 0 4 PLZOl LS2Ol P L 2 0 5 SW 2 0 3 V 2 0 2 TR2Ol
SW 2 0 4 L 2 0 4 L 2 0 5 PL204 V 2 0 3 S W 2 0 l c-e SW2Ol b SW2Ola SK2OI V 2 0 5 RV 2 2 0 S W 2 0 5 XL 201 SW 202m- q V 2 0 4 S W 2 0 2 a - c,c-q SW202d.h-k RV224
S W 2 O l a FRONT
MlSC
BAND WIDTH SWITCH {
SYSTEM SWITCH
REAR
p] 4%
SW202mr.p.q r FRONT
1 REAR
REAR
- -
P I N I I PINI '
PL205 REAR
REAR
SW 2 0 2 d.h.j.k FRONT
PL 2 0 5 PIN 9
(5WJ . 201 P IN I
REAR
RECEI'VER B 40. A.P. 571 40/~: I.F. UNIT LAYOUT AND SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM.
B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 12
1
R
C
MISC
b
R
C
MISC. T L PL203 swz04 ~ ~ 2 0 2 9 P L 2 0 5 1 5 2 0 1 sw 202 j SW 202k SW 2 0 2 p SW 202m L 2 0 5 SW 202d SW 2Old SW 2 0 2 n
201 2 0 4 2 0 6 2 0 5 208 2 0 9 212 213 216 211 221 226 22s 218 202 2 0 7 23 5 231 214 215 222 2 23
234 203 227 210 217 233 2 2 8 2 3 0 229 232 219
201 2 0 2 2 0 4 2 0 7 2 0 9 2 12 217 216 214 227 2 23 2 0 5 2 0 5 2 0 6 2 0 8 211 213 233 2 3 4 218 215 226 228 229 2 3 0
2 38 222 221 219 2 2 0 232 237 2 3 6 235 224 225 231 PL2OI SW2Ola V 201 V 202 TR202 SW 201c V203 V 2 0 4 a TR 2 0 3 V 2 0 5 V204b SW202h
L 201 SW 2020 TR2Ol SW 201b SW202b SW202c SK 2 0 2 RV22O SW203 PC 2 0 4 SK SW2QS T R 2 0 4 SW 202q XL201 L 2 0 3 L 2 0 4 SW2Ole L 2 0 2 V 2 0 6 SW202f SW202c RV224 SK203
C O M P D N E N T S L I S T B 4 0 R E C E I V E R S ......................................................... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -C- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Ref, AeP. or
Joint Se mice Cat, NO,
P A T T E R N S 5 7 1 & 0 / A ............................... ------------------------------- I . F . U N I T ----------------- -----------------
CAPACITORS
Value Tole
5$ 2% 2 q i 2@ 5%
% 2@ 2% 2c$ 5%
5s 2q* 2qL 2q-6 5$
2q$ 2G 2@ 208 2 6
2@ 2@ 2% 2@ 2@
@ 2 q 2ai'J 2%
- -
Rating
35ov 35ov 35ov 35ov 35 ov
35 ov 35m 35ov 35ov 35ov
35ov 35ov 35ov 35 ov 35ov
35ov 75ov 35ov 750V 35m
35ov 35ov 75ov 35ov 35ov
35ov 35ov 35ov
1000V
Remarks
i - - - - -2
2q;
2 9 20p 20;: 2& 2qo
35ov
35ov 75ov 75ov 35 35ov
c - ~
This Sheet issued wf th A.L. No. 1 August 1956 ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 6 1 7 PART 3
CAPACITORS (Continued)
RESISTORS
--
Remar3cs
1
Rating
350V 5 0 0 ~ 35ov
Tol.
!6
Value
470 pF
Ref ,
c 2 j 6
Rating
9 @f * 3
$IT
3~ TW $W
$7
3 * $ @
@ 4.w
% T~ $W 9 s
$7 &v
$17 &W
-4-f 3 -4 37 ZW @
- Ref ,
R201 R202 ~ 2 0 3 R204 ~ 2 0 5
11206 11207 R208 PC20 9 R210
R211 R212 3321 3 R214 R215
~ 2 1 6 n217 R218 P219 ~ ~ 2 2 0
R221 K222 11223 RV224 P225
R22 6 R227 R228 R229 R-230
LP. or Jolnt Service Cat, No.
21 25 665 (3237 C238
Remarks
Variable
Var iable
1
V a l u e
look ohms look ohms 560 ohms b 7 k ohms lOOk ohms
look O ~ L I S
560 o h m 4.n O ~ S
68k ohms 1 0 ohms
417k has 220k ohms 15k ohms
330k ohms 330k ohms
68k ohms 2 . 2 ~ O ~ , Z S Ln o h r , ~ 1 . S/iegohm look ohms
33k ohm 4-.% ohmi; 1 i'regohm 2.0111 ohms 680k olms
A.P. o r Joint-Service Cat. IT00
2223039 2223038 2221 206 2222090 22 23039
2223038 2221 206 2222090 222301 8 2221 131
2222090 2223081 22221 52 22231 01 22231 01
222301 7 2223206 2222090 22231 64 52&LQA
22221 95 2222090 22231 64 6 0 2 5 ~ 22231 43
222.31 43 22221 53 22291 02 222301 8 Z2221 jil
!a l5505 21 15095
Tole
\
1
( ~ 6
* 2$
}I@
2qz
l 5k ohins 33Ok ohms
681;ohrs lOk ohms
;A% 1
RESISTORS (continued)
INDUCTORS
Rating
& 3 3
4.P 3
Tol.
F
: 16 I c$ 1%
!%a
I @
h
Ref,
RZ3l 2232 R233 R23k
1 R235
\
Description -.- 1 s t IF Transfomer 2nd IF Transformer 3rd IJ? Transformer ivbnitor Loudspeaker Tmnsformer I
-I
Ref,
TR201 ~ ~ 2 0 2 TR203 9 3 ~ 0 4 -
b
Remarks
I
Pattern
656%
EZUGS AND s m s
AP* or J o i n t Service Cat, No.
2223038 2222132 2221111 224-3173 2221131
Descript ion
Coil, IF Input Coil Tuned* B.F. 0. Coil Pitch, B. I?, 0. 'TUNEt Coil Pitch, B.F. 0. *LOWt Coil, B.P,O,
,
Ee f ,
LS201
L
1.
Value
IOCnC ohms I O k ohm
100 ohms 620 ohms 150 ohms
v
Ref.
L201 L202 I1203 L204. ~205
T -t
Patteln Description
571 60 (w) Monitor Loudspeaker, 3 ohms 972-9307
Description
Plug 12 En, Intercconnection IF/RF U n i t s plug 6 Pin, outputs (&. 4) Plug 8 Pin, Inter-connection IF/&? and Power Unimt;s
Plug 12 Pin, Inter-oonnection IF/&? and Fo~ie r Units
Ref.
/
EL201 ~ ~ 2 0 3 ~2204
~ ~ 2 0 5
b
AaPe or J o i n t Service
Cat. No.
6 0 4 57 z5@080 '
601 58
601 57
This Sheet issued with A. Lo No. 2 October 1957 B.R.1617 PART 3 IF UNIT B401A
PLUGS AM) SOCKETS (continued)
SWITCHES
1
Description
Socket 4 way, IF Input Socket Coaxial, R. Eo C. Socket Coaxial, R. E. B.
a
Ref,
r
SK201 SK202 ~ ~ 2 0 3
A,P, or Joint Service
Cat. No,
57772 6045 4 60451
Description
Switch 3 Position, Bandwidth Switch 6 Position, System switch Single Pole, Limiter Switch Single Pole, Durmrry Load Switch Single Pole, Monitor Loudspeaker
4
Ref ,
ST201 Sw202 ~ 2 0 3 STJ204 SW205
Pattern
W983 6A W983 6A ~ 9 8 3 a
Description
Crystal 500 kc/s, Calibrate
* i
Ref.
xL201
Pattern
A/500
FIG. 13
sn N N
0 N N (?
N N ". N
$ 5 0 N N
aJ - a m a - N o o z N N
0
N
- 0
N
N n N N
i : O A - 0 -
N N N N
2
r) N N .n
2 N
4)
4)
0 0
",= 0 O N N o N - -
N
X g N
J'r. P- - ? Z N . n ~ LnD2CJ
N N N Z N
r-* 9 z z r)
N - N
43 N
N - N - 2 .=imp. 5 % g
"" N
a N N
N n
~2 n N
N
CI r- n n N N
n n n u -
N
-?
N
LL
* U
SYSTEM SWITCH. SW 2 0 2
AF OSCILLATOR CZOS CONNECTED HERE SW2Olc
FRONT
/- I
BAND WIDTH SWITCH. sw 2 0 1
REAR \
SW 201 f.9.h.j SW2Ol b FRONT FRONT
SW 202m.n p.q
/- FRONT.
PITCH COlL TUNE L204. [SWiiEq
PITCH COlL LOW L203
REAR
REAR REAR
CAPACITOR C236
SW 202f FRONT. \ SW202 h.J.k.
FRONT.
SWZOl a FRONT
WAFERS NUMBERED FROM FRONT PANEL END
REAR
REAR. REAR
CAL. INPUT -
RECEIVER 840. A . P ~ ~ I ~ O B 8 A . P . S ~ I ~ O C . 1.F: UNIT :- LAYOUT AND SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM
LJ &g----L--J L - ' I L ------ 11
0 SW2011 0 SK 2 0 3
.02 2 1 SW 201h R E B R 2 0 3
560 R222 'w -
o 0 PL 2 0 4
PL2Ol
8 8. 1 C 238 P L 2 0 5
I
A
. C 2 2 2 C221 C224
SK201 .I I 2 0 0 0
1, R 2 l 8 SW 2 0 6 0 4-7K IM
T R 2 0 3
C 2 2 6 4 7 0 p
71 & - Tc 243 -
I-?
Itv2;o
FOR A.PS7140C ONLY
8. F.O.
RECE I VER 840 A.R 57 1 4 0 BIC 1.F: UNIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
R
C
MlSC
2 0 2 201 2 0 4 2 0 6 2 0 5 2 0 8 2 0 9 212 213 235 211 229 221 225 236 2 18 203 234 2 0 7 227 210a ZlOb 231 228 2 3 b 2 ' L 3 23y32 222 219 223 22b
201 243 2 0 2 2 0 4 2 0 6 2 4 0 241 242 207 210 2 0 9 212 218213 233 217 234 216 215 214 226 227 229 225 230 223 238 2 0 3 2 0 5 222 221 208 2 2 0 21 1 U2 237 2 4 235 224 228 231
PLZOI L 2 O l V 2 0 l T R201 SW2Olb SW2Ol f SWZOl9 V203 V 2 0 4 a T R Z ~ J R V 2 2 0 V 2 0 5 V 2 0 4 b SW202b SK2Ol SW 2Oba SW2Ol j X L 2 0 2 S W 2 0 l h V 2 0 2 TR202 SW2Olc SK202
SW2Ola T L SW203 P L 2 0 5 P L Z 0 4 .
P L 2 0 3 SW204 SW2Obd P L 2 0 5 L 2 0 6 SW202j SW202 kmpq X L 2 0 1 L 2 0 3 L2O4 L202 ~ 2 0 5 SW20241 V 2 0 6 S W 2 0 2 f LS201SW20bc SKZOJ
R
MIX
C O M P O N E N T L I S T , R E C E I V E R B 4 0 , ......................................................... .........................................................
P A T T E R N S 5 7 1 4 0 B / C ---------I---------------------- .................................
I F U N I T ------------- -------------
CAPACITORS
A. Po or Joint Se mice
Cat. No. Value Rating Remarks
350v 350v
1 ooov
This Sheet issued with A&. 1Jo. 1 Acgust, 1956 B aR.1617 PART 3 COMPONENTS LIST IF UNIT B ~ / c
:,
V a r i a b l e
Variable wanly
Ref,
c237 C238 c240 C21r.I C242 C243
LP. or Joint Seivice
Cat. No, ,
21.1 5505 zl15095
21 251 99 972-6 179 21 239 94
Value
0.05p 0.1p.G 5 4 PF 75 p 4-34 @' 1 m p F
+
Tol.
XP 2 6
2%
2CF5
Remaxks
C
V a r i a b l e
Variable
Pat ing
5oov 35w
35OV
3wv
R a w , Tol. V a l u e
P 7
Ref, A.P. or
Joint Service Cat. No,
R236 680k ohms 680k ohma R237 22231 43
IOOkohms lOOk ohms 560 ohms 4.7k dms look ohms
look ohms 560 ohms 4.m ohms
6& ohins 150 ohm
4.m o ~ I ~ S 220k ohms 15k ohms 4J"' O h s
I go^
IOCaC: ohms 33k ohms
lh7k d-lms I iviegohm 2.94 0)rms
68Ok ohms 68Ok ohms 15k ohms 330k 02ims
68k ohma
?Ok ohms 300k ahrns IOk ohms
100 ohms 620 ohms
150k o m
R20I R202 R203 R204 R205
R206 R207 R208 Rm9 R~IOA/B
Pi1 1 R212 ~213 R218 1321 9
RV220 , R2 21 R222 m23 RV224
R225 ~ 2 2 6 R227 R228 R229
R230 R231 R232 R233 R234
,
2223039 2223038 2221 206 22220% 2223039
2223038 2221 206 2222090 222301 8 2221131
2222090 2223081 22221 52 2222090 22231 64
2262183 22221 95 2222090 22231 64 2262948
22231 43 22231 43 22221 53 22231 02 222301 8
22221 31 2223038 22221 32 2221111 22431 73
2223059
.
,1096
H @ * 4F
@
$W * % * 1V
H 4F- 3 9
@?
4.Y
Ref,
~ 1 2 0 1 t o .
TR203 m 0 4 T R m
Ref.
L201 L202 Lm3 L204 L a 5 ~206
muGs AM> SOCKETS --
Pattern No.
65 6%
." 7
De s c r i p t i o n
Tzansfolmers IF
Transformer AF Tranaf onner AP (S. R. E. Output, Receiver 62B only)
D e s c d p t i on
Coil IF, dl? Input- Coil tuned - BeFe 0, Cojl Pitch - B,F,O, "TUNE" Coil Pitch - BoFa 0. tq-,gwt? Coil, - Calibration Coupling - Coil tuned - C r y s t a l Filter -
4
m w m L f
I.
Ref.
LS201 1
Description 1
Loudspeaker, 3 ohms, k n i t o r
Pattern
972-9307
Description
Plug 12 Pin, Intel.-coll~cting IF/Z(F Units Plug 6 Pin, Outputs (I&. 4) P l q 8 Pin, Inter-connecting IF/. and Power U n i t s
Plug 12 Pin, Inter-connecting IF/AF and Power Units
Socket 4 way, IF Input Socket Single, R E & Socket Single, R. E. B.
*
@
Ref.
EX1201 PL203 Pfi204 m205
SKX)l SU02 SKm3
J
1
&Pa o r J o i n t Service
Cat. Nor
601 57 2560080 601 58 a157
57772 6045 1 604-51
4,
Description
Snitch, 3 position - Bandwidth Switch, 5 posi t ion - System
Switch, single pole - L t n i t e r S w i t c h , si-e pole - b m q y Load
Switch, b m position - A.G,C.
Ref,
W201 SFif202 SW203 W204
m206
A.P. or J o b t S e ~ c e
Cat . No.
5930-99-972-8826 w9836A
5930-99-972-8825
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 2 October 1957
CRYSTALS
~ . R . 1 6 1 7 PART 3 COMPONENTS LIST I F UNIT B 4 0 B I C
SWITCH W A F E R S
I
. Ref,
slw202 m, n, P, q sw202 f ~ ~ 2 0 2 h, j, k SW201 c SW201 b ~ ~ 2 0 1 a SW201 f , g , h, j
f
Description
Crystal, 500 kc/s, Calibrate Crystal, Crystal F i l t e r Crystal, Filter Unit
R e f .
XL201 XL202
-
J
Pattern No,
65636 65635 65634 65633 65632 65631
not pat ternised (A. S.W.E. Drawing 57240)
Pattern No.
67864
/ MODEL 8 Al? 12945
s w m c d c SWZOI rghr j S W ~ I b FRONT FRONT SW2OY FRONT
SW20lg -1
SW2oIa FRONT
VOLTAGES TAKEN W lTH AVOMETER MODEL 8 A& 12945
S W ~ ( ~ C & swml b
BAND WIDTH REAR swm I REAR
TR 202 WAFERS NUMBERED FROM FRONT PANEL END FRONT AND REAR CONTACTS WIRED TOGETHER WHERE MARKED *
SW202 m a p SW202nae SW202 t r k FRON T S W 202 p FRONT 202 e
SWZOla FRONT
REAR
SW202h r j FRONT SW202h
R229
SYSTEM LC 232 LPL ZOI PIN I
SWITCH SW 202. REAR SW202 m R232 REARSW202 n REAR SW202k REAR SWZOZ J
- V 2 0 6 k ~X)CPIN!i SW 202 k
SW?O2 m
L 205 SW202 /
RECEIVER 840 ~ ~ 5 7 1 4 0 ~
1.F UNIT. LAYOUT AND SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM.
B.R. 16 17 Part 3
FIG. 16
Change No 7 September 1967
C O Y P . O N E N T S L I S T R E C E I V E R B 4 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -_____--_-____-__-_---------------------___----___-----
P A T T E R N 5 7 1 6 0 D ........................... ...........................
I F U N I T -- ----------- -------------
CAPACITORS
Remarks
Stud mounting Stud mounting
Stud mounting Stud mounting Stud mounting
Stud mounting Stud mounting Stud mounting
No Capaci tor
Stud m0unti.n.g
Stud mounting
Stud mounting
Ref,
r
C2O1 C202 C203 C204 C205
C206 C207 C208 ~ 2 0 9 C210
C211 C212 C213 C214 C215
~ 2 - 1 6 C217 C218 C2l9 C220
C221 C222 C223 C224 C225
C226 C227 C228 ~ 2 2 9 C230
C231 c232 c233 c234 c235
T o l .
5% 2076 3077 2 m
5%
5% 2@ 2@ 2 m 9
5% 2m '2z 2 m
2@ 2 w 1@
2076
2016 2 6 2@ I W 2m
5% 2m d @ 2046 20%
2 6 2m 2m 10%
Rating
7 5OV 350V 350V 350V 75OV
7 5OV 35OV 350V
.350V 750v
7 5OV 350V 350V 350V 7 5OV
75OV 75OV 750V
35OV
350V 350V 75OV 75OV 350V
750V 75ov 75ov
1 OOOV 350V
7 5Ov 75OV 75ov 750V 75ov
k P , o r Joint -Service
Cat. No,
01 2-3984 01 1-781 8 01 1-5095 01 1 -5095 01 2-3984.
01 2-3.984 01 1-5095 01 1-5095 01 1-5095 '
01 2-3984
01 2-3984 01 1 -5095 01 1-5095 01 1-5095 01 2-3984
01 2-31 65 01 1-7826 01 2-3292
01 1-5095
01 1 -5095 01 7 -5148 01 1-7826 01 213292 01 1-5095
01 2-3984 01 2-31 65 01 2-3292 01 1-7827 01 1-5095
01 2-341 2 01 1-7826 01 I -7826 01 2-31 65 01 2-341 2
I
Value
470 PF 0 .1pF 0 . 1 p ' 0.1 /zip 470' pF
470 PF 0 . 1 p F 0 .1pF 0 . 1 p F 470 pF.
470 PF 0.lp.F
;IF 47 PF
.+I00 pP 0 . 0 2 p '
200 pF
O o l ~
O e l ~ 0 . 5 p
0 .02pF 200 pF 0 . 1 p F
670 PP 100 pF 200 pF
0.005piF' O. I / iF
500 PP 0.02/d' 0 .02pF
l o o PF 500 PF
6- Change No. 7 September 1 967 ~Ji.1617 PIKT 3 clkmmm UST IF UMT B40D
CAPACITORS (Cont 'd.)
RESISTORS
Ref.
r
C236 C237 C238 c239 C 240
C 241 C 242
(2 243 c 244
C265 C 246 c 247 C 248 C 249 C250
A, P. o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat. No.
01 1-7822 01 1-5095 01 6-0009 945-4604
972-2071 01 6-0047
O? 6-0009
972-61 78
0; 2-6768 01 6-0009 0.1 2-6770 01 2-31 65 01 2-71 03
Value
425 PF O . O 5 / u F
0 . 1 p P 4-18 pF
1.5-8 pF
75 PF 3-30 PF
4-18 pF 2-1 2 pF
3.3 PF 4-18 pP 4.7 PF loo PI? 39 PF
r
Ref,
R201 R202 R20 j R204 R Z O ~
R206 R307 R208 ~ 2 0 9 R210
R211 R212 R213 R218 ~ 2 1 9
R221 R222 ~ 2 2 3 ~ 2 2 5 R226
Rat ing
%$
$W 3 3 3 3
@ 3 8 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 3 3 9 9
A.P. o r Jo in t -Service
Cat, No.
022-3039 022-3037 022-1 ? 93 022-2090 022-3039
022-3037 022-1 193 022-2090 022-301 8 022-1 130
022-2090 022-3093 022-2142 022-2090 022-31 64
022-21 95 022-2090 022-31 64 022-31 43 022-31 43
Value ,
100k ohms IOOk ohms 470 ohms 4.7k ohms IOOk ohms
100k ohms 470 ohms 4.7k ohms
68k ohms 150 ohms
4.7k ohms 270k ohms
12k ohms 4.7k ohms
1M ohm
j3k ohms 4.7k ohms
1M ohm 680k ohms 680k ohms
r >
Remarks
J
I
To1 .
I OF 4 0 %
I %
1 PA A @ jw 1 6 I OQ/o
WJ l m 10%
1046 1 m , 1 6
jm
Remarks
A
Lemco 1510
Var iable Var iable - Oxley
D i f f . D.V.C. I-5/8
Lemco 15-10 Var iable , W & R
c30-01 Var iable Var iable , W & R
CJI/I IA
Var iable
Tol,
% 20Q/o 20% I
2%
I %
0.5 pF lcqb
0.5 pF 2@
5%
!
Rating
35OV 50 OV 35OV
35ov
75OV
75OV 750V 75OV
RESlSTORS ( Cont ' d. ) - - - - -- - - - - -
VARIABLE RESISTORS
Remarks
J
W irewound
Ref.
R227 R228 R229 R23C R231
R232 R233 R234 R235 '
R236
R23-7 R238 ~ 2 3 9 R24G
TRANSFORMERS
Remarks
Limi ter A, F. Gain
INDUCTORS
A,P, or Joint-Service
Czt, No.
022-21 53 022-31 02 022-301 8 022-21 30 022-3037
022-21 32 022-1 11 I 01 1-3482 022-3058 022-3091
022-31 76 022-221 4 022-1 I 30 022-1 I 63
Ref,
TRZOI ~ ~ 2 0 3
i
Value
15k ohms 330k ohms
68k ohms 10k ohms
100k ohms
IOk ohms I00 ohms 620 ohms 150k ohms 270k ohms
I ,a ohms 47k ohms
I ohms 270 ohms
To1 .
I Od/o 1 0a/o
1 6 1%
1% 1% !%
I 06/0 1 @/o
I* 10% I O ~ / O
1%
Value
ICOk ohms 2 . 5 ~ ohms
. Ref,
RV220 RV224
i
To1
2P/0 2%
1
Rat ing
3 3 9 9 3 3 9 4 w 3' 9
9 9 9 3
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat, No.
972-9484 972-9485
Rating
O J W 0,IW
A.P. o r Jc in t -Service
Cat, No,
A.P. 1061 19 . A,P. 106.1 20
1
Descr ip t ion
I. Fa Transf o m e r I. F. Transf o m e r
I
Descr ip t ion
Coi l Tuned, I. F. Coi l Tuned, B.F.O. Coil B.F.O. Coil , C r y s t a l F i l t e r
Ref,
L201 L202 L205 L206
AmPo o r J oint-Service
Czt. NO.
A.P. 1061 18 A,P, 1061 21 A,P, 1061 21 A.P.106124
Change No. 7 September 1967 M a 1 6 1 7 PART 3 mwoNmrS LIST IF UNIT B40D
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Ref,
LS201
SWITCHES
A.P. o r J o i n t -Service
Cat, No,
972-93w
Descr ip t ion
I
Loudspeaker, 3 ohms - Monitor
b
CRYSTALS
Desc r ip t ion
Plug 12 Pin , In t e rconnec t ing (RF/IF u n i t ) p l u g 6 Pin, Mark 4, Audio Frequency Output
Plug 8 Pin , In t e rconnec t ion (IF/AF and Power unit)
Plug 1 2 Pin, In t e rconnec t ing ( I F / A F and Power un i t )
Socket, 4 P i n - In t e rconnec t ing (RF/IF units) Socket, Coaxial - R.E. C. Socket, Coaxial - R.E.B. Socket f o r B,F.O, C r y s t a l
Ref,
PL201 PL202
PL203
Ref,
~ ~ 2 0 1 bW202 SW2O3 SW204 ~ ~ 2 0 6
A.P, o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat. No*
972-821 4 972-91 12
911-6428) two 972-8208)items
A.P. o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat. No,
A.P. 206828 A.P. 206830 972-8826 AeP.43699 972-8825
two
Descr ip t ion
Switch, J pos i t i on , Bandwidth Switch, 7 p o s i t i o n , System Switch, 2 pos i t ion , L i m i t e r Switch, 2 pos i t ion , D m y Load Switch, 2 pos i t ion , A.G.C.
Desc r ip t ion
I
Crystal, 500 kc/s - C a l i b r a t e Crystal, 500 kc/s - Crys ta l F i l t e r Crys t a l F i l t e r U n i t
Ref.
XL201 XL202
i
SK201 SK202 SK203 SK204
i
A.P, o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat. No,
A.P. 67864 A51 7389
97 2-8230 580-3620 580-3620
FIGS. 17 & 18
M * O ' " 6 - a
k G 9 - 2LL m
2 0- t n
= 0'
Q:
- 0 Z
-J
k 3 t . - s -0
z .- C
U U L n
2 x e
d s?
n
Q
2
- - n
ri
El 0 - 2 - n +
. N 0 ?
I",",
e n d El
n; - n - -
Id
s?
5 n
E l '
+ 2 vi
n
ri
i?
. N
0 n
GiS -
I - 0 '? 2
-
2
. . 88 '?"' V)V) LLLL
4 0 '? e t
- 0 1 c
N
- 2 2 V)
gg 5 % - 0
o;'? El* 2
- . 5 r! P: I-
rirj 00 7 3
Pi
0 '?
d 0 n 5
>
58 nn
CL
N zs4 hi2 V ) W Y
g ,
C O i G I O i T Z N T S L I S T R E C E I V E f i B 4 0 , ---_---------_------------------------------------------ ---_------_---_-----------------------------------------
P A T T E R N S 5 7 1 4 0 / A --------------------I------------ ------------------------------
A . P . A N D P O - J E R U N I T --------------_-------------------- --------_------_-_------------------
CAPACITORS
RESISTORS 4
Ref. LP. or
J o i n t Service Cat, I\To,
2223207 222301 7 22231 01 21221 227 2273 001
22231 22 222221 5 2221 125 ~273001 22231 44
V a l t ~
r
HeP,
--..
Remrks Tol.
I
A,?. or Joint Selvice Cat. No.
Value
2.2;:: obi-n~ 6& ohins 3301~ ohas 820 ohins 3k ohns
k70k ohms 4- ohm 120 ohm 50 ohm 680k ohins
Rating
c301 c302 C303 C304 (3305
c306 Go7 C308 (3399 C3 lO
C313 C312 (334 3
2244085 7.5k oh-JB 4.5w 2222069 3, jk ohm $3 22441 14. 15k ohm , 6~ 022-1 148 220 ohms Z * 022-1 1 92 470 ohms &'f
022-1 I 92 470 ohms 56. 3
521 62 21 I 551 6 21 15506 Zl 4 5500 Z112521
2-1 I 2521 Z112521 Z112521 21 24409 21 24609
21 2 4 w 9 21 24409 21 15502
Tol,
\
i
I Alternatives to R304 and R308 when CV4043 is fitted.
I ooov 750V 350V I OOOV 41)OV
40oV 4QOv m0.V 75ov 75Ov
350v 75Ov
, IOOOV 1 -
4F 4/3" 4r"F 0.01 ,@ 0.01 fd?
2$ 2$
2C$3 2$3 2 6
b t i n g
$7 &W a? 37
4~ &I? 3-f 3
!d
Remarks
Variable
Variable
This Sheet issued vdth A.L. i\lo. 1 August 1956
PmSFORiiRS
B.R.1617 PART 3 COWOliEi~ITS LIST S' A 1 9 POWER UNIT B&/f.
Ref. Patte m. Description
TR301 65 689 Output T m s f ormer ~ ~ 3 0 2 655 61 B iiains Transfolmer
i
FUSES --
L
Ref. b
L301 L3O2 L303
L
1
Patteim
655 60 65564
Ref.
PL301 ~~30.1 sic302
JACKS - 1 Ref. Pattern Description
1
T
Description
Choke IH, TJote F i l t e r Choke 18H, Smothing Choke IOH, Smoothing
Ref.
3'301 3'302
I Jacks, J Pole, Telephones
Description
d\se 0.5 Arr;p Fuse 2 Amg Fuse 2 Amp
Pattern
Z5 901 08 Z590140
Description t
Ref ,
i 1 F303 Z5901lO
A
A.P. or Joint Seivice
Cat. >To,
25 60050 ?783 69 @I 56
Pattern
1
Description
Plug 2 E n , lkins (3hrl-c 4) Socket 8 iifay, IF/AJ? and Power Unit Soclret 12 Vay, D/AF and Power U n i t
~ ~ 3 0 . 1 I
I Switch, Double Pole, Mains 2
FIG.^^. RECEIVER 8 4 0 A P . S ~ I ~ O B ~ C A.F. 8 POWER UNIT. TOP LAYOUT.
? STAHI 3 F N I N D I N C COIL L :a:
I b FIPIISH 11 1 1 I
l l
- -- 7 14 301.303 307 .304 3 0 6 3 0 8 3 0 2 51 3 3 1 0 312. 3 1 1
31'4 h19710 . -- 3 18 3 0 4 3 0 3 . 3 0 5 JI 3 311 3 1 2 . 3 0 6 315 3 1 4 317 316
FIG. 21 RECEIVER B 4 0 A . P . S ~ I ~ O BIC A.F. 8 POWER UNIT. BOTTOM LAYOUT.
R
C VISC PL 3 0 1 RV 3 0 5 R V 309 , t % C J ' J K 3 0 1 T R S O I V 3 O I T R 2 0 4 V 3 0 2 V 3 0 3 V 3 0 4 TR 3 0 2 L 3 0 2 FS 3 0 2 F S 3 0 S FS 3 0 1 M l S C
- .
T R 3 0 2 FS 3 0 2 230V- - 40-0~1
1 ; i R312 L 3 0 2 3 3 K R311 7 5 K Y c3g9 bl I
I
C 3 I S L C 3 1 4 C 3 1 0 I
I
- P L
Y:
FS303 SW301
~3
TR 301
A F OUTPUT TO PL. 2 0 5
* WHEN C V 4 0 4 3 IS FITTED R 3 0 4 IS
ALTERED TO 2 2 0 A , R 3 0 8 A IS FITTED
ACROSS R3OB WHICH IS RE-LABELLED
/ R 3 0 8 B AND VALVE ALTERED TO 4 7 0 n
/
- - - - -
R
C
MISC.
RECEIVER 840 A.P. 57 140 B/C A.F. 8 POWER UNIT + CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
301 3 0 4 . 3 0 2 310.312.303. 311. 314. 3 0 6 . 3 0 7 313.308. R 318 3 0 6 3 0 3 3 0 5 319 3 0 4 313 317 315 316 314 311.312. 3 10.309. C
SK.301 R V 3 0 5 V 3 0 1 TR204 V 3 0 4 L 3 0 2 V 3 0 2 R V 3 0 9 JK301 V 3 0 3 FS3OI T R 3 0 2 FS302 SW301 PL3OI M ~ S C SK302 SW205 L 3 0 4 T R 3 0 1 J K 3 0 2 SK302 FS 3 0 3
C O i l I P O N E N T S L I S T R E C E I V E R B 4 O ---_----------_---_------------------------------------ ...................................................... P A T T 3 R N S 5 7 1 4 0 B / C ----------------I--------------- ---------------------------------
A . F . A N D P O W E R U N I T --------------_---------------------- ----------------_--_---------------------
CAPACITORS
I?ESISTORS
Rating
35ov I OOOV WOV mov 75ov
75ov 75ov 75ov I OOOV m v
WOV 750V 35ov 1 OOOV 3 5 0 ~
Remarks Tol.
2@ 2@
I
Remarks
I
Variable
, Variable
Al ternat ives to
I 1 -1
Value
O e l d u F 0 . 0 y
b
Ref.
(303 c304
R308A 022-1 I 92 470 ohms % $W R304 and R308 when R308B 022-1 1 92 470 ohms 5% &W ) ~ ~ 4 0 4 3 i s f i t t e d .
A.P. or J o i n t Service Cat. No.
Z l 15506 21 15500
c305 C306 C309
C310 cg1 I C312 c313 c314
(331 5 c316 c317
' C318 c3i 9
I
Tol.
1 \,$
j
$
?-16. ;
5%
Value
2.2211 ohms 6& ohms
330k ohms
3k O ~ I I ~
820 Ohma
470k ohrils 47k cd-lnls
I 2 0 0hn.t~ 50 ohms
680k ohms
7.5kbohns 3.3k ohnls 15:c ohrm
L7k o h i i
220 ohms
Ref,
BjO.1 1~302 2303 2304 iiv305
;I306 ~1307 i3.308 R'no9 n:31 o
231 I 3312 231 3 -131 4
R304
21 12521 2@ 211 2521 2@ Z124-409 2 @
21 24409 21 24439 Z4244)9
. 21 15502 21 1 2934
21 12934 21 I 551 6 21 15574 Zl I 5500 21 15632
L
Rating
ST? *w
$7 $7
3 $if
$7
$f
4.5w
a % 4
9
-LP. or J o i n t Service
Cat. No.
2223207 222301 7 22231 04 2221 227 2273001
222 3.122 Z222215 2221 123 2273001 Z22314Lt.
2244085 3222069 2241 1 4. 22220%
022-1 14-8
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 ~.~.1617 PART 3 COMPONENTS LIST
AF AND POWER UNIT, BkOB/C TRANSFORMERS
INDUCTORS
Ref,
T R ~ 0 I TR302
Pz,t tern No,
65689 67763A
4
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Descr ip t ion
Output Transformer Mains Transformer
Ref.
3'301 F3O2 3'303
Ref,
Ref.
L3 02 L303
A.P, o r Joint
Service
P a t t e r n No,
Z590108 25901 10 25901 I 0
I Descr ip t ion
P a t t e r n No,
65560 65564
Descr ip t ion
Fuse 0.5 Amp Fuse 2 Amp Fuse 2 Amp
Plug, 2 Pin , Mains a ark 4) Socket 8 way, IF/AF and Power Unit Socket 12 way, IF/M and Power Unit
Descr ip t ion
Choke, 18H, Smoothing Choke, IOH, Smoothing
SWITCHES
JACKS -
Descr ip t ion
Monitor L,S, Switch Switch, Double Pole , Mains
r Ref.
r
SW2CI5 SW301
Pattern No.
52805 60448
Descr ip t ion
Jacks, 3 . Pole, Telephones
Ref,
JXJO?/~
P ~ t t e r n No.
676A
TR 301
TS I
FIG. 23
a START OF WINDING COlL b FINISH OF WINDING COlL
VOLTAGES TAKEN W I T H AVOMETER MODEL 8 A. P. 12945.
RESISTORS. - CAPACITORS.
MISCELLANEOUS
3 0 3 3 0 8 314 301 315
3 0 2 3C 3 19
3 0 9 318 310
2 383
~ ~ 3 0 1 ~ ~ 3 0 5 RV309 JK30 TR301 V301 V 3 0 2
RECEIVER 840 A.P 5 7 1 4 0 ~ . A.E & POWER UNIT. W T O M LAYOUT.
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
TRANSFORMERS
B.~.1617 PART 3 CQ-IPONENTS LIST
AF AND POWER UNIT, EL!+OB/C
I
Ref,
TR30 4 TR302
\
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Pa,ttern No.
65689 6 7 7 6 3 ~
I
Description a
Output Transformer Mains Transformer
A
Pa t t e rn No,
65560 65564
il
7
Description
I
Fuse 0.5 Amp Fuse 2 Amp Fuse 2 Amp
1
Ref,
3'301 ~ 3 0 2 F3O3
SWITCHES
Description
Choke, 18H, Smoothing Choke, IOH, Smoothing
Ref,
L302 L303
Pa t t e rn No.
25901 08 25901 10 25901 10
Description
Plug, 2 Pin, Mains ark 4) Socket 8 way, IF/A.I? and Power Unit Socket 12 way, IF/AF and Power Unit
b
Ref,
PLjOl SK 3 01 SK302
*
A.P. o r J o i n t
Service Cat. No,
~560050 w8369 601 56
1
Descrip t ior, I
Monitor L.S, Switch Switch, Double Po le , Mains
Ref. Pa t te rn No.
Description I
Jacks, 3. Pole, Telephones
I
Ref,
JX304/2
Pat tern No.
676A
SW2CI5 SW301
52805 60448
FIG. 24
( SK 30215 -
A. F: OUTPUT TO PL 204
RECEIVER 8 40 A.P 57140 D A F & POWER UNIT:- CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
Change No. 7 September 1967
VOLTAGES TAKEN WITH AVOMETER M O D E L 8. A.F! 12945
C O M P O N E N T S L I S T R E C E I V E R B 4 0 ------------------------------2---------------------------2 ______________--___----------------------------------------
P A T T E R N 5 7 1 4 0 D --------------------------- ---------------------------
A , F , A N D P O W E R U N I T ------------------------------------- ----------------we-------------------
CAPACITORS
RESISTORS
+
Remarks
TCC Type 82
TCC Type 82
TCC Type 82 CP.45N
Ref,
C303 C304 ~305 c306 C399
C ~ I 0 c31 I C312 c3l3 C314
c315 c316 c317 C318 c319
Tol,
2046 2Wo 2@ 20% 2@
2* 2% 20% 2 6 2046
2 6 I@ 16 2@ 2@
A,P, or Joint-Service
Cat. No,
OI 1-781 8 01 1-5500 01 I -2926 01 i -2926 01 2-4409
01 2 4 0 9 01 2 4 0 9 01 2-4409 01 1-7827 932-251 3
932-251 3 580-1 81 6 91 1-6793 01 1-5500 01 1-7821
1
R a t i n g
35OV 1 OOOV 4cov 4c ov 75OV
75ov 750V 75m
I OOOV kO0V
40 OV 350V 35ov I OOOV 35ov
Rat ing
3 9 9 9 3
$W 9 434 8 6~
3 3
- - - - 9
Value
Omlp-F O.OOI/UF
4 F 4 p
O.OI/UF
O.Ol/d? O.OI/UI? O.OI/uF 0.005pF
8/uF 0.02pF O.q/uF
O m O O 1 ~
1p
r
Remarks
Wirewound
W irewound
Value
2,2M ohms 82k ohms 220k ohms 220 ohms 470k ohms
47k ohms 470 ohms 7.5k okns 3.3k ohms 15k ohms
2.2k ohms 470 ohms
Tol. .
I Pb I @ 10% I@' I*
10% 1% 5%
I(% !%
1% 10% - -- - -
*
Ref,
R301 R302 R303 R304 R306
R307 R308 ~ 3 l I R312 R313
R314 R315
A.P. or Joint-Service
Cat, No.
022-3206 022-3028 022-3079 022-1 151 022-31 21
022-221 4 022-1 195 01 1-3508 022-2069 01 I -3425
022-2048 022-1 195
Change No. 7 September I967
VARIABLE RESISTORS
B,R.1617 F A T 4 C O T Q ? S ,TS
.vz: ?(&:* ' J?;; * E,':.<y;
t
Ref.
~v305/9
INDUCTORS
t
Ref.
TR3 0 l TR30 2 TR303
A.P, o r Joint-Service
Cat. No,
972-9485
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat. No.
971 -9621 971 -9596 971 -9513
Ref.
L302 L304
PLLGS AND SOCKETS
I
Value
3k/50 ohms
Descript ion
Audio Output T r a n s f o r ~ e r Mains Transformer Monitor Loudspeaker Transformer
I
Ref.
P301 ~ 3 0 2 / 3
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat. No,
971 -96j 8 971 -5595
SWITCHES
Tol. - +
1% A
Descript ion
Choke I &25E - Smoothing Choke 20H - Smoothing
A,P. o r Joint-Service
Cat. No,
059-0408 059-01 I 0
Descript ion
500 mA Cartr idge Fuse 2 A Car t r idge Fuse
Descript ion
Plug 2 P i n , Mark 4, Mains Input Socket 8 Pin, Interconnecting (IF/AF and Power u n i t ) Socket 12 Pin , Interconneoting (IF/AF and Power u n i t )
h
Ref.
m301 '
SIC301 SK302
JACKS -
Rating
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat. No.
999-3528 972-8232 972-8233
t
Ref.
~0~ SW30 2
Remarks
Ganged RF/AF Gain
A.P. o r Joint-Service
Cat. No,
933-001 972-5044
R e f .
JX301/2
Descript ion
A
Switch, 2 p o s i t i o n - Nains Konitor L,S. Switch
b
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
972-9652
Descript ion
Jack - 3 Pole A
FIG. 25
kt- R
122 103 105 107 108 113 I18 114 115 117 l lb
R F U N I T lL P,F 2 ' R F FREO CHANGER S K IOI
SKI02 l2( R l S V r -
( ? I 103 104 105 110 113 114 I I b 1 0 7 l o b i o e 109 1 1 1 112 11s 121 118
117 120
PLlOl
,A- I
LOCAL OSCILLATOR N O T E ' -
REFER TO FIG 2 P l I FOR VALUES Cf COM?ONEPTI
IN TURRET COMQAPTMINTS
R
c 2 3 1 r 5 0 0 ~ , -?+$ WHEN C V 4 0 4 3 IS FITTED R 3 0 4 IS ALTERED .
TO 2 2 0 , R 3 0 8 A IS FITTED ACROSS R 3 0 8 WHICH IS RE-LABELLED R 3 0 8 B AND VALUE
C V 3 0 3 ALTERED TO 4 7 0 .
PL. 2 0 5 - 7 SK 3 0 2 7 -)i*
X X
1 I
A.E & POWER UNIT
RECEIVER 8 4 0 A.P 57140/n CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FIG. 25
T h ~ s sheet issued w ~ t h A.L. No. l Auqust 1956
1.F: UNIT PL 201
12
I
TO PL 2'
--
L IsT I F ZNDI F SRD I F A C C
I" RE S K I 0 2
R.I. S. '2
FIG. 26
R.F. UNIT F R.F. FREQ. CHANGFR SK 101
R
C
MlSC
R
c
MISC
LOCAL OSCl LLATOR
101 I 0 3 104 105 110 113 114 I16 117 I 2 0 107 I 0 6 108 1 0 9 111 112 115 121 118
122 I 2 3 , 1 2 4 119
101 103 1 0 5 107 1 0 8 Ill 118 114 115 117 116 119 120 121 122 ,Lo 124 127 128 129 141 I f : 102 104 111 112 1 0 6 131 134 133 1330 132 I:\ 140 123 125
109 I10 135 136 137 1 5 0
PLlOl RV102 V l O l V102 '4103 V 1 0 4 SKlOl SW M TRIO1 SWICII TR 102 TRIO3
L l o l sw162Rdo4 PLlOJ
SW102.3 LPIOI-107 RV125 SK 102 L102 SW102b XLlOl SW102c
NOTES - I THE FOLLOWINC COMPONENTS ARE ONLY FITTED TO
PATT 57140C - C141,C142,C143 AND SWM
2 THE HICH IMPEDANCE AERIAL CONNECTION TO P L I O I D, INCLUDING CIOI, I S OMITTED IN PATT57140C
3 C133A S FITTED ONLY IN PATT 5714081C
4 R E F t a -0 F 2 P T J FOR VALUESOT CONPONINTI IN TURRET CWARTMENTS
B.R. 1617 Pa r t 3
FIG. 26
R304 I S IS F ITTED
-LABELLED T O 470 *
RECEIVER 840. A . P ~ ~ I ~ O B / C . CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
This sheet Issued w ~ t h A L. No.2 October 1957
I.F. UNIT
B.F.O.
FIG. 27
IT R.F.
* C
R
CREO; CHANGER SK l a '
NOTE.- .
I< CIRCUIT SHOWS BAND SWITCH S- TO BAND 1. CIRCUITS
Clq2 3 (
FOR OTHER BANDS ARE SHOWN IN FIG. 8 Part 3 CdMPONENTS ASSOCIATED WITH TURRET SECTION BANDS 2 - 5 ARE OMITTED FROM THIS RVlOl DIAGRAM BUT SHOWN 'OOK
IN FIG. 8 Part 3
C104 loop
LOCAL OSCl LL ATOR Rl29
SW 102
SW 1030
102 103 I27 I28 L63 165 166 177 182 D 4 101 123 124 125 129 I30 160 164 180
106 I05 I07 122 126 141 142 143 159 162 161 179 181 178 183 0 103 112 123 124
0 2 K)5 106 Kn 113 115 114 120 126 125 m me 104 130 116 I08 I22 121 I29
l S C ~ ~ l SWIO2 YIOI -LPV y K ) I MRI VlOl %K)I VIO2 XLlOl TRlll V103 TR116 SKI03
W I O ~ -SVJIO3; TRIO1 RV102 LfOI WlODb 9 3 3 3 ~ SKJQ?, .LQ$ SWK;B VIO* - Rz
, C
R
'NX'
B / < 10 7 . J , , + : )
FIG. 27
A.F. & POWER UNIT LIMITER PL *03 STABlLlSER M I ? RECTlFlER
X 2 DETECTOR
TO PL204
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
I.F. UNIT PL 201 IST 1 F ~ N D . 1.F. %D. 1.E A.C.C. DETECTOR
12
MISC.
L I EXT L.S.
B SW 2 0 4 "4
--- PL~OI ~ m a , TR2U SW2Olf SW2Olg V202 PL204 TP202 T 203 S K m SW202j L2a V2C4 SW2060 SW2aj S W m h SW20lk W 2 0 k VX)3 SW202n MJb I
SWXMk PL 202 S m 0 4 SW20lb XL202 SW206d L 2 0 6 SK202 ~ ~ 2 0 2 t - n v206 I
D
6 0 0 i\-
LINE a
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Par t 3
FIG. 28
R E P A I R A N D W I N D I N G D A T A F O R C O I L S
The fo l lowing pages g ive d e t a i l s concerning the c o i l s f o r the var ious t r ans fone rs , chokes and s i m i l a r components through-out the receiver. A1 1 pat terns a re covered by t h i s information. Winding data i s
not given f o r the l a t e r types o f i r on cored transformers and chokes, as these items a re not repairable, i t i s important therefore, t ha t spa reso f these items should beava i l ab le . ~ e t a i l s a r e given concern-
ing the r a t i n g and general cha rac te r i s t i c s o f these components so tha t i n the case o f a real emergency where no d i rec t spare i s avai lable, a su i t ab le subst i t u t e could be f i t t e d .
when re-winding a c o i l , i t should be noted tha t when a solenoid winding i s t o be s ta r t ed a g iven d is tance
from the base .of the former, the s t a r t i n g washer should be located along the former by wrapping two tcf-ns
o f 0.005" x l / a n Lassothyl Tape on the f o m r so t ha t the top edge o f the tape i s 1/32" nearer the base
o f the former than the required s t a r t i n g po in t o f t he winding.
c o i l from the base showing the tag pos i t ions
( ~ e f e r s t o a l l t u r r e t c o i l s )
~ l l references t o d i r e c t i o n o f winding r e f e r t o t h i s pos i t ion .
Note. The c i r c u i t references quoted on the fo l low ing diagrams r e l a t e t o B~O/A/B/C receivers. The corres- ponding 8400 references can be obtained from the c i r c u i t diagram Fig. 27.
FIG. 29
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D I ( T R I O I )
W I N D I N G DATA
P R I M A R Y WINDING
Sta r t Tag 4. ~ i n i s h Tag 3. 93 tu rns anti-clockwise o f 40 s.w.G. enamel wi re.
winding Type - solenoid, c lose wound, anchored by means o f a washer p u t on t o the former before the main winding.
~i n i sh - S ta r t and f i n i s h held by one washer, a f t e r the ma i n winding.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 2. F in ish Tag 1.
874 turns clockwise, 3/42 enamel and S. F.C. wire.
Length o f winding - 118".
winding Type - sing1 e Wave 51/54.
wound on Douglas Gears - A.50, 8.36, C.34, D.50, E.60, F.60.
F n i sh - Two washers a t the s t a r t and f i n , sh. ~ i s t r e n e Lacquered.
- PRIMARY
Vacuum impregnated and wax d.pped.
Colour coding on Plate:- Red, Red, Blue.
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D I ( . T R I O I )
P a t t e r n s 57140C/D O n l y
W I N D I N G DATA
PRIMARY W I N D I N G (wound a f t e r secondary)
Winding t o progress along former t o base.
Sta r t Tag 2 . F in i sh Tag 4 ( s t a r t u i r e c t l y
under secondary wind i ng) . 43 tu rns anti-clockwise, ( d i r ec t i on of
r o ta t ion o f former, looking along t i le
former towards the base) of 28 S.W.G. enamel S.S.C. wire.
winding Type - Close wound solenoid anchored by a washer put on former
before secondary w i nd i ng . F in ish - F in i sh held w i t h one washer.
SECONDARY WIN D l NG
Sta r t Tag 2. F i n i sh Tag 1.
874 tu rns clockwise ( d i r e c t i o n o f r o t a t i o n o f former look ing along the
former towards the base), 3/42 S.W.G. e?amel and S.F.C. wire.
Length o f Winding - l / 8 " .
Winding Type - Single Wave 51:54. Wound on Douglas Gears A.50, 8.36, C.34,
0.50, E.60, F.60.
F i n i sh - F in ish he ld w i t h 1/8' x 0.005" Lassothyl Tape 5, No. 3711/9.
F i r s t few tu rns t o be secured t o the former by a smear o f t h i n Polystyrene varnish.
P R I M A R Y
B.R. 1617 Part
FIG. 30
P R I M A R Y SECONDARY
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
Colour Code - Red, Red, Green,
FIG. 31
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D 2 ( T R I O I )
W l NDlNG DATA
PRIMARY WINDING
Sta r t Tag 3 . ~ i n i s h Tag 4.
44 tu rns ant i-clockwi se, 38 S. W. G. w i re, D. F. C.
Winding Type - solenoid, wound a f t e r Secondary winding.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
Sta r t Tag 2. ~ i n i s h Tag 1.
383 turns anti-clockwise, 38 S. W.G. enamel and
D. F.C. wire. Note tha t both windings s t a r t 4" from the former base; the primary winding over-
1 appi ng the secondary. ~i n i sh a t the end washer.
seal both s t a r t and f i n i s h w i t h ~ i s t r e n e Lacquer.
The c o i l should then be vacuum impregnated and
wax dipped.
U SECONDARY
Colour Code on Plate:- Red, Ye1 low, Blue.
This sheet issued wi th A.L. No. I August 1956
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D 2 ( T R I O I )
P a t t e r n s 57140C/O O n l y
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDING (wound be fo re secondary)
S t a r t Tag 4. F i n i s h Tag 3 . 33 t u r n s ant i -c lockwise ( d l r e c t i o n o f
r o t a t i o n o f t h e former, l ook ing a long t h e
former towards the base) o f 28 S.W.G. enamel l e d S.S.C. w i re .
Winding Type - Solenoid. S t a r t and F i n i s h - on washers ho ld ing
winding.
S t a r t 1/32'' below secondary wind i ng,
i.e. t h e r e should on ly be the w id th o f t h e spacing washer between windings.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 2. F i n i s h Tag 1. ( s t a r t 1" from the Sase o f the former.)
382 t u r n s ant i -c lockwise ( d i r e c t i o n o f r o t a t ion o f t h e former, l ook ing a long the
former towards the base) of 38 S.W.G.
enamel7ed and S. F.C. w i re .
F i n i s h - Tag 1, Anchor a t washer. Winding Type - Close wound so lenoid.
Start and F i n i s h - Dis t rene Lacquer.
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
ah- + SECONDARY " , it,, '".
PRIMARY ::: .a SECONDARY
B.R. 1617 Par t 3
FIG. 32
Colour Code - Red, Yellow, Green.
FIG. 33
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D 3 ( T R I O 1 1
W I N D I N G DATA
PRIMARY W I N D I N G
s t a r t Tag 3. Fin ish Tag 4. 24 turns ant i-clockwi se. s t a r t 9/16" from the fonner base, using
38 S.W.G. wire, D.F.C. winding Type - solenoid. F in ish - Two washers. D i s t rene Lacquer.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
Star t Tag2. Fin ish Tag 1.
133 turns ant i-clockwi se of 32 S. W. G. w i re, D. F. C. s t a r t 9/16" from the fonner base. winding Type - close wound solenoid. Fi n i sh - Two Washers - D i s t rene Lacquer.
P R I M A R Y S E C O N D A R Y
The coi 1 should then be vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
Colour Code On Plate:- Blue, Green, Red.
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956
1
B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 34
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D 3 ( T R I O I )
PATTnwS 571 ~OC/D ONLY
Wl NDlW G DATA
PR IWARY WIN D l M 6 (wound a f te r secondary)
Start Tag 3. Finish Tag 4. 24 turns clockwise (direct ion o f rotat ion
o f the former looking along the fonner towards the base) o f 28 S.W.G. enamel led S.S.C. w i re.
Type of winding - Solenoid. Start and Finish - on washers holding
the winding.
SECONDARY WIN DlNO
Start Tag.2. Finish Tag 1. 134 turns ant i-clockwise (d l rect ion of
rotat ion of the f o m r looking along the fonner tavards the base) of 32 S.W.G., D.F.C. wire, s t a r t 9/16'
from base. Type o f winding - Close wound solenoid. Finish a t the washers - Distrene Lacquer.
vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
PRIMARY .- I'
SECONDARY
PRIMARY 3 SECONDARY
Colour Code - Red, Green, Green.
FIG. 35
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D 4 ( T R I O I )
WlNDlWC DATA
PRIMARY WINDING
s t a r t Tag 4. F in ish Tag 3 . Sta r t 9/16" from the f o n e r base.
I t tu rns c l ockw~se o f 38 s.w.G. wire, D.F.C.
3 t u rn ~nterwound w i t h the secondary w:nding
a t t he end nearest t o the base o f the former. w:nding Type - solenoid.
F i n i sh - Ends he1 d w i t h .005" x 4' Lassothy' Tape.
- 0 - 16 -
n LA SOTHYL APE
/ \
SECONDARY
SECONDARY WINDING
s t a r t Tag 2. F :n ishTag I.
74 tu rns clockwi se o f 24 S. W. G. enamel wi re, s t a r t i n g 9/16'' from the former base.
winding Type - solenoid. ~i n'sh - Sel f support ing on tags.
D: s t rene Lacquer.
co lour Code on Plate:- Red, 01 ue, 81 ue.
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956
A E R I A L C O I L B A N D 5 ( T R I O I )
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDING (Wound a f t e r the Secondary)
Sta r t Tag 4. F i n i sh Tag 3. S ta r t 19/32" from the former base. i? t u r n anti-clockwise o f 38 S.W.G. wi re, D.F.C.
4 t u r n inter-wound w i t h the secondary winding a t the end nearer t o the base of the former.
winding Type - solenoid.
F i n i sh - Ends he ld w i t h .005' x 3" Lassothyl Tape.
SECONDARY WINDING
B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 36
Sta r t Tag 2. ~ i n i s h Tag 1.
S ta r t 5 / 8 " from the former base. 33 tu rns ant i-clockwise o f 20 s.w.G. w i re, enamel. Length o f winding - 0. 290"
F i n i sh - Sel f support i ng on tags. PRIMARY SECOND" R Y
Vacuum 'impregnated and wax dipped.
Col our Code on Plate:- Red, wh; te, Blue.
FIG. 37 F I R S T R . F . C O I L B A N D I ( T R I O 2 1
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WIUDING (Wound before Secondary)
Sta r t Tag 3.. F i n i sh Tag 4.
S ta r t an from the former base. 600% tu rns c l x k w i s e of 39 s.w.G. wi re, D.F.C.
wind I ng Type - Ha1 f wave 31: 63.
wound on Doug1 as Gears A . 31, 0.40, C -32, 0.42,
E.60, F.60.
~ i n i s h - Held w i t h Lassothyl Tape.
SECONDARY WINDING
Sta r t Tag 2. F in ish Tag.1.
S ta r t 1 3 / 3 2 ~ r o m the Prtmary c o i l 874 tu rns c lockwise o f 39 S.W.G. wl re, D.F.C.
winding Type - s ing le wave 51:54. Wound on Douglas Gears ~ 5 0 , 0.36 C.34 D 50,
E.60 F.60.
~ i n i sh - One washer and ~ i s t rene Lacquer.
Both ends o f the winding sleeved w i t h a;t s i 1 k sleev ng 2 m/m.
Vacuum imp re .nated and wax d i pped.
PRIMA!Y SECONDARY
Colour Code on Plate:- Whl te, Red, Blue.
Th~s sheet issued wi th A.L. No. I August 1956
F l R S T
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WlNDl W G
C O I L
Star t Tag 4. F i n i sh Tag 3. 300) tu rns clockwise o f 39 S.W.G. wire, D.F.C. S ta r t A n from the former base. winding Type - Ha1 f wave 31:63.
Douglas Gears A.31, 8.48, C,.32, 0.42, E.60, F.60.
F in i sh - Ends he ld w i t h .005" x A " Lassothyl Tape.
SECONDARY WINDING
S t a r t Tag 2. F i n i sh Tag 1.
38% tu rns anti-clockwise o f 38 S.W.G. wi r e enamel
and 0. F.C.
S ta r t 7/32' from the primary c o i l . winding Type - Close wound sol enoid.
~ i n i s h - Two washers. one a t the s t a r t and one a t the f i n i sh .
D i s t rene Lacquer.
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
B A N D
PRIMARY \
LASSOTHYL TAPE
B.R. 1617 Par t 3
FIG. 38
P R l MARY ! k SECONDARY
Colour Code on Plate:- Red, Yellow, Blue.
FIG. 39
F I R S T R . F . C O I L B A N D 3 ( T R I O 2 1
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDING
Sta r t Tag 4. F i n i sh Tag 3. 1204 tu rns clockwise o f 36 S.W.G. wi r e D.F. C.
S ta r t 4" f r o m t he former base.
winding Type - Sing1 e wave 51:54. Length o f winding - 1/8"
~ o u g l a s Gears - A. 50, 8.36, C.34, 0.50, E.60, F.60. F in i sh - One hasher.
YL TAPE
U PRIMARY SECON D A R Y
SECONDARY W l NO 1 NG
Sta r t Tag 2, F in ish Tag 1.
13% tu rns anti-clockwise o f 32 S.W.G. wi re, D.F.C.
S t a r t 3/8" from the primary winding. winding Type - Close wound solenoid.
~i n i sh - Two washers one a t t he s t a r t and one a t the f in ish .
D i s t rene Lacquer. Both ends o f t h i s winding t o be sleeved w i t h 2 m/m
a r t s i l k s leeving t o i nsu la te them from the Primary winding.
PR l MARY O ~ f @ - ~ c o N DARy
3 - 2
Colour Code on Plate:- white, Green, Blue.
Th s sheet ~ssued w th A.L. No I August 1956
F l R S T
W l M D l N G DATA
PRIMARY W I N D I N G
C O I L B A N D
B.R. 1617 Part 3
S t a r t Tag 3. ~ i n i s h Tag 4.
S t a r t t n f rom the former base. 50) t u rns clockwise o f 36 s.w.G. w ~ r e , D.F.C. winding Type - s ing le Wave - 51:54.
Wound on Douglas Gears - A.50, 8.36, C.34, D.50, E.60, F.60.
F i n i s h - Held w i th one washer.
PRl MARY SECONDARY
SECONDARY W l N D l W G
Sta r t Tag 2, ~ i n i s h Tag 1 Sta r t 5/16" from the Secondary Coil . 74 tu rns c l ockwi se o f 24 S. W. G. enamel wi re.
winding Type - solenoiq, tu rns spaced evenly. Length o f winding - 0.275". in i sh - se l f support i ng on tags. Dl s t rene Lacquer.
Vacuum impregnated and wax d pped.
FIG. 40
PR MARY SECONDARY
Colour Code on Plate:- white, Blue, Blue.
FIG. 41
F I R S T R . F . C O I L B A N D 5 ( T R I O 2 1
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDING
Star t Tag 3. Finish Tag 4.
s t a r t 5/32" f r o m the former base. 284 turns anti-clockwise o f 41 s.W.G. w i re, D. F.C. winding Type - Close wound solenoid. Length o f winding - 3/16". Finish - Held wi th one washer.
PRIMARY 1
u SECONDARY
SECONDARY UlNDtNG
Start Tag 2. ~ i n i s h Tag 1. Start 0.156' from the Primary Coil. 3% turns ant i-clockwi se. Turns spaced evenly,
o f 20 S.W.G. enamel wire. winding Type - solenoid. Length of winding - 0.25". Finish - sel f supporting on tags. D I s t rene Lacquer.
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
PRIMARY SECONDARY
colour Code on Plate:- White, white, Blue,
This sheet issued w ~ t h A.L. No. I August 1956
S E C O N D R . F . C O I L B A N D I ( T R I O 3 1
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY W l H D l N G (Wound a f te r secondary)
Sta r t Tag 2. ~ i n i s h Tag 3. S ta r t 23/32'' from the former base.
24 tu rns anti-clockwise o f 38 S.W.G. w i re, D. F.C.
Winding Type - solenoid.
Wound j u s t above the f i n i sh i ng washer o f the
Secondary w i nd i ng.
F in ish - A t washer hold ing the f i n i s h o f the
Secondary w i ndi ng.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
B.R. 1617 P a r t 3
FIG. 42
Sta r t Tag 2. F in ish Tag 1.
874 tu rns clockwise o f 3 /42 S.W.G. wire, D.F.C.
winding Type - s ing le Wave 51:54.
wound on Douglas Gears - A. 50, 8.36, C.34,
D.50, E.60, F.60.
Length o f winding - 1/8". ~i n i sh - Washer.
D i s t rene Lacquer.
Vacuurn impregnated and wax dipped.
PRIMARY SECONDARY
Colour Code on Plate:- Blue, Red, Blue.
FIG. 43
S E C O N D R . F . C O I L B A N D 2 ( T R I O 3 1
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDING (Wound a f te r Secondary)
Star t Tag 2. Finish Tag 3. 24 turns anti-clockwise o f 38 S.W.G. wire, D. F.C. w i nd i ng Type - Sol eno i d.
wound on top o f the Secondary winding, a t the end nearest t o the base o f the former.
Finish - Washer holding the s t a r t o f the
Secondary winding.
SECONDARY W l NO l NG
Start Tag 2. ~ i n i s h Tag 1.
Start 4 " from 'the former base.
38# turns ant i-clockwise of 38 S. W. G. w i re,
enamel 0. F.C. winding Type - Close wound solenoid.
Vacuum impregnated and wax d i pped.
~'7 n PRIMARY 6 sEcoNmRy
Colour Code on Plate:- Blue, Ye1 low, B l ue.
This sheet ~ssued with A.L. No. August 1956
S E C O N D R . F . C O I L B A N D 3 ( T R I O 3 1
W l N D l N G DATA
PHI MARY WINDING (wound a f t e r secondary)
Star t Tag 2. ~ i n i s h Tag3. S ta r t 9 /16" from the former base. 24 turns anti-clockwise o f 38 S.W.G.
w i re, D. F. C.
winding Type - solenoid, wound on top o f the secondary winding a t the end nearest t o the former base.
F in ish - Washer ho ld ing the s t a r t o f the Secondary W ; nd i ng.
SECONDARY W l N D l NG
Sta r t Tag 2. F in ish Tag 1.
S ta r t 9 /16 " from the former base. 132 turns ant i-clockwise o f 32 S.W. G.
wire, D.F.c. w i nd i ng Type - Close wound sol enoi d. F in ish - Star t and f i n i s h a t the washers. D i s t rene Lacquer.
PPlMARY & SECONDARY
B.R 1617 Part 3
FIG. 44
PRIMARY SECONDARY
Vacuum impregnated and wax d i pped.
Colour Code on Plate:- Blue, Green, Blue.
FIG. 45
S E C O N D R . F . C O I L B A N D 4 ( T R I O 3 1
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDIHG (wound a f t e r Secondary)
Start Tag 2. Finish Tag 3. Start 19/32" from the former base. 23 turns clockwise o f 38 S.W.G. w i re D. F. C.
winding Type - solenoid, interwound wi th the Secondary winding a t the end nearest t o th, base o f the former.
Fin ish - Ends held w i th O.OOSn x An Lassothy Tape.
SECONDARY W l WDlNG
Start Tag2. Fin ish T a g l . Start 9/16" fm the former base. 74 turns clockwise o f 24 S.W. G. enamel w i re. winding Type - Solenoid w i th the turns
spaced even1 y . Length o f Winding 0.275'.
Finish - Self supporting on tags.
Vacu~rn impregnated and waxed d i pped.
TAPE PRIMARY
- i @ ~ ; ; c o r J D A R y PRl MARY I I I III
2
C O ~ O U ~ Code on Plate:- Blue, Blue, Blue.
Thts sheet issued with A.L. No. I August 1956
S E C O N D R . F . C O I L B A N D 5 ( T R 1 0 3 )
W I N D I N G DATA
W I N D I N G
Star t Tag 2. F in ish Tag 1.
Star t 5/8" from the former base. 32 turns o f 20 S.W.G. enamel wire. winding Type - solenoid w i th evenly spaced turns. Length o f w ind~ng - 0.29" in i sh - Se1 f supporting on tags.
Vacuum , impregnated and wax d I pped.
B.R. 1617 Part
FIG. 46
Colour Code on Plate:- Blue, Wh'te, Blue.
FIG. 47 O S C I L L A T O R C O I L B A N D I ( L 1 0 2 )
W I N D I N G DATA
W I N D I N G
Sta r t Tag 1. F in ish Tag 2.
~ l l tu rns wound ant i-clockwi se o f
40 S.W.G. enamel w i r e S ta r t 3/8" from the base o f the former. 3Of t u rns t o Tap 1, Tag 3. 52% tu rns t o Tap 2, Tag 4.
744 turns, f i n i s h a t Tag 2.
w i nd i ng Type - Close wound sol eno i d. F i n i sh - Four washers, on each a t the
s t a r t and f i n i s h and one a t each tap. D i s t rene Lacquer.
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
Colour Code on Plate:- Green, Red, Blue.
T h ~ s sheet Issued w ~ t h A.L. No. I August 1956
O S C I L L A T O R C O I L B A N D 2 ( L 1 0 2 )
WINDING DATA
W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 1. F in i sh Tag 2. ~ l l turns a re wound ant i-clockwi se
o f 38 S.W.G. w i re. S ta r t 4 " from the base o f the former.
6+ tu rns t o Tap 1, Tag 3. 182 tu rns t o Tap 2, Tag 4.
314 turns, F i n i sh Tag 2. winding Type - Close wound solenoid. F in ish - Four washers, one each a t the
s t a r t and f i n i s h and one a t each o f the taps.
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
Colour Code on Plate:- Green, Ye1 low, Blue.
u / TAPE
R R . 1617 Part
FIG. 48
FIG. 49
O S C I L L A T O R C O I L B A N D 3 ( L 1 0 2 )
W I N D I N G DATA
AUXl LL l ARY W l N D l NG
Sta r t Tag 3. F in ish Tag 1. 3 tu rn anti-clockwise o f 23 S.W.G. wire T/c. winding Type - Link.
F in ish - w i r e taut, solder t o the tags.
- '"1 MAIN WINDING n
Star t Tag 1. F in ish Tag 2.
S ta r t 9/16" from the base o f the former. ~ l l turns anti-clockwise of 34 s.W.G. w i re
enamel and S.F.C.
53 turns Tap 1, Tag 4.
133 turns, f i n i s h Tag 2.
wind i ng Type - Close wound sol eno id.
in i sh - Three washers, one a t s t a r t , one a t tap and one a t f in ish.
~ i s t r e n e Lacquer.
Vacuum impregnat2d and wax dipped.
\ 'LASSOTHYL TAPE
AUXILIARY WINDING
C O ~ O U ~ code on Plate:- Green, Green, Blue.
T h ~ s sheet issued w ~ t h A L. No. I August 1956
O S C I L L A T O R C O I L B A N D 4 ( L 1 0 2 )
W I N D I N G DATA
AUX l L L l ARY W I N D I N G (Wound F i r s t )
Sta r t Tag 3. F i n i sh Tag 1.
S ta r t 5 / 3 2 " from the former base.
t u rn ant i-clockwise, o f 23 S.W.G. w i r e TIC. winding Type - Link.
F i n i sh - Taut w i re, so lder tags.
M A I N W I N D I N G
Sta r t Tag 1. F in i sh Tag 2.
S ta r t 518" from the former base. A l l t u rns ant i-clockwise o f 26 S.W.G. w i r e
enamel, S.F.C.
23 turns Tap 1, Tag 4.
7 4 turns, f i n i s h Tag 2.
W I nding Type - Close wound solenoid.
F i n i sh - Three washers, one a t the s ta r t ,
one a t the tap and one a t t he f i n i sh .
Vacuum impregnated and wax dipped.
AIN WINDING
B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 50
C O ~ O U ~ code on Plate:- Green, Green, Blue.
FIG. 51
O S C l L L A T O R C O l L B A N D 5 ( L 102 )
W I N D I N G DATA
A U X l L L l A R Y W I N D I N G (Wound F i r s t )
Sta r t Tag 1. F in ish Tag 3. S t a r t 5 / 3 2 " from the f o n e r base. & t u rn ant i-clockwise o f 23 s.w.G. T/C wire.
winding Type - Link. F i n i sh - w i r e taut, and solder, t o tags.
N WINDING
M A I N W l N D l N G
Sta r t Tag 1. F in i sh Tag 2.
S ta r t 5 / 6 0 from the f o n e r base.
4.95 tu rns clockwise o f 20 S.W.G. enamel wire.
1.20 t u rns t o Tap 1,Tag 4. The t a p . i s brought
out by solder ing on 23 s.w.G. T/C w i re t o the Main ~i ndi ng.
33 tu rns t o the f i n i s h a t Tag 2.
winding Type - solenoid, w i t h evenly
spaced turns. Length o f winding - 0.290," in i sh - sel f support i n g on tags.
Vacuum impregnated and wax d i pped.
Colour Code on. Plate:- Green, white, Blue.
T h ~ s sheet ~ssued wlth A.L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIGS. 52 & 53
I . F . C O I L S
view o f the I. F. Coi 1 Assembly from the base,
showi ng tag p o s i t ions. Refers t o a1 1 I. F. ~ s s e m b l ies.
A i 1 windings a re anchored t o washers and securely soldered t o the s ta ted spi 11 s and tags.
I . F . T R A N S F O R M E R TR IOU
WINDING DATA
PRIMARY WINDING
S t a r t Tag 3. ~ i n i s h Tag 5.
1144 t u rns o f 30/48 S.W.G. enarnel and
fused w i r e C / A , 0.005 I b weight.
Two t u rns o f Lassothyl Tape.
wound on ~ o u g l a s Gears, A.50, 5-32, C
D.50, E.40, F.80.
COUPLING COILS
doubl e
c o i l " A n S t a r t Tag 7. ~ i n i s h Tag 6.
1% turns o f 40 S.W.G. Eureka
enamel w i r e (0.0001 I b ) .
c o i l " 6 " Start Tag 1. ~ i n i s h Tag 7 .
13 t u rns o f 36 S.W.G. w i re,
D. F. C. (0.0001 I b) .
~ i n i s h - wax impregnate and d i p
0 A PRIMARY
BASE
PRIMARY 7 COUPLING
FIG. 54
I . F . I N P U T C O I L ( L 2 0 1 )
W I N D I N G DATA
s t a r t T a g 3 . F i n i sh Tag8.
7 6 4 tu rns t o the tap ( ~ a g 2)
~ o t a l Turns - 1143 o f 30/48 S. W. G. enamel
and double fused w i re (0.005 I b) .
Two tu rns o f Lassothyl Tape.
wound on D O U ~ ~ ~ S Gears - ~ . 5 0 , B.32, C.31,
D.50, E.40, F.80.
F in ish - Wax impregnate and d i p .
BASE
This sheet ~ssued w ~ t h A.L No. I August 1956 B R 16 7 P a r t 3
FIG. 55
I . F . TRANSFORMERS ( T R 2 0 1 A N D T R 2 0 2 )
P A T T E R N S 5 7 1 4 0 / A
W I N D I N G DATA
SECONDARY PRIMARY COUPLING
PRIMARY W I N D I N G
Sta r t Tag 5. F in ish Tag 7 . 1143 tu rns o f 30148 S.W.G. enamel and double
fused C / A w i re (0.005 l b ) . Two tu rns o f Lassothyl Tape. wound on ~ o u g l a s Gears A.50, 8.32, C.31,
D-50. E.40, F.80.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
Sta r t Tag 8. F in ish Tag 3. 824 tu rns t o tap ( ~ a g 2) .
~ o t a l tu rns - 114h o f 30/48 S. w.G. and
double fused C / A wire.
Two tu rns o f Lassothyl Tape. wound on ~ o u g l a s Gears - A.50, 8.31, C.31,
0.501 E.40- F.80.
COUPLlN G W I N D I N G
Sta r t Tag3 . ~ i n i s h T a g 1 .
13 tu rns o f 40 S.W.G. ~ u r e k a enamel w i re
(0 .000 l I b ) .
PRIMARY w2 )O SECONDARY
Fin ish Wax impregnation and ~ i p .
FIG. 56
I . F. TRANSFORMERS ( T R 2 0 1 A N D T R 2 0 2 )
PATTERNS 5 7 1 4 0 B / C / D
W I N D I N G DATA
SECONDARY PRIMARY COUPLING
PRIMARY W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 5. ~ i n i s h Tag 7.
1144 t u r n s o f 30/48 S.W.G. enamel and
double fused C / A wi r e (0.055 I b ) . Two t u r n s o f Lassothy l Tape.
Wound on Douglas Gears. - A.50, 8.32, C.31,
D.50, E.40, F.80.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 8. F i n k h Tag 3.
824 t u r n s t o t a p ( ~ a g 2 ) .
T o t a l t u r n s - 1144 o f 30148 S. w.G. enamel
and doub le fused C / A wi r e (0.005 1 b ) .
wound on Douglas Gears - A.50, B.32, C.31,
0.50, E.40, F.80.
Two t u r n s o f Lassothy l Tape.
COUPLING W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 3. F i n i s h Tag 1.
33 t u r n s o f 40 S. W. G. Eureka enamel
w i r e (0.0001 I b ) .
PRIMARY 3 ~ s ~ c " , : o n n v
~ l n i s h - wax ~ ~ s r e g n a t e and d i p
T h ~ s sheet Issued wltn A.L. NG. I August 1956
I . F . T R A N S F O R M E R ( i f 3 2 0 3 1
W I N D I N G DATA
PRIMARY W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag 5. F i n i s h Tag 7. 1173 t u r n s o f 30/48 S.W.G. .enamel and
double fused C / A w i r e (0.005 l b )
Two t u r n s o f Lassothyl Tape.
wound on Douglas Gears - ~ . 5 0 , ~ . 3 2 , C-31, D.50, E.40, F.80.
SECONDARY W I N D I N G
B.R. 1617 P a r t 3
FIG. 57
S t a r t Tag 1. F i n i s h Tag 3. 1173 t u r n s o f 30/48 S.W.G. enamel and
double fused C / A w i r e (0.005 l b )
Two t u r n s o f Lassothyl Tape.
wound on Douglas Gears A.50. 8.32, C.31,
D.50, E.40, F.80.
B.F.O. COUPLING W I N D I N G
S t a r t Tag2 . ~ i n i s h Tag8.
993 t u r n s o f 36 S.W.G. w i r e D.F.C. (0.003 ~ b ) . Two t u r n s o f ~ a s s o t h ~ l Tape.
Wound-on Douglas Gears - A.50, B.36, c.34,
D.50, E.60, F.60.
~ i n i s h - wax impregnate and dip.
FIG. 58
B E A T F R E Q U E N C Y O S C l L L A T O R C O l L S ( L 2 0 2 A N D L 2 0 5 )
W I N D I N G DATA
S t a r t Tag 3. ~ i n i s h Tag 5 . 49f t u r n s t o tap ( ~ a g 7) . Tota l t u r n s 99f of 30/48 S. W.G. enamel and
D.F.C.A. w i r e (0.004 l b ) . Two t u r n s o f Lassothyl Tape.. Wound on D O U ~ ~ ~ S Gears - A.50, 8.32, C.31,
D.50, E.40, F.80.
S t a r t Tag 5. ~ i n l s h Tag 6.
1 2 i t u r n s o f 26 S.W.G. enamel and S.F.C.
wi r e (0.002 1 b) .
Two t u r n s o f Lassothyl Tape.
s i n g l e l a y e r winding.
R 2 3 1 C 236
l o 3
L 202
0 7 C 235
C 234
I 0 5
~ i n i s h - Wax impregnate and dip.
L 2 0 5
h's sheet 'ssued wtth A.L. No. I August 1956
P I T C H C O I L S ( L 2 0 3 A N D L 2 0 4 )
i
B R . 16;7 P a r t 3
FIG. 59
W I N D I N G DATA
COIL LOW (~203)
L 203 L 2 0 4
co I L"LOW@ OIL TUNE
BLUE' RED BLUE BROWN
193 t u r n s o f 26 S.W.G. enamel C. U. wi r e . Start Tag 2 ( ~ e a r shoulder o f t h e former)
F i n i s h Tag 1.
COIL TUNE (L204) 72 t u r n s o f 24 S.W.G. enamel C.U. wire. S t a r t Tag 2 e ear shoulder o f t h e former) ~ i n i s h Tag 1.
NOTE When winding the r o t a t i o n o f bo th formers i s
c lockw ise l o o k i n g from the top.
Vacuum impregnate and wax d i p
FIG. 60 C H O K E R . F . ( L I O I )
1 . 5 m H
WINDING This may be split into four or five sections.
l N DU CTAN C E 1.5 millihenries i 10%.
D.C. RESl STANCE 10% ohms * 25%.
Th~s sheet Issued w ~ t h A.L No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 61
FIG. 62
CRYSTAL FILTER
WIRING DIAGRAM.
This sheet ~ssued w i th A,L. No. I August 1956 B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 63
COlL INTER TAPPI
MEDIATE NG. 4
COlL ENDS.
CRYSTAL FILTER COlL (~206)
Pat te rns 5 7 1 4 0 8 / ~ / 0
W l h D l N G DATA
183 t u r n s 30/48 ~i t z wi re; s e c t i o n a l ised thus:-.
1 s t Sect ion 6 1 turns.
3Ot t u r n s t o tap lead.
2nd Sect ion Tap l e a d t o be 2 " long. 303 t u r n s t o f i n i s h .
3 r d Sec t ion 6 1 turns.
Secured w i t h Cha t te r tons Compound.
Leave t n e ends two inches long, t i n n e d f o r about 14" o f t h e i r length. S t a r t l e a d has Red 2 m/m a r t s i l k s leev ing. F i n i s h lead has w h i t e ' 2 m/m a r t s i l k sleeving.
wind t h e bobbin and d i p i n Messrs Campbells LPRM.3 wax. When reassembled t o be tes ted e l e c t r i c a l l y and then dipped i n Messrs Campbells LPRM.3 wax,
and Messrs Berry w igg ins Compound 1202.
FIG. 64
N O T E F I L T E R ( 1 3 0 1 )
P A T T E R N S 5 7 1 4 0 / A
WIND1N.G DATA
6,800 turns of enamel copper wire, 36rS.W.G. (0.0076*), the ends looped and tw is ted i n t o three way cable f o r the lead outs and sleeved w i t h 1 m/m s i l k sleeving.
The tw tag panel and becking piece i s f i xed by means o f two turns o f whi te tape 7/8* wide, secured by Chattertons compound where the tape i s cut o f f . The tags are pushed through holes i n the tape. ~l ternat i ve l y 4'' wide tape can be used, ha1 f lapped and secured i n the same manner employing one layer.
The lead ou ts are soldered t o the tags above the tape, they a re anchored by )* adhesive tape and insulated from the windings by O.OOZH x 0.75' paper.
The inductance i s adjusted t o 10% o f standard by moving the core. This i s f i xed w i t h adhesive and the co i 1 i rnp regna t ed:
0. C . Resistance - 390 ohms.
Inductance - 1 Henry.
Thfs Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956 B.R.1617 PART 3 DATA SHEETS
I R O N C O R E D TRANSFORiuI$.B*S A N D C H O K E S ------------------------------------------------------------------- ------_---------__--------------------------------------------------
D A T A ------- --.----
A s these aomponents are not considered mpai.rable, the infomation given is lM-bed to that necessary to p.&de a suitable substitute f o r erne rgency use,
1. Choke &P. 65560
Circuit Reference - L302 Fitted to all patterns of the mceiver.
Inductance 25 Henlys a t 7 mA d.c. 9- 18 Henrys a t 20 rnA d.c.
D, C. Resistance - 690 ohms
Distanoe between fixing oentres - 1 -25/32: i~
Tags (a and b) - See Mgs. 18, 21 and 23.
Choke ILP. 65564
Circuit Reference - L303. Fitted on Patterns 57140/~ only.
Inductance 10 Henrys at 100 mCL D. C,
D. C. Resistance - 260 ohins + 1 6
Distance b o h e n fixing oentres - % ;: 1s in. + 3/16 in.
3. Choke &Po 67762
C i r c u i t Reference - L304. Mtted on Patterns 57140~/~/b only.
Inductance - 20 H e m a t 100 mA do.
Distance between fixing centres - 2 in, x & in.
D,C, Resistance 325 ohm30
4. Output Tmnsf'ozmer & P, 6 5 6 3
Circuit lieference - TR3Ol Fitted t o all patterns of the receiver.
Primary Inductance - 5.6 Henrys a t IOV 50 c/s and 40 mA d.c.
D.C. Iiesistanoe - P-ry - 24.0 ohms 2,200 Turns Secondary 1. I S ~ S - 61 ohms 650 "
oms) - 1.67 ohms 62 Secondary 2. (On side) - 4.9 ohms 69 "
4. (continued)
Distance between fixing centres - 2-1 3/16 Tags - See Figs. 18, 21 and 23.
5. Output Transformer, IvIoator Loudspeakqr, A. P. 656%
C i r c u i t Reference - TR204 (TRJOJ B~QD). Fi t ted t o all patterns of the mceiver.
Primary T u r n s - 107 Secondary Turns - 34,
D.C. Resistanae - Primary - 1.0 ohm + I@ Secondary - 0.15 " " "
Tags - See Figs, 11, 21 and 23,
Distance between fixing centres - 1-27/32 5-% x 1 in0
6. Idaim Transformer A. P. 65561/A/~
C i r c u i t Reference TR302. A.P.65561 open core type f i t t e d to Receiver A.P.57140. AoPb 655618 o i l f i l l e d typc f i t t e d t o A.P.571404 Receiver. I n case of
trouble from ei ther type (especially oil leaks from the l a t t e r pattern) the replacement transformer should be A. P. 65561 B.
Voltage - Common D. C, Resistanae
230 Volts 4.9 Ohms
Voltage 2764+76 Volts Current 78 ' & I i l l i a q s D.C. Resistance 89-CT-100 Ohms
Heater Tlinding
Voltage 6.4 Volts Current 4 b s , Do C. Resistance 0.078 Ohms.
Rectifier Heater Vinding - Voltage 6.35 Volts Current 0.9 b s a DOCe R e s i s t a m 0.315 Ohms.
Tags - See Fig. 18.
Distance between fixing centres - 3.875 in. x 3.375 in.
This Sheet issued with A,L. No. 1 August 1956 ~ ~ R . 1 5 1 7 PART 3 DATA SYEETS
C i r c u i t Reference TRJ02, Fitted to Patterns 57140~/~/D only.
Voltage - Common 115 230 volts 40/60 c/sa.c. D, C, Resistance 20 Ohms ove&l.
Secondary m5ndinq
voltage 2766-276 Volts C m n t 80 Milliamps D. C. Resistance 320 Ohms overall,
Heater Find&..
Voltage 6.4 Volts Cument 4 Amps* Dm C. Resistaslo8 less than 0.5 Ohms
Rectifier Heater Wind-
Voltage 6.4 volts Current 0.9 -8. D, C. Resistance less than 0.75 O h s .
Tags - See Figs, 21 and 23,
R
C
MlSC
R
C
MlSC
R.F. UNIT I" RF FRECT CHANGER SK 101
S K I 0 2 R I S u
PLlOl
- - - " < 1 4 0 i = - I
101 103 1 0 4 105 110 113 114 I l b 117 I 2 0 107 1 0 6 108 1 0 9 111 112 115 I Z I 118
122 123 124 119 I C I 193 1 0 5 107 I 0 8 113 118 114 115 117 116 119 120 121 122 126 124 127 128 129
'a 104 111 112 I 0 6 131 134 133 132 1:"940 123 125 6 9 1 4 I 3 5 1340 136 137 1 3 0
P i l O l RV I 0 2 V l O l V 102 V103 V 1 0 4 SKI41 TRIO1 S W l O l TR 102 TR I 0 3 TRIO4 PLIO3
S W l O Z a LPIOI-107 RV12S SK 102 L102 SWlO2b XLlOl SW102c L l o t SWlO2d
I I
I
C 1 3 0 loop
I SKlOl
I 5 c 7
X
V 1 0 4
SKI
! 7
SW102d
I
LOCAL OSC l LLATOR NOTE -
REFER TO COHPONENTS L I S T FOR VALUES OF COHPONENTS IN TURRET COMPARTMENTS.
B.R. 1617 Part 3
FIG. 65
POWER RECTIFIER
T O P L 2 0 5
2 IN PARALLEL
-- A.F. & POWER UNIT
Y WHEN C V 4 0 4 3 IS FITTED R 3 0 4 IS ALTERED T O 2 2 0 , R 3 0 0 A I S FITTED ACROSS R 3 0 8 WHICH
IS RE-LABELLED R 3 0 8 B . A N D VALUE ALTERED T O
- I
RECEIVER 628. n.p.67757 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
This sheet issued with A.L. No. I Auqust 1956
I.F. UNIT
I:::'
P his Sheet issued with AeLe 110. 1 August 1956
Co17~IPOwENTS LIST RECEIVEEt 62B PAT!EKNS 67757
CAPACITORS
B.R.1617 PART 3 LIST OF COMPONENTS
C
1
Remarks
-
Variable Band1
Band 4 Band 5 Band 4 B L n f 3 5 Ganged Capacitor Section
Variable Band I Band 2 Band 3 Band 4
Band 5 Band 4 Band 5 Ganged Capacitor Sect ion
Variable
Band I Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5
Band 5 Band 4 Ganged Capacitor Section
I
Ref,
C ~ O I C102 C103 ClO4 Clog
C106 c.t 07 C108 Clog Cl I0
C l I0 Cl I0 Cll? CIII C112
GI13 Cl14 CII4 "I4 CIA4
C114 Cll5 Cl15 C I I ~
C117
CAI8 C119 C120 C121 Cl22
(3.123 C123 CI 23 C123 C? 23
(2.124 C124 CI 25
CI 26 C127
Value
12 PF 100 pF' 0.1 ).IF ::q? OaO03pF' 0.003/lF
2-20 F Oaoo3$
39 pF
15 PF 47 PF 600 PI? 450 pF' 12-322
2-20 pF 39 pF 6.8 @?
:; 5 56 PP @OF 450 PF 12-322 @
I00 pF
:::F 0.1 /uF 100 pF 2-20 pF
39 PF 6.8 @' 10 ??J? 22 @' 47 fl
450 pE7 600 pF 12-322 pl?
061 p 0.1 )2
LP. or Joint Se i - i ce
Cat. 1\70.
2.1 31 175 2.1 231 94 2.1 15095 21 I 5095 2.1 24437
21 24477 21 24477 21 24477
E AP.52437 21311Yl
2131178 2.1 31 1 9k 21 25666 21 25664 AP. 601 89
x AP.52437 2131 I 91 2131 169 2.131058 Z131186
2131 197 21 25666 ZI 25664 AP, 601 89
21 231 94
21 2W7 ,Zl150 95 2.1 15095 2.1 231 94
~KP.52437
Zl 31 I 91 ZI 34 I69 21 31 058 21 31 184 2.1 3.1 1 94
21 25664 21 25666 AP. 601 89
21.15095 z115095
Tol.
log6 2 6 2 6 2@ 2*
2 6 2% 2$* 1 6 s
% % 36
4 6 56
I@ 16 I*
% !% %
2 6
2@ 2@ 2 6 2@ 16
1% I($ I@ I@
5% %
2@ 2@
Rating
500v 35ov 350V 35ov 350V
35OV 350V 35m
5om
~ O O V 5oov 350V 350V
500V 500V ~ O O V 500V
~ O O V 35Ov 35OV
35OV
35ov 35Ov 35ov 350V
5oov 5ooV 500V 500V ~ O O V
35077 35OV
350V 35ov
C-@A4CIT03 ( ~ o n t inued) .ccIcI
Remarks
I
Cal. Input Variable
Band 4 Band 2 - 3 Band 4 Band 5
Rating 3e.P.
Band I Band 2 I3al-d. 3 Ehnd 4 Band 5
Band I Band I Band 2 Band 3 Band 4
P . 1 L
C128 C129 GI30 Cl31 C132
C1 33 GI33
33 GI33 (3133
C133A Cl j 3 A Cl33A (24 33A (3.1 33A
(3134 C134-A Cl3k (334- GI34
C134 (3.1 35
c436
C138
39 C l W c201 ~ 2 0 2 C203
C204 c205 c206 C207 C208
j (32-10
Band 5 Ganged Cap.
qect.
Tol.
T
A.P. or J o i n t Service Cat. So.
Value
Tk
21 25 665 21 95095 2131 206 ~431165
~AP.52437
~131140 2131 184 2132244 2.1 32276 2125 608
21 32268 2.1 25704 2132279
25.1 25476 Zl25270 21 2544-8 ZI 26351 a6424
21 25450 601 89
21 31 178 21 31 206 21.23194
Z.123194 21 24477 21 25665 21 I 5506 21.1 5095
21 15095 21 25665 z l 25 665 21 15095 z.115095
2.1 4 5095 21 25 665
470 @' 0.1 PI I 0 0 pF 2.2 fl 2-20 PF
68 pF 22 p 12 33' 22 PI? 33 PF
Not fitted Not f i t ted
6.8 pF 10 9 27 9
470 PF 120 pl? 390 PF 2200 pF 500 PF
390 PF 12-322 ZF
.I5 PF 100 pF 100 pF
400 pl?
0*003f 470 P 0 . y 0.1
0.1 p 470 PF 470 PF O e l P
0.1 /uF 0.1 /IF 470 PF
21 25 665 2.1 15095 21.1 5095
w Repla~ei~ient
$a 2@ $%
0.5 PF I c$
% I@ I cg %, %
1% $ 5%
!% 5% 2sb
1%. 5&
56
I@ 1% 2@
2 6 2032 %
2@ 2@
20k 5@
4 2@
2@ %
470 pa "I /"" 0.1 p
corqonent 21 5000 9
i
35, 35OV SOOV 5ooV ~ O O V
5 0 0 ~ ~ O O V ~ O O V 35OV WOV
~ O O V 500v 35OV
35OV 35ov 350V 35OV 350V
35OV
~ O O V 35ov 35OV
35OV 35ov 350V 35OV 35Ov
35ov 350V 35ov 35OV 35ov
35ov 350V
5% 2@& 2 q a
35ov 350v 35ov
i
illis Sheet fssued vdih A.L. 1\10, 1 August 1356 G.R.1617 PART 3 LIST OF COMPOIJEIQS
Cii2AlCITOZ3 ( continued) REEIVER 62B
A.P. or
0 . y 4-70 pi? 100 pl?
1 OOOV mov lcoov 750v. 350v
Rating
Variable
Remarks
Variable
Ref.
El 01 RVI 02 RlO3 Rl 04 RI 05
RI 06 El 07 R108 R109 RIO9
R? 09 RlO9 R4 I 0 R l 1 I R112
R113 R114 RI 35 Rl1 6 Rd17
R118
ASP, or J o i n t Service
C a t . No, Value
270k ohm look ohms 220k ohins I00 ohms 10 0lli:Is
look dlrm 8.2k ohills qoo ohms
1k ohm 1.5k OW
1,8k olms 3*% ohms 68k ohms
I O O k ohms 470k ohms
47k 0- 47k 0- 220 o h m 56k ohms
4-mn 0- 22 ohms 560 ohms 4% clh.Tns
470 ohms 3*3k Ohrlzs
l k ohm 180 ohms b7 o h . ?
180 ohms 47k 0-
20 ohrns ? OOk o l m look 01- 560 . ohms 4.c?'!K ohms
loo!; o h l s 1001: ohms 560 ohms 4.n t3.l-lm
6& ohis
150 o h s 4.Bc o m 220k ohrns 15k ohms
4Jk ohms
X a t ing Remarks
Variable
Band 4 Band 2
3 Band 4
Band I
This Sheet issued with A.L. No. 1 August 1956
? T O (continued)
A.P. or Jo in t Sc~v icc Cat. No, C Value I Tole
68k ohms 330k dlt-RS 820 ohms 3k o h i
470k ohms
I C$$ 1% I@ 9% 1 6
47k f20 ohms 50 ohms 680k ohms 7.5k ohms
- Ref.
I@
!%
3.3k ohms 15k ol"uns
4 - 3 ohms
Rating
1% I @ I ($
B.R.1617 PART 3 LIST OF COPlPOlEidiS WCEIVER 62B
Variable
Variable
Transf onners IF Transformer AE' Transformer AJ? - Output Transf o mer Power - Mains -
Pattern Noe 1
Description --- I
-- --
~ a t t e m i i ( Description
Cholce 1,5 mH, Osci l la tor Coil tuned, Osci l la tor Coil IF. , 3 3 Input Coil tuned, BmF.O. Coil Pitch, B. F. 0. "Tune" Coil Pitch, B.F.O. "Law" Coil, Calibration coupling Coil tuned, Crystal f i l t e r Choke, I&, Smoothing Choke, 20H, Siiloothing
PLUGS SOCKETS
Description
&Fuse 0.5 Amp ~%e 2 Amp Fuse 2 hp 1 Eef.
F301 F302 R303
J.S. Cat , No,
25 901 08 Z59OldO 25901 I 0
Ds scr ip t ion u
Loudspeaker 3 ohms, Monitor
t
t L
Ref,
LS201
Pattern No.
66922
C
Ref,
PLI 01 PL103 PL201 FZ203 Hi204
PL205 I5301 XI 01
1 SKI02 SK201
SK202 SK2O3 SK301 I a302
I
A.P. or J o i n t Servioe
Cat . NO.
25 60070 f P m 577-71 ma 601 57 25 60080 AP. 60158
Em 60157 Z560050 AP. 60156 AP. 60451 AJI, 57772
Ape 60451 a451
Al?. i;[83 69 AP. 60156
Description
Plug 4 Pin, Aerial (a. 4) Plug 4 Pin, IF Output Plug 12 Pin, IF nit/^ U n i t Plug 6 Pin, Ou u t s (Mk; 4) Plug 8 Pin, IF % ower Unit
Plug 12 Pin, ~ ~ / ~ o w e r Unit Plug 2 Pin, Ivkins ( ~ k . 4) Socket 1 2 V~JT, W/IF Unit Socket Coaxjca31, R. I. S. Socket 4 W a y , IF Input
Socket Single, REC ! Socket Single, REB
Socket 8 Pin, IF/@' and Power U n i t Sodset 12 in, ~ / A F and Power U n i t
Thls.sheet issued wlth AL, No. 5, July, 1959 B,R.1617 PART', 3 LIST OF COHPONEMB RECEIVER 6ZB
, Ref,
WIOI- 107
Refi Pattern No. Description
Ref.
C r y s t d 500 kc/s, C a l i b r a t e Crys tc iL 2 Pin, Locnl Oscillator C r y s t n l , Crystal F i l t e r Jack 3 Pole, Phones Jzck 3 Pole, Phones
J,S, Cat. No.
16.130 x954 225
Description
Lamp P i l o t 6.5~ 0. JA
A.P, or Joint Service Cat, No,
I Description
Sxitch Lamp, Band Indication X a f e r Crystal, Crystal S w i t c h Svdtch 3 Posi t ion, BmPwidth Switch 5 Position, Syskem Switch Single Pole, Limiter
Svritch S i n g e Pole, D m Load S w i t c h Single Pole, hlonitor L.S. ST.;itch 2 Position, li.G*C. SuAtch Double Pole, Main3
Sw? 01 Sril 02 S220 1 St.2 0 2 ~ ~ ' 1 2 03
SIVa*20 l+ ~ i 2 05 Sii2 06 sg4j0 ?
*
- 65638 I - -
U963 6~
I
6044.8 or 50068
* I 5 CIRCUIT SHOWN IN BAND 2
I I I I 3 I I
I I
OSCILLATOR + ----------------
I------/
--------
OF COMPONENTS I N TURRET COMPARTMENTS
R.E UNIT
B.R.1617 Par t 3
FIG.66
PC203 SK301 POWER RECTIFIER
2 38 3 12 221 225 226 311 3 0 2 3 13 315
232 222 219 223 231 3 0 1 3 0 4 3 0 3 3 0 6 3 0 7 314 3 0 8
2 2 6 227. 249.228 2 3 0 3 0 6 3 0 5 316-7 315 314 3 12 3 0 9 229 3 18 3 0 4 3 13 311 3 10
224 22 5 3 0 3 19 RV220. SW203 V205 V204B. SW202 h PL203 SK301.V305 L 3 0 2 L 3 0 4 V 3 0 3 V 3 0 4 F S 3 0 1 TR302 FS302 P L 3 0 1
V 2 0 6 SK203 SW202f R V 2 , 4 P L 2 0 4 SK302 V 3 0 1 V 3 0 2 TR301 SK302 FS303 SW301 W202n SWZ06b. L S 2 0 1 fZV305 T R 3 0 3 SW302.RV309 JK301-2
P L 2 0 3 S K ~ L I
w5 T P L 2 0 4
A.E & POWER UNIT SK302 7 - +----+
R
C
MISC
RECEIVER 6 2 B C I RC U IT DIAGRAM
This sheet issued wi th A .L . No.5 July 1959
S W 2 0 6 d F
A
EXT. L S 3 W 6 O O n
6 S W 2 0 4
5
R
C
MlSC
2 0 1 2 0 4 2 0 5 2 0 6 2 0 8 2 0 9 2 12 211 235 237 2 0 2 2 0 3 2 4 0 2 0 7 210 239 213 228 2 3 0 2 3 6 234 2 18 227 229 233 231 2
2 0 2 2 0 1 2 0 5 2 0 4 206.240 242 241 2 0 7 209.212.211 217 215 216 214 2 2 223 2 0 3 2 38 2 10 213
2 2 2 221 2 2 0 218 2 0 8 232 233 2 3 7 235 236.234 PL2OI. SW201a.L201 V 2 0 l SW2Olf XL202 SW2Olq V202 T R 2 0 2 SW2Olc V 2 0 3 V204A T R 2 0 3 SK201 TR201 SW2Olb S W ~ O ~ J SW20lk.SWZOlh.L206 SW202q K 2 0 4 SW202p SK202 L 2 0 2
PL 2 0 2 SW 2 0 4 S W 2 0 6 d SW2Oboc SW202j SW202k X L 2 O SW202m L 2 0 4 L 2 0 3 L 2 0 6 SW2
PL 2 0 1 *2 T 1.F UNIT -
A.C.C.
> TO PL 204.6
: TO P L 2 0 3 . 2
SW2O j S W 2 0 2 k
- -
3rd I F
?nd I.F.
I2
I
1st I.F.
This sheet lssued wtth A.L.No.5 July 1959 B.R. 1617 Part 3
OSCILLATOR MIXER GRlD 2ND. R.E GRlD
------- ---- --
Clbb 4-18
C1 8 TRlll 59 P
BAND I 150 kc/s - 3 0 O k c ~ s
i
BAND 2 : 56Okc js -
I.SMC/S
BAND 3 3.9 Mc/s- 10 Mcjs
BAND 5 17.6 Mc/s - 3 0.5 M CIS
RECEIVER 628 A.P. 67757 A. TURRET SWITCH COMPONENTS. CIRCUIT D l AGRAM
Change No. 7 September 1967
COMPONENTS LIST - RECEIVER 6 2 ~ ~ . ~ . 6 7 7 5 7 ~
CAPACITORS
~ 5 . 1 6 1 7 PART 3 LIST w camctmms 6m7~ REC, 62s
1 1
b
Ref.
Cl01 C102 C l O 3 C l 04 ClG5
c106 C; 0, CI oe Clog C110
C I I ~ CIA2 c113 C A I 4 C l I 5
C v 6 C117 C I I E e l 1 9 C12C
C121 C l ZS CI r3 C? ,a+ C3 25
C ? 26 C127 C128 C 4 29 CAI -30
C131 C132 C133 C l y+ (335
A,P, or Joint-Service
Cat. No,
01 1-5095 Cb? 1-5095 01 2-4407 01 2-31 65 01 2-71 G j
07 2-71 03 01 6-0009
C12-7031
Value
O.I/UF 0.1,@'
O.Ol/ iF l o o PF 39 PF
39 PF 4-18 pF
12 pF I
O I 6-@009
01 6 - 0 ~ 0 9
01 6 - O G O ~ 01 2-7097 972-950'7 01 6-0009 C I L--j'loy
01 2 - 9 4 ? A, P. 601 E F 91 4 -5674 91 1-56-74 91 I -56 (4
Remarks
T r i m m e r
Tol. - +
2 8 Z@J 2 8 20$
5%
%
%
R a t i n g
35OV 35OV 35oV 350V 75cV
7 5 0 ~
75ov
T r i m m e r
Trimmer
T r i m m e r
T r i m m e r
Trimmer
I i
4-18 pF I I
4-1 8 pF
4-1 6 pF
330 PF ' 2 %
I
T r i m m e r
Trimmer
T r5mr.e r
i
75OV 350V
75ov
75ov
35GV 35OV 35OV
~ O O V 35ov 35OV
75OV
A. P. 601 89 ~'12-7081 01 2-4-40'; C I 2-51 65 01 6-OOC19
01 6-00@?
G I 6-0009 01 2-7089 01 6-0609
1 2-32: pF / $$ 2.2 pF I 0.5 pF
0 . 0 1 ~ i 2@ I OC pF j 2@
4-16 PF A ~ C I
4-18 pF ' I@
4-16 pF 1 0 p F
4-18 pF
l C $ 0 0 5 p F
1%
CAPACITORS ( ~ o n t ' dm )
Remarks
T r i m e r
T r i m m e r
Trimmer
T r i m m e r
T r i m m e r
Trimmer
Trimmer
Trimmer Trimmer
T r i m m e r
T r i m m e r
T r immer
Rating
75ov 35OV
75ov 75ov
35ov 75ov
35ov 75oV
35OV 75ov 5 0 0 ~
35ov 75OV 35OV
35OV
75OV 35ov
35OV 75ov 35Ov 35oV 350V
75OV
750v
75ov 35OV
7 5 0 ~
t 7
Ref,
r
CI36 C137 C138 C139 Cl40
Clkl C142 Cl43 c144 C145
CI 46 C147 C148 C149 cl50
Cl51 CI 52 C153 C154 C155
CI 56 c157 C158 c159 C160
i
CI 61 CI 62 CI63 Cl 64 CI 65
C A 66 C167 c16S CI69 C I 70
C171 C? 72 Cl73 CI A ~ 1 7 5
i
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
01 2-7097 972-9507 01 6-0009 01 2-71 07 01 2-3941
01 2-3927 01 2-71 07 01 6-0009 01 2-3946 01 2-7097
01 6-0009 972-21 43 01 2-7091 OI I -8276 0?6-oc09
91 1 -4646 01 2-7097 91 1-4958 01 6-0009 01 2-3945
01 2-71 01 01 2-3908 01 6-cOC9
A. P, 601 89
01 1-5095 01 2-7093 OI 2-34 65 01 1 -5095 01 1-5095
01 6-0009 01 6-0009 01 2-71 03 01 6-0009 01 2-7089
01 6-0009 01 2-7097 972-9507 01 6-0009 01 2-71 05
Value
22 pF 600 pF
4-1 8 pF 56 PF
330 PF
120 pF 56 PF
4-18 pF 390 PF
22 pF
4-18 pF 2200 pF
12 pF 6 .8pF
4-18pF
500 PF 22 pF I 0 pF
4-18 pF 390 PF
33 PF 33 PF
4-18 pF
12-322 pF
O e l p F 15 PF
I O O P F 0 . 1 , ~ F 0 . 1 p
4-48 pP 4-18 pF
39 PF 4-48 pF
1 0 p F
4-18 pF 22 pF
600 pF 4-18pF
47 PF
T o l . - +
% ssE
I@ 6 8 5% %
I @ % 5%
1% % 5%
2% 16
5% 8 5%
I @ %
5% %
1%
% 20% %
2% 2@ 2%
2% 2% !%
2% 0 , 5 p F
2% % 5%
2% 8
1 1 Change No. 7 September 1967
CAPACITORS (C ont a. )
b
Value
330 PF O e l ~
12-322 pF I O O P F 100 PF
I00 pF 470 PF 0 . y I00 pF
0.003/U'
120 pF 120 pF 120 pF 6.8 pF 6.8 pF
470 PF O e l ~ 0 . 1 ~ 0 . y 470 pkf
470 pF O01/UF 0 . I p F 0 . y 470 PF
470 PF O e l p F O e 1 F 0.1/@ 4-70 PP
IOO pF 0.02p.F
220 pF
0.1 p P
O 0 1 ~
O m 5 F 0.0 p . F 220pF 0 . 1 p
7
Ref.
CI 76 C177 C178 Cl79 c180.
CIS1 C182 ci a3 C184 CI85
C186 C187 C188 Cl89 CI 90
C 201 C202 C203 c 204 C205
c 206 C 207 C208 C209 C210
C211 C212 C213 C214 C215
c216 C217 C218 C219 C 220
C 221 C222 C223
, C2% c 225
A.P. o r Joint-Service
Cat. No,
01 2-3961 01 1 -5095
A. P. 601 89 01 2-31 65 01 2-31 65
01 2-71 I 3 01 2-3948 01 I -5095 01 2-71 13 91 1 -5674
01 2-3926 01 2-3926 01 2-3926 OI 2-7087 OI 2-6772
01 2-3948 @I I -781 8 01 1-5095 01 1-5095 01 2 ~ 3 x 8
01 2-3968 01 1-5095 01 1-5095 01 1-5095 01 2-3948
01 2-3948 01 1-5095
. 011-5095 01 I -5095 01 2-3968
01 2-34 65 OI 1-7826 01 2-3292
01 1-5095
01 1-5095 01 1 -5148 OI f -7826 01 2-3292 01 1-5095
r
Remarks
Ganged Capacitor
1
T o l , - +
2% 2% 26 2@ 2%
8 5% 2% %
Wo
% 6 %
0.5 pF 0.5 pF
% 2@ 2% 2% %
% 2@ 2& 2% %
% 2% 2 8 2% 5%
2% 2074 2%
2%
2% 2% 2% 2% 2@
Rating
75OV 35OV
35OV 350V
75ov 35ov 350v 75OV 35OV
75OV 75OV 75OV 75oV 75OV
35OV 35OV 35OV 35ov* 35OV
35OV 35OV 35OV 35OV 35OV
35Ov 35oV 35OV 35OV 35OV
35OV 75OV 35OV
35OV
35OV 35OV 75OV 3WV 35ov
Ref.
. c226 ~ 2 2 7 C 228 C229 C230
C23l en32 C233 C 234 C235
C236 C237 C238 c239 C a - 0
c 2k1 C&2 c243 cw c a 5
C u t 6 c a 7 C2Lt8 cVt9
C302 - C303
c304 C305
c306 c307 C308 c309 C3l C
C3ll C312 C3.13 c314 c3.15
A.P. o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
01 2-3548 012-31 65 01 2-3292 01 1 -7827 01 I -5095
01 2-341 2 01 1-7826 01 1-7826 012-31 65 01 2-341 2
01 2-3948 01 1 -7822 01 1-5095
945-4604
972-2071 C? 6-0047
042-31 65
01 1-9832 01 1-5525 01 1-2926
01 1-2426
01 2 + + 0 9 01 2+-09
01 2-4409 (2.1 2+09 01 I -7827 932-251 3 932-251 3
Value
470 pF IOOpP 220 pF
0 . 0 0 5 ~ O.I/UF
470 pF 0 .02pF 0 . 0 2 p
100 PF 470 pF
470 pF 0.05,d'
O.~,AIF
1.5/8 pF
75 PP 3-30 pF
I00 pF
0.25p.F 0.01,uF
4pF
4p-F
0.01 pF 0 .OlpF
0 . 0 1 ~ O.Ol/uF
0 .004pF
Tol , - -t
5% 2@ 1% 2% 2%
I @ 2% 2% 2% 1%
% 2% 2%
1 .5-8p
2%
2@ 2% 2%
2%
2@ 2%
2% 20$ 2%
Rating
35ov 35OV 75OV
1 OOOV 35OV
75ov 75ov 75OV 35OV 35OV
35ov ~ O O V 35OV
35ov
75OV
35OV ~ O O V koov
koov
75ov 75ov
75OV 75ov
1 OOOV 400V 400V
1
Remarks
Trimmer (OXLEY d i f f e r e n t i a l )
I.B.M, G O . 1510 Trimmer W & R C ~ O / O I
Type 82 Type 82
d2 Change No, 7 September 1967 ~~r .1617 PART 3 LISP aF ~~S 6775711
CAPACITORS (~oxrt'd.)
RESISTORS
i
Remarks
a
Ref,
, C316 C317 €318 C319
b
Ref,
I
R101 R102 RI 03 R104 R105
R106 RIOT R108 RI 09 Rl10
R l l l R112 RIA3 RI 14 R I I ~
R116 R l I 7 R118 RI I 9 R120
R121 R122 RI 23
R125
R126 R127 R3 28 RI 29 RI 30
Value
0.02pF O.I/iP
o o 0 5 p F
1 p
A.P. o r J o i n t -Service
Cat, No,
580-1 81 6 91 1 -6793 01 l-55% 01 1 -7821
T o l , - +
16 16 20% 2 6 '
A,P, o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
022-3091 022-3079 022-1 109- 022-21 23 022-1 002
022-3037 022-1 109 022-2004 022-2025 022-2037
022-2079 022-301 8 022-3037 022-221 6 022-31 21
022-2067 022-2004
. 022-1142 022-1 067 022-221 6
022-1 088 022-1 142 022-3030 022-21 00 022-1 184
022-2214 022-1 026 022-2214 022-2079 022-1 I 51
Rating
I
35OV 35OV 35oV 35ov
Tol, I, +
? @ I @ 1% 10% I @
loqb 1% 1% I@ 16 1% I@ 1@ 1% I@
1% 1% 1 6 I@
1% 10% 1% I@' 1 6
1% 4 % 1 6 10% 1%
Value
270k ohms 220k ohms I00 ohms 8.2k ohms
10 ohms
I OOk ohms I00 ohms
l k ohm 1 ,5k ohms I ,8k ohms
3.9k ohms 68k ohms
I OOk ohms 47k ohms
470k ohms
3.3k ohms l k ohm
180 ohms 47 ohms 47k ohms
68 ohms 180 ohms 82k ohms
5.6k ohms 390 ohms
47k ollms 22 ohms 47k ohms
3.9k ohms 220 ohms
Rating
&y FW &W 3
&W
*W &W &W
$7 ?w $W % @ 9 * ;W
4.w $W
4-W 2.w 3 a * &W 2~ $W ;W
&w &W &w
Remarks
4
1
RESISTORS (~ont'd.)
I
R e f .
R%Ol R2G2 R Z Q ~ R204 ~ 2 ~ 5
RZC6 R2C7 R2QS RZ09 R21G
R211 R212 R213 R214 R215
R218 R219 R221 R22.2 R223 ~ 2 2 2
Rir 26 R227 R226 R229 ~ 2 3 0
R231 R i 3 i R233
I
A.P. or Joint-Service
Cat, No.
C23-3G39 022-3037 022-1 1 93 022-2C9C 022-3039
622-3037 022-1 193 022-2090 C22-3618 ~ 2 2 - 1 1 30
(322-2G9C 622-3093 C22-21&2
CS2-309G c22-31& 022-21 95 C!2;-205?C ~ ~ 2 2 - 3 1 &+ (2.22-3143
C22-51L3 024-2' 53 (222-31 GS Gi2-3@1 8 022-21 30
622-5037 ~22-213% C22-1111
R234 RS35
1 ~ 2 3 6 R25-7 Ri38
I R 2 j ? 1 R a e
R30. R362
1 2% I R3@5 I
fil I -3!+82 022-3058
22-5091 (322-51-76 C22-22?4 C22-113C ~ 2 2 - 1 1 63
G22-5206 O~L-3028 C23-3079 022-1 151
Value
1 OOk ohms 'l OOk ohms 470 ohms 4.7k ohrrs 10Ok ohms
100k ohms 470 ohms 4.7k ohms 68k chms
150 ohms
4-,7k ohas 270k ohms 12k, ohms
4.7k ohms 1M ohm 33k ohms
4.7% ohms
Rating
3 i 3 FW 3 3 &W
6~ ZW
9 3 a $W
$W $W 3 $W a &W
-9 @ 3 3 &w I zw 3
%
Tol. - +
1% I@ I @ I MI 1 %
1% I Mm I@ I@ I@
A(% 1 6 1@
l@ I@ 1 0% 16
62c ohms 150k ohms
270k ohsris '.2M ohms -7k ohms
150 ohms
4
Remarks
4.5w $W
+W &W 3 &w $W
3 3 &W 9
% I@
I C$ U$ 18
Wiremur.d
*
, :2 27G ohms
2.2M ohms I I& 8% ohms I WC 22Ck o h s 1 1% 220 ohms ' 1%
j
1M oh. I 6&0kohms
680k ohms l5k ohms 330k ohms 68k ohms I O ~ ohms
10Ck ohms 30k ohms
IOC ohms
- 1q:
I@ I @ I@ 10% I ~2
16
1 ~k
Change No, 7 September 1967
RESISTORS (C ont ' do )
~JI.1617 PART 3 LIm m c%Mmmm 6m7A RI;c, a
I
Ref,
I
R306 R3 07 R308 R309
0
R ~ I 1 R312 R313 R314 R315
VALVES
b
Ref,
RV.101 RVI 02 RV220 RV224 Rv305{ RV309
AePo or Joint-Service
Cat. No.
022-31 21 022-2214 022-1 I 95
01 1-3508 022-2069 01 1 -3425 022-2048 022-1 195
AoP, o r J o i n t S e r v i c e
Cat, No,
900-4942 580-31 98 972-9484 972-9682 580-0482?
Ref,
Vl 01 Vl 02 vl03 vl 04 v201
V202 vzo3 ~ 2 0 4 V2O5 v206
Tol, - +
I @
16 40%
% l@ % 16 10%
I
Value
670k ohms 47k dl~-l~
470 ohms
7.5k ohms 3e3k ohms i5k ohms
2,2k ohms , 470 ohms
Value
I OOk ohms 20 ohms
1 OOk ohms 2.516 ohms
3k ohms 50 ohms
AeP, o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
0004014 000-4009 000-21 28 000-&014 000-4015
000-401 5 0 0 0 ~ 0 1 5 000-4007 000-4-007 OOO-bOl5
Rating
q $w
b. !jw * 6~ % *
Description
Tol. I +
2% 1% 20% :z 1%
Remarks
I
Wirewound
Wirewourld
4
Rating
SW 2.5W 0,lW 0,lW
I
Remarks
VALVES (C ont ' d. )
INDUCTORS
b
Ref,
~3 01 V302 V303 v304 v305
A,P. o r Joint-Service
Cat, No.
GO@-4009 000-4043 000-4005 OGO-boo5 000-41 OC
Ref,
L
Ll Q1 L102 L1 G 3 LlO4 L105 LI 06
L201 L202 L2@3 L204 Li 05 ~ 2 ~ 6
~ 3 0 2 L363 L304
Descr ip t ion
Ref ,
LS201
A,P. o r Jcint-Service
Cat. No,
A,P, 1 06096 A,P, 1 06097 A,P,l 061 14 ~ . ~ . 1 0 6 1 1 5 A,P.I 06116 ~ . ~ . 1 0 6 1 5 1
A,P,1061 1 8 A,P,I 061 21 Ampe I 061 23 A,P, 1061 24 A,P, 1 0 6 ~ 9 6 A,P.I 061 24
971 -961 8
974 -9595
A,P. o r Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat. No.
972-9307
Descr ip t ion
Co i l Tuned Osc, B a n d I Co i l Turied OSC, B ~ i d 2 Coi l Tuned Osc, Band 3 C o i l Tuned Osc, Band 4 Co i l Tuned Osc. B a n d 5 choke 1,5 d~
C o i l 1,F. Coil Turied
C c i l B,F,O. C o i l Wound
Choke 18K
Choke 20H
b
De s c r i p t ion
Loudspeaker
i
Change NO, 7 September 1967 ~.~,1617 PART 3 LIST OF ccMPoNms 6m7A R E C m @
SWITCHES
De s c r i p t i o n
~ r a n s f o r m e r R,F, Aer ia l Band 1 Transformer R.F, Aer ia l Band 2 Transformer R.F. Aer ia l Band 3 Transformer R,F. Aer ia l Bad 4 Transformer R.F. Aer ia l Band 5
Transformer R.F. I st R.F. Aerial Band 1 Transformer R.F. 1 st R,F. Aerittl Band 2 Transformer R,F. 1 st R.F. Aer ia l Band 3 Transformer R,F. 1 st R.F. Aer ia l Band 4 Transformer R.F. I st R.F. Aer ia l Band 5
Transformer R.F. 2nd R.F. Aerial Band 1 Transformer R,F. 2nd R.F, Aerial Band 2 Transformer R,F. 2nd R.F. Aerial Band 3 Tracsformer R.F. 2nd R,F, Aerial Band 4 Transformer R,F, 2nd R.F. Aer ia l Band 5
Transformer I ,F, Transformer I.F, Transformer I.F. Transformer I ,F,
Transformer Output Transformer Mains Transformer Output Monitor Loudspeaker
>
k
Ref.
TR101 TRI 02 TR103 TRlW T R ~ 05
TRlO6 T R ~ 07 TR108 TR109 TRI 1 0
TR111 TR112 TR113 TR114 TR115
TRI 1 6 TR201 TR20 2 TR203
T R ~ O ~ T R ~ 0 2 TR303
A,P. o r Joint-Service
Cat, No,
A, P, 1 06090 A,P. 1 06091 A. P, 1 84028 A,P, 184029 k,P,l 84030
A,P, 1 06092 A,P, 106093 A.P.1 06108 A,P, 1 061 09 A,P, 1 061 1 0
A,P. A 06094 A,P, 1 06095 ~ . ~ , 1 0 6 1 1 1 A,P. I 061 1 2 A.P,106113
~ ~ ~ ~ 1 0 6 1 1 7 A.~,106119 A,P,l06119 A,P, t 061 20
972-0053 971 -9596 971 -951 3
Ref.
SWI 02 SWlCi3 SW201 SW202 SW203 s W ~ &
S W Z O ~ SW301 SW302
A,P, o r Joint-Servic e
Cat, No,
48976 A808202
A,P. 206828 A,P, 206830
972-8826 A,pe43669
972-8825 933-001 8 972-5014
. De sor ip t i o n
Switck Band Ind ica to r Switch Crystal Switch Bandwidth (wafer a s f o r ~ 4 0 ) Switch System (wafer a s f o r ~ 4 . 0 ) Switch Limiter switch Single Pole
Switch A,G,C, Switch Two Pole Switch Single Pole
L
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
FUSES -
Ref,
PL101
PLI 02
PL201
PL202
~ ~ 2 0 3
P L ~ C ~
PL301
SKI 01 SK? 02 SKI 03 SK201 SK2G2
S K ~ C ~ SK2W SIC301 ~ ~ 3 0 2
LAMPS -
A.P, o r J o i n t -Service
Cat, No.
999-3526 97i-81 83{ 972-8214
972-821 0 972-8185 I 972-91 1 2
91 1-6428) 972-8208) 992-8185 ) 972-8210 ) 999-3526 586-3620
972-8233 972-8230 560-562~
5 8 ~ - 5 6 2 0
9 7 2 - ~ 3 2 y i2 -8233
Descript ion
1
Plug J+ Pin Fixed
plug paint on L+ way
Plug Pa in t on I 2 way
Flug 6 Pin Fixed
Plug Painton 8 way
plug painton 12 nay
P l ~ g 2 Pin Fixed
Socket Coaxial Socket (cry s t a l ) Socket Painton 1 2 way Socket Painton 4 way Socket, Coaxial
Socket Coaxial Socket (crystal) Socket Painton 8 way Socket Painton 1 2 way
Descript ion
Fuse Car t r idge Fuse Cartridge Fuse Cartr idge
Ref,
FS301 FS302 FSjC3
A.P. o r Joint-Service
Cat, Nc,
6 5 9 4 1 08 ' G59421 C 059-CllO
,
Descript ion
Lamp P i l o t Lamp P i l o t Lamg P i l o t Lamp P i l o t Lamp P i l o t
Lamp P i l o t Lamp P i l o t
Value
G.56 2.A 2A
Value
6 . 5 ~ 3A 6 . 5 ~ 3A 6 . FV 3A 6 . 5 ~ 3A . 6 . 5 ~ 3A
6 . 5 ~ 3A 6 . 5 ~ 3A
. Ref,
LPI C 1 LPI 02 LFI 03 LPI 04 LPI C 5
LP? ~6 LP107
A.P, o r Jcirlt-Service
Cat. No,
955-1225 995-1 225 595-1 225 995-1 225 995-1 225;
995-1 225 995-1 225
d
Change No. 7 September 1967
A,P, or Ref. Jo in t -Serv ice
Cat, No, Descr ip t ion
CV7130 Germardum Rectif i er
Crystal 500 kc/s - b.f.o. Crystal 50 kc/s - Filter
Jack 3 Pole Jack 3 Pole
Change N s . 1 . B.R.1617
The following sheets cmntain details of the Pattern numbers of Transformers, C o i b a d Switches f o r d t s of & P. ~~~L@/A/B/c/D and A.P. 6n57/A Receivers. The relevant items i n the component list8 in B.R. 1617 shmld be annotated to the effect that further information is available a t the rear of the book.
&
Receiver A.P. No*
571 40/@%/c
571 4dIr/~/c
571 40/n/~/c
571 ICO/A/B/C
571 40/4/~/c
574 w/A/B/c
571 @/A
571 408/c
5 7 1 m
Ci rcu i t Refe
TRIO1
TRI 02
TR 1 03
LA02
TRI 0 4 L201
~ 2 0 2 / 5 L203 L204
~ ~ 2 0 1 / 2 TR263 L301
~ ~ 2 0 1 / 2 ~ ~ 2 0 3 ~ 2 0 6 LI 0B
I TRI 01 TRIO2 Tli?03 TR 1 OJ+. TRIO5
I
De rrcript ion
Aerial Transformer, Band I Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5
R.F. G r i d C o i l ( I a t ref. ) Bana 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5
Mixer Grid C o i l (2nd ref. ) Band I and 2 Band 3 Band 4 B~~ 5
Osci l la tor C o i l Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 ~ a ~ n a 5
1,F. Assembly I,F, A s s e m b l y
B, F, 0, Assembly Pitch C o i l (LOW) Pitch Coil (Tune)
1.F. Assenibly I.F. Assembly Choke 1H ( ~ i l t e r )
Crystal F i l t e r I.F. Assembly I,F. ~ ~ s e m b l y c o i l ~ u n e d (500 kc/s) Choke 1.5 mH
Aerial Transformer, Band 1 Band 2 B m d 3 Band 4 Band 5
A,P,No,
184026 186027 I 84028 184029
NSN
184028 184029 1 84030
184030 1
106099 106100 1061 08 106109 106110
106101 106102 106111 106112 106113
1061 03 106104 1061 14 106115 106116
106117 106118
106t21 1061 23 1061 22
1061 05 106106 106152
106107 106119 1061 20 1061 24 106151
186026 186027
+
Receiver A.P. No.
571-
571 4023
571 W
5 7 1 0
5714m
L
Circuit
m106 TRI 07 TRI 08 TR? (33 TRIIO
TRI 3 1 152112 m413 TRI 1 4 l2w?5
Llo.1 L102 L.103 L.3 Q4 L3 05
at116 L B I m 2 0 1 j 2 TRm3
~ 2 0 g 5 La06 LIQ6
I
A.P,No.
4 06099 106100 1061 08 i0610q W6110
3 064 01 ' loCs.1@2 i 106111 . to6112
196113
1 a6.t 03 , 106104
106114 106195 106116
I 061 17 3C%Iit8 l&;z?9 I .e6 I. ao
106121 1061 24 406151 .to61 07
Description
R.F. G r i d Coil (1st ref. ) Band I Band 2 Band 3 Bmd l+ Band 5
Mixer Grid. Coil ( 2 d r. f .) Band 1 I B& 2
B a r d 3 B m d 4 Band 4
Osci l la tor C o i l Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 E3and 4. B a d 5
X.F. A s s d l y
'
B.F.0, A s s e m b l y C o i l W e d (50-0 kc/s) c h o k 1.5 SLH Crystal F i l t e r
- .
+
E W
w
G 4 4
8 *rl 4=' PC *rl k 0 m 8
+=
-3 k *d U
P! -4 k $ 0 '
R Q)
4 -.
a a a a a
PI c c u mP!o .a v-d'b% PI
rCVm(3\ * m u 0 em\oP:O\ n n m m mmm4cu4cu m m u t c u 4 ~ '3 m m m -
\OW l rn l a 7 GG3;4" \O\O\OW \ O W W I u \ m r n o 8 J % W \ O W W
L n l n I n I n I n m o W O w o f 8 W w w * InLnLnln m n m o 8 \OW\O\D ~ \ o \ o n o n o u \ o r n o m o m o \ O \ O \ O ~ O
O \ D O W O ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ n o m o m o m o r n o mcu cncu g" C"" EN mcu o\" C"cu ma mcu cncu m m m Ln ~ n l n m ~ n n
2
*d n *rl n - .rl - - n -14 n-n -d n -14 n n n n n .d .rl *rl 3 += .d -rl *rl 3 += l d r l += *rl .rl *rl 3 +, .rl 'd 'rl 3 3 += 2 -.rl.,..,.,-, - .rl - ad . , - , .d - .r( v . r l . d . 4 4 V . d . d . 4 .,-, W .A .d .d V *rl - *d =rl -d
m m -*A- a a -*,-I- m a - * r l - : g u .A w 0 a - o ~ l w o a w 8 -*- 0 a u
-.,-Iw - PC a> & $ PC Q PC @ & a Q
+> += Y 4= += rc)H m H W H V\H C-H * * g* 3 - 3"
+= d * += 3 zi 3 rl *d * * X
% 8 IR m m m * 3 m
s P i N C\1 CU
25 P iz P P
=? e e FI
3 r r
TJ- 7 v F
3 F
ST lc tC P- c- e- n In 0 In In
I
N S l A.P. No,
184028 184029 184030
106108 106109 1061 10
1061 1 j 1061 12 1061 13
1061 14 1061 15 1061 16
1061 17 1061 18 1061 19 1061 20
106121
1061 22 106123 1061 24 1061 51
Description
Aerial Transformer Band 1 Band 2
3 4
Band 5
R.F. Grid Coil (1s t r.f .) Band 1 Band 2 Band. 3 Band 4 Band 5
Mixer Grid Coil (2nd r.f.) Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5
Osc i l l a to r Coil Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 -4 Band 5
1.F. Assembly
B ,F,O. Assembly
Pitch Coil (Tune) Pitch Coil [ low) Coil Tuned 500 kc/s) Choke 1 .5 mH -- - -
Circ, Ref, A.Pe67757
TRIO1
TRIO2
TRIO3
L102
TRIO4 L201 TR20 1 /2 TR203
~ 0 2 / 5
u o 4 Go3 L206 L101
Circ, Fief, A*P*67757A
TRIO 1 TR102 TRIO3 TRIO4 TR1.05
TRIO6 ~ ~ 1 0 7 mi108 TRI 09 TR1 10
TR111 TR112 TR113 TFt114 ~ ~ 1 1 5
LlOl L102 L103 L104 LI 05
TR116 I201 TR20 1 /2 TR203
u o 4 L203 L206 L106